Supplementary Protectors. Circuit Breakers & Circuit Breakers & Supplementary Protectors Contents

Transcription

1 -1 May 008 Circuit Breakers & Supplementary Protectors Contents Description Page Series C vs. Series G Typical Applications Series G Globally Accepted Breaker Product Line Overview Electrical Characteristics Amperes (EG Frame) Amperes (JG Frame) Amperes (LG Frame) Amperes (NG Frame) Amperes (RG Frame) Motor Circuit Protectors Motor Protector Circuit Breaker Earth Leakage Modules Special Features and Accessories Plug-in Blocks and Drawout Cassettes Handle Mechanisms Dimensions Series C North American Standards and Special Application Breakers Product Line Overview Quick Reference Amperes (GD Frame) Amperes (FD Frame) Amperes (JD Frame) Amperes (KD Frame) Amperes (LD Frame) Amperes (MD Frame) Amperes (ND Frame) Amperes (RD Frame) Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Add-on Ground Fault Protection Internal Accessories External Accessories Dimensions Motor Circuit Protectors Supplementary Protectors Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Hydraulic-Magnetic Series C Series G

2 - Series C vs. Series G Product Line Overview May 008 Typical Applications Machine Tool Control Panels and Motor Control Centers Designed for these equipment requirements, including new world-class accessories. Panelboards As both main and branch circuit protection devices. Feeder Pillars In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection. Switchgear In distribution systems to provide main and branch circuit protection up to 00 amperes (RG-Frame). Bus Bar Trunking Tap-Offs In bus bar trunking tap-offs to provide circuit protection. Individual Enclosures Completely assembled in enclosures to meet specific customer requirements. Additional Applications Special versions of each Cutler-Hammer frame are available to provide safe equipment control and protection in mining and other applications. Contact your Eaton agent or distributor for additional information. Bus Bar Trunking Tap-Off Switchboard Panelboard Individual Circuit Breaker Enclosure Machine Tool Control Panel Table -1. Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Eaton Assembles Frame Ampere Range Figure -1. Typical Cutler-Hammer Applications Panelboards Switchboards Motor Control Centers Enclosed 1A A A 4 P PRL-C IFS Freedom IT. Control Series G EG JG 0 0 LG 60 NG RG Series C FD/ED 1 JD 70 0 KD LD 400 MDL ND RD amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for EG. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for LG. 100 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG. Bus Plugs Enclosed Breaker Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers cover the widest range of applications in the industry: Electrical OEMs. Machinery OEMs. Navy Breakers: UL Supplement SA and SB MIL-C-1788 MIL-C-1761 Mining Breakers up to 1 Vac. Earth Leakage. DC Breakers 1 70 Vdc. Engine Generator Breakers amperes. Current Limiting Breakers.

3 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Product Line Overview - General Information Cutler-Hammer Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers provide increased performance in considerably less space than standard circuit breakers or comparable fusible devices. The G signifies global applications: Series G circuit breakers are marked with UL, CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA KEUR listings. Other advantages include: Field-fit accessories. Common accessories through 60 amperes. Electronic trip units from 0 to 00 amperes. UL-listed and IEC-rated, 0 ma ground fault/earth leakage modules. Built-in ground fault protection down to 0 amperes. The EG, JG and LG frames are designed around space-saving footprints. The NG and RG use the proven Cutler-Hammer Series C ND and RD designs but use metric threading on their line and load conductors. Cutler-Hammer Series G Circuit Breakers meet applicable UL 489 and IEC standards. The Cutler-Hammer Series G family includes five frame sizes in ratings from 1 to 00 amperes. Series G offers a choice of several interrupting capacities up to 00 ka at 480 volts ac (00 ka at 40 volts ac). Standard calibration is 40 C. For applications in high ambient temperature conditions, 0 C factory calibration is available on thermal magnetic breakers (not UL). The Most Logically Designed Contact Assembly The flexibility and outstanding performance characteristics of Cutler- Hammer Circuit Breakers are made possible by the best contact designs in circuit breaker history. Our patented technology creates a high-speed blow-open action using the electromechanical forces produced by high-level fault currents. Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers are operated by a toggle-type mechanism that is mechanically trip-free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuit currents. Tripping due to overload or short circuits is clearly indicated by the position on the handle. This remarkably fast and dependable contact action is designed to enhance safety. Thorough In-Plant Testing The quality, dependability and reliability of every Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker is ensured by a thorough program of in-plant testing. Two calibration tests are conducted on every pole of every circuit breaker to verify the trip mechanism, operating mechanism, continuity and accuracy. ISO Certification Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers are manufactured in ISO certified facilities. Current Limiting Characteristics Circuit breakers are current limiting because of their high repulsion contact arrangement and use of state-ofthe-art arc extinguishing technology. Eaton offers one of the most complete lines of current limiting breakers in the industry. The industrial breakers are available in current limiting versions with interrupting capacities up to 00 ka at 480 V without fuses in the same physical size as standard and high interrupting capacity breakers. Operating Mechanisms Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers have a toggle handle operating mechanism, which also serves as a switching position indicator. The indicator shows the positions of: ON, OFF and TRIPPED. The toggle handle snaps into the TRIPPED position if the breaker is tripped by one of its overcurrent, short circuit, shunt or undervoltage releases. Before the circuit breaker can be reclosed following a trip-out, the toggle handle must be brought beyond the OFF position (RESET). The circuit breaker can then be reclosed. As an additional switching position indicator for EG- to RG-Frame circuit breakers, there are two windows on the right and on the left of the toggle handle, in which the switching state is indicated by means of the colors red, green and white corresponding to the ON, OFF and TRIPPED positions respectively. OFF RESET ON Tripped Figure -. Positions of the Toggle Handle Drive

4 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Product Line Overview May 008 Standards and Certifications Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers from Eaton are designed to conform with the following international standards: Australian Standard AS 184 and AS 947- Molded Case Circuit Breakers. British Standards Institution Standard EN International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC Circuit Breakers. Japanese T-Mark Standard Molded Case Circuit Breakers. National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Publication No. AB1-199 Molded Case Circuit Breakers. South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SANS 16, Standard Specification for Molded Case Circuit Breakers. Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 947., Safety Regulations for Circuit Breakers. Union Technique de l Electricite Standard NF C 6-10, Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Circuit Breaker Requirements. Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnike (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear, Circuit Breakers. Global Third-Party Certification Certification marks ensure product compliance with the total standard via the third party witnessing of tests by globally recognized independent certification organizations. KEMA is a highly recognized, independent international organization that offers certification and inspection facilities for equipment in many industries. The KEMA-KEUR mark is the highest certification an electrical product can receive from KEMA. Our IEC Molded Case Circuit Breakers are KEMA tested and certified. These breakers are also listed in accordance with UL 489, as well as CSA C. No. -0. KEMA, UL and CSA provide ongoing follow-up testing and inspections to ensure that Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers continue to meet their exacting standards. General Information Eaton s electrical business, under the Cutler-Hammer brand, offers the widest variety of molded case circuit breakers available today. Designed for electrical and machinery OEMs serving a range of industries and applications, these proven designs incorporate the latest in innovation with the high reliability that has been our hallmark since the advent of the circuit breaker in the 190s. The Series C family ranges from 1 00 amperes, and includes thermalmagnetic breakers, electronic trip breakers, molded case switches, motor circuit protectors, and specially designed breakers for Engine Generator, DC and mining applications. The new Series G line features an average % size reduction, common field-installable internal accessories, and advanced trip unit functionality that eliminates the need for rating plugs. These breakers meet the requirements of UL, CSA, IEC, CCC and CE, allowing the OEM to standardize on a design that meets the needs of their global customer base.

5 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes EG through LG - Electrical Characteristics Table -. Electrical Characteristics Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) EG JG LG 1, , 60 Breaker Type B E S H C E S H C U X E S H C U X of Poles 1,, 4,, 4 1,, 4 1,, 4, 4,, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4 Breaker Capacity (ka rms) ac 0 60 Hz NEMA, 40 Vac UL, CSA 480 Vac IEC Vac /0 Vdc Vac Vac Vac Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics / Icu Vdc Ics Ampere Range A 0 0 A 60 A Trip Units F = Fixed A = Adjustable T = Thermal M = Magnetic Thermal Magnetic Electronic rms Dimensions Inches (mm) FT-FM AT-FM FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 10) 1 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. EG breaker rated /47 Vac. Two poles in series. Not suitable for dc application. 4-pole ground fault not available. 1 Vdc only for 1-pole breakers. FT-AM AT-AM Electronic (Digitrip RMS 10) Interchangeable Built-in Fixed Thermal Adjustable Thermal Magnetic Fixed Adjustable Adjustable LS LSI LSG LSIG H W D H W D H W D 1-Pole (.4).99 -Pole (19.7).00 (0.8) (76.0) Pole.00 (76.) (177.8) (10.0) (87.4) (8.0) (140.0) (104.0) Weight (approximate) lbs. (kg) 4-Pole 4.00 (101.6).4 (1.6) 7. (18.0) 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole -Pole 4-Pole 0.8 (0.9) 1.7 (0.71).8 (1.04).8 (1.9) 11. (.1).06 (.0) T/M.1 (.41) ETU 6.76 (.07) T/M 7.1 (.) ETU Utilization Category A A A 1.6 (.61) T/M 1.04 (.9) ETU 16.7 (7.9) T/M 16.9 (7.68) ETU

6 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes NG and RG May 008 Table -. Electrical Characteristics (Continued) Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) NG RG 800, , 000, 00 Breaker Type S H C S U H C of Poles,, 4, 4 Breaker Capacity (ka rms) ac 0 60 Hz NEMA, 40 Vac UL, CSA 480 Vac Vac IEC Icu Vac Ics Icu Vac Ics Icu Vac Ics Vdc Icu Ics Ampere Range A 1 A 800 A A Trip Units Electronic Electronic (Digitrip RMS 10, 610 and 910) Interchangeable Built-in Electronic LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Dimensions H W D H W D Inches (mm) 1-Pole -Pole -Pole (406.0) 8. (10.0).0 (140.0) (406.0) 1.0 (94.0) 9.7 (9.0) 4-Pole 11.1 (80.0) 0.00 (08.0) Weight (approximate) lbs. (kg) -Pole 4-Pole -Pole 4-Pole 46.8 (1.) 6.0 (8.) 10.0 (47.0) (4.0) Utilization Category A A The NG and RG MCCBs use metric threading in their line and load terminals. If English (Imperial) threading is needed, use Series C ND and RD MCCBs. Contact Eaton for more information. NG 1 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed. Not KEMA-KEUR listed. IEC H. Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested. Not suitable for dc application. 4-pole ground fault not available. Available only on Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units.

7 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes EG through RG -7 Table -. EG through RG Electrical Characteristics Technical Data EG JG LG NG RG Maximum Rated Current I n Depending on the Version Rated Insulation Voltage U, According to IEC Main Conducting Paths Auxiliary Circuits Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage U imp Main Conducting Paths Auxiliary Circuits Rated Operational Voltage U e IEC NEMA 160 A 0 A 400, 60 A 800, 100, 1 A 1, 000, 00 A 00 Vac 00 Vac 70 Vac 690 Vac 70 Vac 690 Vac 1 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG. 60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. 100 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG. See footnotes for exceptions. Thermal overload release set to the lower value. Thermal overload release set to the upper value. Not suitable for dc switching. 6 kv 4 kv 690 Vac Y/47 Vac 8 kv 4 kv 690 Vac Vac 8 kv 4 kv 690 Vac Vac 70 Vac 690 Vac 8 kv 4 kv 690 Vac Vac 70 Vac 690 Vac 8 kv 4 kv 690 Vac Vac UL and CSA Listed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Permissible Ambient Temperature -0 to +70 C -0 to +70 C -0 to +70 C - to +60 C - to +60 C Permissible Load for Various Ambient Temperatures Close to the Circuit Breaker, Related to the Rated Current of the Circuit Breaker Circuit Breakers for Plant Protection At 40 C At 0 C At C At 60 C At 70 C Circuit Breakers for Motor Protection At 40 C At 0 C At C At 60 C At 70 C Circuit Breakers for Starter Combinations and Isolating Circuit Breakers At 40 C At 0 C At C At 60 C At 70 C Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity (dc) Not for Circuit Breakers for Motor Protection (Time Constant = 10 rms) Conducting Paths in Series For EG to LG up to 0 Vdc NEMA (Time Constant = 8 rms) Conducting Paths in Series 0 Vdc Main Switch Characteristics According to IEC in Combination with Lockable Rotary Drives Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity According to IEC (at ac 0/60 Hz) % 96% 9% 91% 86% % % 96% 91% 86% 4 ka Max. 4 ka Max. % 9% 87% 8% 7% % 96% 94% 9% 88% % % % % 90% % % 96% 8% 88% 4 ka Max. 4 ka Max. % 94% 90% 87% 80% % 96% 9% 90% 84% % % % % 90% % % 9% 90% 84% 4 ka Max. 4 ka Max. % 91% 86% 8% 70% % 91% 8% 81% % 91% 8% 81% % 91% 8% 81% % 91% 8% 81% Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity See Table - on Page - Endurance (Operating Cycles) 10,000 10,000 8,000,000,000 Maximum Switching Frequency 00 1/h 40 1/h 40 1/h 60 1/h 0 1/h

8 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes EG through RG May 008 Table -. EG through RG Electrical Characteristics (Continued) Technical Data EG JG LG NG RG Conductor Cross Sections and Terminal Types for Main Conductors Solid or Stranded Finely Stranded with End Sleeve Bus Bar Tightening Torque for Box Terminals Tightening Torque for Bus Bar Connection Pieces Conductor Cross Sections for Auxiliary Circuits with Terminal Connection or Terminal Strip Solid Finely Stranded with End Sleeve With Brought-out Cable Ends Tightening Torque for Fitting Screws Power Loss per Circuit Breaker at Maximum Rated Current l n (The Power Losses of the Undervoltage Releases ( r Releases) Must Be Observed if Necessary) at Three-Phase Symmetrical Load) For Plant Protection As Isolating Circuit Breaker For Starter Combinations For Motor Protection Permissible Mounting Position Box Terminals. to 9 mm. to 0/70 mm.6 Nm.6 Nm Box Terminals 0 to 10 mm to 10 mm 0 Nm 1 Nm 0.7 to. mm 0.7 to. mm 0.7 to. mm 0.7 to. mm 0.8 (AWG 18) mm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 40 W 40 W 40 W W W W W Box Terminals 9 to 40 mm 70 to 10 mm 4 Nm 0 Nm 0.7 to. mm 0.7 to. mm 0.8 (AWG 18) mm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 400 A: 6 W 6 W 6 W 6 W Flat Bar Terminals A 1 Nm 6 Nm A: 10 W 10 W 10 W 10 W Flat Bar Terminals Optional 1 Nm 0 Nm Up to x4 mm Up to x. mm 0.8 (AWG 18) mm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 87/10 W 87/10 W Flat Bar Terminals Optional 0 Nm Up to x4 mm Up to x. mm 0.8 (AWG 18) mm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0/70/400 W 0/70/400 W Arc Spacing Suitable for Reverse-Feed Applications Yes (Except HMCPE) Yes Yes Yes Yes

9 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes EG through RG -9 Table -. EG through RG Electrical Characteristics (Continued) Technical Data EG JG LG NG RG Auxiliary Switches Rated Thermal Current l th Rated Making Capacity ac (ac-1) Rated Operational Voltage Rated Operational Current dc (dc-1) Rated Operational Voltage Rated Operational Current Backup Fuse Miniature Circuit Breaker 6 A 0 A 0/400/ V 6//0. A 1/0 V 0./0. A 6/4/4 A 6/4 A Releases Undervoltage Releases ( r Releases) Response Voltage: Drop (Breaker Tripped) U s 70% Pickup (Breaker May Be Switched on) U s 8 110% Power Consumption in Continuous Operation at: 0/60 Hz 1 Vac 0/60 Hz 4 Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc Maximum Opening Time Shunt Trips 0.9 VA 0.7 VA VA VA VA..9 VA.4 4. VA 0.88 W 0.70 W W W W 0 ms 6 A 0 A 0/400/ V 6//0. A 1/0 V 0./0.1 A 4 6/4/4 A 6/4 A 70% 8 110% 1.9 VA.9 VA..8 VA VA.7.8 VA.4.8 VA.4 4. VA 1.6 W.1 W.0.1 W 1.6. W.1 4 W 0 ms 6 A 0 A 0/400/ V 6//0. A 1/0 V 0./0.1 A 4 6/4/4 A 6/4 A 70% 8 110% 1.9 VA.9 VA..8 VA VA.7.8 VA.4.8 VA.4 4. VA 1.6 W.1 W.0.1 W 1.6. W.1 4 W 0 ms 6 A 0 A V 6 A 1/0 V 0./0. A 4 6/4/4 A 6/4 A 70% 8 110% 1.9 VA.4 VA. 4.1 VA.4 4. VA VA VA.6 W.6 W.. W.9.6 W W 6 ms 6 A 0 A V 6 A 1/0 V 0./0. A 4 6/4/4 A 6/4 A 70% 8 110%.9 VA.1 VA VA..8 VA VA VA.4 W 4. W W..8 W W 6 ms Shunt Trips ( f Releases) Response Voltage: Pickup (Breaker Tripped) U s % % % % % Power Consumption in (Short Time) at: 0/60 Hz 4 Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz Vac 0/60 Hz 80 Vac 0/60 Hz 480 Vac 1 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc Maximum Load Duration VA VA 8 60 VA VA 9 10 W W W VA VA 66 4 VA VA 4 60 VA W W W 40 8 W VA VA 66 4 VA VA 4 60 VA W W W 40 8 W VA 4 0 VA 67 4 VA VA 19 4 VA W W W 46 W Interrupts Automatically Maximum Opening Time 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 6 ms 6 ms Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip) Unfused kaic at 480 Vac (41 Vac) Self-Protected, Will Trip Above: 6 (70) 10 for EG1; 1 for EG160 6 (70) 00 6 (70) 4000/600 6 (70) 1,00 61 VA VA VA VA 0 84 VA 96 W 41 8 W 64 0 W W 6 (70) 0,000

10 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes EG through LG May 008 DC Switching Duty The EG- to LG-Frame circuit breakers are also suitable for switching dc currents. The NG- and RG-Frame circuit breakers are not suitable for dc currents due to the solid-state overcurrent release system. For switching dc currents, however, the maximum permissible dc voltage per conducting path has to be considered. For voltages higher than 0 volts, the series connection of two or three conducting paths is required. As the current has to flow through all conducting paths so as to maintain the thermal tripping characteristics, the following circuit arrangements are recommended. With dc, the trip values of the instantaneous short circuit release ( n release) are increased by 0 to 40%. Table -4. For - and 4-Pole Circuit Breakers Proposed Circuit NSI-178a NSI-179a NSI-180 NSI-181 M M M M Maximum Permissible Vdc Ue Remarks 0 Vdc Double-pole switching. If there is no risk of an earth fault, or if any earth fault which occurs is immediately eliminated (earth fault monitoring), the maximum permissible dc voltage can be volts. 440 Vdc Double-pole switching (earth system). The earthed pole must always be assigned to the individual conducting path, so that two paths are always in series in the event of an earth fault. Vdc Single-pole switching (earthed system). Three conducting paths in series. The earthed pole must be assigned to the nonswitched conducting path. 70 Vdc Single-pole switching (earthed system). Four conducting paths in series. The earthed pole must be assigned to the nonswitched conducting path.

11 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Series G Electronic Trip Units -11 Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications Digitrip RMS Trip Units Curve Shaping When selectively coordinated systems are called for, Digitrip RMS 10+ will provide a cost-effective solution for a variety of applications. The standard Digitrip RMS 10+ includes an adjustable short time pickup setting encompassing an I t ramp function which provides the basic LS curve shaping function. JG- and LG-Frames have an adjustable long time delay. Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 True rms Sensing Digitrip RMS Trip Units utilize our patented microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing, permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present. Digitrip RMS 10+ Digitrip RMS 10+ Electronic Trip Units are available with Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers JG and LG. They are selectable long time delay (t LD ) and pickup settings (I r ). A rating plug is not required. The Digitrip 10+ offers true rms sensing, is front adjustable and has an optional local display of current and cause of trip. Plugs If rating plugs are needed for N- and R-Frame, they are marked for 0/60 Hz applications. Both fixed and adjustable rating plugs are available, providing further flexibility when applied to selectively coordinated systems. JG- and LG-Frames have selectable long time delay (t LD ) and pickup settings (I r ). A rating plug is not required. The optional Digitrip RMS 10+ provides additional flat response short time delay adjustments on an instantaneous setting to provide LSI curve shaping capability. Digitrip RMS 10+ Trip Units are available with ground fault pickup and flat response ground fault delay which provides the trip unit with full function LSG and LSIG curve shaping flexibility. Note: Contact factory for availability of ground fault for LG-Frame trip unit. Digitrip RMS 10+ Trip Units can effectively coordinate with both sophisticated upstream power breakers as well as downstream thermal magnetic breakers making Digitrip RMS 10+ Trip Units the cost-effective reliable choice for selectively coordinated systems. RMS 610 RMS 910 Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Trip Units are available with Cutler-Hammer R-Frame Circuit Breakers 800 through 00 amperes. Digitrip 610 and 910 Trip Units provide unparalleled system protection with the added convenience of a local display. Curve Shaping Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Trip Units are available with up to nine curve shaping choices achieved by adjusting up to seven switches on the front of the unit for optimum system coordination. Maximum curve shaping flexibility is provided by dependent long and short delay adjustments that are long delay pickup (I r ) based, depicted on the front of the unit by the blue portion of the time-current curve. Additional coordination capability can be provided by utilizing the short delay and ground fault zone selective interlocking features available on these trip units. Thermal Memory All Digitrip RMS Trip Units incorporate a long delay. Thermal memory prevents the system from cumulative overheating due to repeated overcurrent events that may occur in quick succession. Field Testing A field test kit is available for Digitrip RMS 10+ trip units.

12 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Series G Electronic Trip Units May 008 System Diagnostics Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 models of trip units provide long delay, short delay, instantaneous, and ground fault cause of trip LEDs on the front of the unit. Their display shows a magnitude of trip information, as well as remote signal contacts, for improved system alarming. System Monitoring Digitrip 610 and 910 Trip Units have the capability to monitor phase currents, as well as neutral or ground currents. This information is displayed on a large digital display mounted on the unit. Digitrip RMS 910 Trip Units can also provide the user with power and energy monitoring capability. Peak power demand, present power demand, and total energy, as well as forward and reverse energy can be monitored with this unit. Digitrip RMS 910 Trip Units have the additional capability of monitoring line-to-line voltage, as well as system power factor. Both parameters are displayed in the digital display window and are supported by LEDs to indicate which parameter is being displayed. Harmonics Monitoring Digitrip RMS 910 Trip Units are capable of displaying values of current harmonics in the digital display window. Percentage of harmonic content can be monitored for each phase, up to the 7th harmonic. Additionally, a total harmonic distortion value can be calculated and displayed. Communications Digitrip RMS 910 units have built-in communications options to allow all protection, monitoring, and control information to be transmitted back to a central location via the Cutler-Hammer PowerNet system. Field Testing Integral field testing capability is provided on all 610 and 910 Trip Units. No additional test set is needed to perform both trip and no trip field testing.

13 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Series G Electronic Trip Units -1 Digitrip RMS Electronic Trip Unit Selection Guide Table -. Digitrip RMS Electronic Trip Unit Selection Guide Digitrip RMS 10 RMS 610 RMS 910 JG RG LG/NG Breaker Type Cutler-Hammer Frame(s) JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames RG-Frame RG-Frame Ampere 0 00 A A A Interrupting at 41 V, 70, ka 70, ka 70, ka Trip Unit Sensing rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Protection and Coordination Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG Fixed Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Adjustable Plug (l n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Setting (l n ) (l n ) x (l n ) x (l n ) Long Delay Time I t at 6x 10 Seconds 10 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No 0.8 x I r 0.8 x I r Short Delay Short Delay Setting Var/Frame Var/Frame 00 % S1 & S x (I r ) 00 % S1 & S x (I r ) Short Delay Time I t ms No, 00, 00 ms, 00, 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No I 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time ZSI No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Instantaneous Setting No % x (l n ) 00 % M1 & M x (l n ) 00 % M1 & M x (l n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Ground Fault Setting Var/Frame Var/Frame % x (l n ) % x (l n ) Ground Fault Delay I t at.6x No No, 00, 00 ms, 00, 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat I 00 ms I 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault ZSI No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory No No Yes Yes System Diagnostics Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contacts No No Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Voltage No No No Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes System Communications PowerNet No No No Yes Field Testing Testing Method Test Set Test Set Integral Integral JG- and LG-Frames have selectable settings instead of a rating plug. JG-, LG- and NG-Frames have adjustable long delay times of 4 seconds. JG/LG: X 14X (I n ); NG: X 8X (I n ); RG: X 8X (I n ); 00 ampere RG-Frame 00 % x (I n ). JG-Frame also has a 14X setting. LS, LSG only. Not to exceed 100 amperes. JG- and LG-Frames are Instantaneous, 10 ms. NG- and RG-Frames are Instantaneous,, 00 and 00 ms. Note: I n = plug rating. I r = Long delay setting.

14 Amperes EG-Frame May 008 EG-Frame Eaton s Cutler-Hammer EG Product Description EG breaker is HACR rated. Technical Data and Specifications Table -6. UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles EGB1 1,, 4 dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. IEC only. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at 4 ka. Dimensions/Weights Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc Y/ I 47 cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs 18 Table -7. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Depth of Poles 18 EGE1,, EGS1 1,, 4 EGH1 1,, EGC1, (.4).00 (0.8).00 (76.) 4.00 (101.6).0 (19.7).0 (19.7).0 (19.7).0 (19.7).99 (7.9).99 (7.9).99 (7.9).99 (7.9) Table -8. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker of Poles Type 1 4 EGB1, EGE1, EGS1, EGH1, EGC1 1. (.68).0 (.91).0 (1.6) (1.8)

15 May Amperes EG-Frame -1 Product Selection Table -9. Main ing System E G H 01 FF G Frame Poles Amperes Terminations/Hardware E Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA Performance Y/ B E 18 S 40 8 H 6 70 C 00 K Molded Case Switch 1 = One = Two = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected 7 = Four Neutral % Protected Terminals M = Metric End Caps E = Imperial End Caps G = Line/Load Standard B = Bolt-On Trip Unit FF = Fixed Fixed AF = Adj. Fixed KS = Molded Case Switch Mounting Hardware Metric Imperial Metric Cannot be UL rated. Available only as 1 and 160 A sizes.

16 Amperes EG-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table -10. Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC at 41/480 Volts Max. 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole 0% Protected Neutral Cont. Fixed Fixed Fixed Adjustable Amps Fixed Adjustable Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal at 40 C Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic 18/ / / EGB101FFG EGB1016FFG EGB100FFG EGB10FFG EGB100FFG EGB10FFG EGB10FFG EGB1040FFG EGB10FFG EGB100FFG EGB1060FFG EGB106FFG EGB1070FFG EGB1080FFG EGB1090FFG EGB1FFG EGB11FFG EGS101FFG EGS1016FFG EGS100FFG EGS10FFG EGS100FFG EGS10FFG EGS10FFG EGS1040FFG EGS10FFG EGS100FFG EGS1060FFG EGS106FFG EGS1070FFG EGS1080FFG EGS1090FFG EGS1FFG EGS11FFG EGB01FFG EGB016FFG EGB00FFG EGB0FFG EGB00FFG EGB0FFG EGB0FFG EGB040FFG EGB0FFG EGB00FFG EGB060FFG EGB06FFG EGB070FFG EGB080FFG EGB090FFG EGBFFG EGB1FFG EGE01FFG EGE016FFG EGE00FFG EGE0FFG EGE00FFG EGE0FFG EGE0FFG EGE040FFG EGE0FFG EGE00FFG EGE060FFG EGE06FFG EGE070FFG EGE080FFG EGE090FFG EGEFFG EGE1FFG EGS01FFG EGS016FFG EGS00FFG EGS0FFG EGS00FFG EGS0FFG EGS0FFG EGS040FFG EGS0FFG EGS00FFG EGS060FFG EGS06FFG EGS070FFG EGS080FFG EGS090FFG EGSFFG EGS1FFG EGB01FFG EGB016FFG EGB00FFG EGB0FFG EGB00FFG EGB0FFG EGB0FFG EGB040FFG EGB0FFG EGB00FFG EGB060FFG EGB06FFG EGB070FFG EGB080FFG EGB090FFG EGBFFG EGB1FFG EGE01FFG EGE016FFG EGE00FFG EGE0FFG EGE00FFG EGE0FFG EGE0FFG EGE040FFG EGE0FFG EGE00FFG EGE060FFG EGE06FFG EGE070FFG EGE080FFG EGE090FFG EGEFFG EGE1FFG EGS01FFG EGS016FFG EGS00FFG EGS0FFG EGS00FFG EGS0FFG EGS0FFG EGS040FFG EGS0FFG EGS00FFG EGS060FFG EGS06FFG EGS070FFG EGS080FFG EGS090FFG EGSFFG EGS1FFG EGB0AFG EGB0AFG EGB040AFG EGB00AFG EGB06AFG EGB080AFG EGBAFG EGB1AFG EGE0AFG EGE0AFG EGE040AFG EGE00AFG EGE06AFG EGE080AFG EGEAFG EGE1AFG EGS0AFG EGS0AFG EGS040AFG EGS00AFG EGS06AFG EGS080AFG EGSAFG EGS1AFG 16,, 6 A are not UL listed ratings. Adjustable thermal are not UL listed. Change the fourth digit to 7 for % neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side. EGB401FFG EGB4016FFG EGB400FFG EGB40FFG EGB400FFG EGB40FFG EGB40FFG EGB4040FFG EGB40FFG EGB400FFG EGB4060FFG EGB406FFG EGB4070FFG EGB4080FFG EGB4090FFG EGB4FFG EGB41FFG EGE401FFG EGE4016FFG EGE400FFG EGE40FFG EGE400FFG EGE40FFG EGE40FFG EGE4040FFG EGE40FFG EGE400FFG EGE4060FFG EGE406FFG EGE4070FFG EGE4080FFG EGE4090FFG EGE4FFG EGE41FFG EGS401FFG EGS4016FFG EGS400FFG EGS40FFG EGS400FFG EGS40FFG EGS40FFG EGS4040FFG EGS40FFG EGS700FFG EGS7060FFG EGS706FFG EGS7070FFG EGS7080FFG EGS7090FFG EGS7FFG EGS71FFG EGB400AFG EGB40AFG EGB40AFG EGB4040AFG EGB400AFG EGB406AFG EGB4080AFG EGB4AFG EGB41AFG EGE400AFG EGE40AFG EGE40AFG EGE4040AFG EGE400AFG EGE406AFG EGE4080AFG EGE4AFG EGE41AFG EGS400AFG EGS40AFG EGS40AFG EGS4040AFG EGS400AFG EGS406AFG EGS4080AFG EGS4AFG EGS41AFG Discount Symbol CB-

17 May Amperes EG-Frame -17 Table -10. Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC at 41/480 Volts (Continued) Max. 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole 0% Protected Neutral Cont. Fixed Fixed Fixed Adjustable Amps Fixed Adjustable Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal Thermal at 40 C Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic 70/ / EGH101FFG EGH1016FFG EGH100FFG EGH10FFG EGH100FFG EGH10FFG EGH10FFG EGH1040FFG EGH10FFG EGH100FFG EGH1060FFG EGH106FFG EGH1070FFG EGH1080FFG EGH1090FFG EGH1FFG EGH11FFG EGH01FFG EGH016FFG EGH00FFG EGH0FFG EGH00FFG EGH0FFG EGH0FFG EGH040FFG EGH0FFG EGH00FFG EGH060FFG EGH06FFG EGH070FFG EGH080FFG EGH090FFG EGHFFG EGH1FFG EGH01FFG EGH016FFG EGH00FFG EGH0FFG EGH00FFG EGH0FFG EGH0FFG EGH040FFG EGH0FFG EGH00FFG EGH060FFG EGH06FFG EGH070FFG EGH080FFG EGH090FFG EGHFFG EGH1FFG 16,, 6 A are not UL listed ratings. Adjustable thermal is not UL listed. Change the fourth digit to 7 for % neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. EGC01FFG EGC016FFG EGC00FFG EGC0FFG EGC00FFG EGC0FFG EGC0FFG EGC040FFG EGC0FFG EGC00FFG EGC060FFG EGC06FFG EGC070FFG EGC080FFG EGC090FFG EGCFFG EGC1FFG EGH00AFG EGH0AFG EGH0AFG EGH040AFG EGH00AFG EGH06AFG EGH080AFG EGHAFG EGH1AFG EGC00AFG EGC0AFG EGC0AFG EGC040AFG EGC00AFG EGC06AFG EGC080AFG EGCAFG EGC1AFG EGH401FFG EGH4016FFG EGH400FFG EGH40FFG EGH400FFG EGH40FFG EGH40FFG EGH4040FFG EGH40FFG EGH400FFG EGH4060FFG EGH406FFG EGH4070FFG EGH4080FFG EGH4090FFG EGH4FFG EGH41FFG EGC701FFG EGC7016FFG EGC700FFG EGC70FFG EGC700FFG EGC70FFG EGC70FFG EGC7040FFG EGC70FFG EGC700FFG EGC7060FFG EGC706FFG EGC7070FFG EGC7080FFG EGC7090FFG EGC7FFG EGC71FFG EGH400AFG EGH40AFG EGH40AFG EGH4040AFG EGH400AFG EGH406AFG EGH4080AFG EGH4AFG EGH41AFG EGC700AFG EGC70AFG EGC70AFG EGC7040AFG EGC700AFG EGC706AFG EGC7080AFG EGC7AFG EGC71AFG Table -11. Molded Case Switches EGK1KSG EGK1KSG EGK41KSG Note: Molded case switches may open above 10 A. Discount Symbol CB-

18 Amperes EG-Frame May 008 Table -1. EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware) Max. 1-Pole Cont. Fixed Thermal Amps Fixed Magnetic 18 kaic at 480 Vac kaic at 480 Vac kaic at 480 Vac EGB101FFB EGB100FFB EGB10FFB EGB100FFB EGB10FFB EGB1040FFB EGB10FFB EGB100FFB EGB1060FFB EGB1070FFB EGB1080FFB EGB1090FFB EGB1FFB EGB1110FFB EGB11FFB EGS101FFB EGS100FFB EGS10FFB EGS100FFB EGS10FFB EGS1040FFB EGS10FFB EGS100FFB EGS1060FFB EGS1070FFB EGS1080FFB EGS1090FFB EGS1FFB EGS1110FFB EGS11FFB EGH101FFB EGH100FFB EGH10FFB EGH100FFB EGH10FFB EGH1040FFB EGH10FFB EGH100FFB EGH1060FFB EGH1070FFB EGH1080FFB EGH1090FFB EGH1FFB EGH1110FFB EGH11FFB -Pole Fixed Thermal Fixed Magnetic EGB01FFB EGB00FFB EGB0FFB EGB00FFB EGB0FFB EGB040FFB EGB0FFB EGB00FFB EGB060FFB EGB070FFB EGB080FFB EGB090FFB EGBFFB EGB110FFB EGB1FFB EGS01FFB EGS00FFB EGS0FFB EGS00FFB EGS0FFB EGS040FFB EGS0FFB EGS00FFB EGS060FFB EGS070FFB EGS080FFB EGS090FFB EGSFFB EGS110FFB EGS1FFB EGH01FFB EGH00FFB EGH0FFB EGH00FFB EGH0FFB EGH040FFB EGH0FFB EGH00FFB EGH060FFB EGH070FFB EGH080FFB EGH090FFB EGHFFB EGH110FFB EGH1FFB Discount Symbol CB-

19 May Amperes EG-Frame -19 Selection Guide and Ordering Information T1EF TA1EF TA10EF TA160EFK EFRTWK, -Pole Metric EF4RTWK, 4-Pole Metric EFRTDK, -Pole Imperial EF4RTDK, 4-Pole Imperial Control Wire Terminal Kit GCWTK Multiwire Connectors Line and Load Terminals EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals as standard equipment. Table -1. Line and Load Terminals Max. Breaker Amps Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm Standard line and load terminals. AWG Wire Range Package of Terminals Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 1 Steel Cu.-9 #14-/0 T1EF 1 1/ Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect bus bar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. Control Wire Terminal Kit For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load terminals only. Table -14. Control Wire Terminal Kit Package of 1 d Individually Control Wire Terminal Kit 6B8G01 Interphase Barriers The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering. Table -1. Interphase Barriers Package of d Individually Interphase Barriers Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al #14-1/0 #6-/0 #-0 #-0 TA1EF TA10EF TA160EFK 4TA160EFK EIPBK Base Mounting Hardware Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. number is BMHE #6 x inches. Table -16. DIN Rail Mounting DIN Rail Adapter - or 4-Pole EF4DIN Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed for copper only as used on the load side (OFF) end. Table -17. EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of ) Max. Amps 1 1 Terminal Shields The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in - and 4-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged individually. Table -18. Terminal Shields of Poles 4 Wires per Terminal 6 Wire Size Range AWG Cu IP0 Protection s EFTSK EFTS4K Kit TA1EK TA1E6K Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier) The terminal end cover is available for -pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. Table -19. Terminal End Covers Conductor Opening Diameter Inches (mm) 6. (0.) (0.41) EECK EEC4K Discount Symbol CB-

20 Amperes EG-Frame May 008 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -0. Accessories Description Reference 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -8 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -8 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -8 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -8 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -8 Shunt Trip Standard -8 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -8 External Accessories End Cap Kit -19 Control Wire Terminal Kit -19 Multiwire Connectors -19 Base Mounting Hardware -19 Terminal Shields -19 Terminal End Covers -19 Interphase Barriers -19 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -7 Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -7 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -7 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -7 Plug-in Adapters -9 Electrical Operator -7 Handle Mechanisms -60 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both

21 May Amperes JG-Frame -1 JG-Frame Eaton s Cutler-Hammer J0 Product Description JG breaker is HACR rated. Technical Data and Specifications Table -1. UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. Dimensions/Weights Table -. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Depth of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs JGE0,, JGS0,, JGH0,, JGC0, JGU0, JGX0, / 4.1 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8).7 (90.7) 4.4 (1.6) 7.00 (177.8).7 (90.7) Table -. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker of Poles Type / 4 JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX 6 (.7) 8 (.6)

22 - 6 0 Amperes JG-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table -4. Main ing System J G S O FA G C Frame Poles Amperes Trip Unit J Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA = Two = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected 8 = Four Neutral 0 60% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 0 Protected Performance E 18 6 S H 6 70 C 00 U AA = Adj. Adj. FA = Fixed Adj. KS = Molded Case Switch = 10+ Electronic LS = 10+ Electronic LSI = 10+ Electronic LSG 6 = 10+ Electronic LSIG NN = Frame Only (No Trip) Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric End Caps E = Imperial End Caps G = Line/Load Standard Metric Imperial Metric X K Molded Case Switch Blank = 80% Rated C = % Rated Table -. Trip Unit ing System JT 4 FA Trip Poles Amperes Trip Unit JT = Two = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected 8 = Four Neutral 0/60% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 0/% Protected T/M ETU AA = Adj. Adj. FA = Fixed Adj. KS = Molded Case Switch = 10+ Electronic LS = 10+ Electronic LSI = 10+ Electronic LSG 6 = 10+ Electronic LSIG

23 May Amperes JG-Frame - Product Selection Table -6. Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) IC at 41/480 Volts Maximum Continuous Amperes IEC/CE/UL/CSA / IEC/CE/UL/CSA 40/ IEC/CE/UL/CSA 70/ Magnetic Range IEC/CE/UL/CSA / IEC/CE/UL/CSA 10/ IEC/CE/UL/CSA 00/ Pole -Pole 4-Pole 0% Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGE070FAG JGE090FAG JGEFAG JGE1FAG JGE10FAG JGE17FAG JGE00FAG JGEFAG JGE0FAG JGS070FAG JGS090FAG JGSFAG JGS1FAG JGS10FAG JGS17FAG JGS00FAG JGSFAG JGS0FAG JGH070FAG JGH090FAG JGHFAG JGH1FAG JGH10FAG JGH17FAG JGH00FAG JGHFAG JGH0FAG Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGE070FAG JGE090FAG JGEFAG JGE1FAG JGE10FAG JGE17FAG JGE00FAG JGEFAG JGE0FAG JGS070FAG JGS090FAG JGSFAG JGS1FAG JGS10FAG JGS17FAG JGS00FAG JGSFAG JGS0FAG JGH070FAG JGH090FAG JGHFAG JGH1FAG JGH10FAG JGH17FAG JGH00FAG JGHFAG JGC070FAG JGC090FAG JGCFAG JGC1FAG JGC10FAG JGC17FAG JGC00FAG JGCFAG JGC0FAG JGU070FAG JGU090FAG JGUFAG JGU1FAG JGU10FAG JGU17FAG JGU00FAG JGUFAG JGU0FAG JGX070FAG JGX090FAG JGXFAG JGX1FAG JGX10FAG JGX17FAG JGX00FAG JGXFAG JGX0FAG Adjustable Thermal Adjustable Magnetic JGEAAG JGE1AAG JGE160AAG JGE00AAG JGE0AAG JGSAAG JGS1AAG JGS160AAG JGS00AAG JGS0AAG JGHAAG JGH1AAG JGH160AAG JGH00AAG JGH0AAG JGC080AAG JGCAAG JGC1AAG JGC160AAG JGC00AAG JGC0AAG JGU080AAG JGUAAG JGU1AAG JGU160AAG JGU00AAG JGU0AAG JGX080AAG JGXAAG JGX1AAG JGX160AAG JGX00AAG JGX0AAG Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0 60% neutral protection, 9 for 0 % neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side. IEC-EN only. Adjustment is.8 and 1.0. Discount Symbol CB- JGE4070FAG JGE4090FAG JGE4FAG JGE41FAG JGE410FAG JGE417FAG JGE400FAG JGE4FAG JGE40FAG JGS4070FAG JGS4090FAG JGS4FAG JGS41FAG JGS410FAG JGS417FAG JGS400FAG JGS4FAG JGS40FAG JGH4070FAG JGH4090FAG JGH4FAG JGH41FAG JGH410FAG JGH417FAG JGH400FAG JGH4FAG JGH40FAG JGC4070FAG JGC4090FAG JGC4FAG JGC41FAG JGC410FAG JGC417FAG JGC400FAG JGC4FAG JGC40FAG JGU4070FAG JGU4090FAG JGU4FAG JGU41FAG JGU410FAG JGU417FAG JGU400FAG JGU4FAG JGU40FAG JGX4070FAG JGX4090FAG JGX4FAG JGX41FAG JGX410FAG JGX417FAG JGX400FAG JGX4FAG JGX40FAG JGE4AAG JGE41AAG JGE4160AAG JGE400AAG JGE40AAG JGS4AAG JGS41AAG JGS4160AAG JGS400AAG JGS40AAG JGH4AAG JGH41AAG JGH4160AAG JGH400AAG JGH40AAG JGC4080AAG JGC4AAG JGC41AAG JGC4160AAG JGC400AAG JGC40AAG JGU4080AAG JGU4AAG JGU41AAG JGU4160AAG JGU400AAG JGU40AAG JGX4080AAG JGX4AAG JGX41AAG JGX4160AAG JGX400AAG JGX40AAG

24 Amperes JG-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table -7. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Ampere Range Range JT070FA JT090FA JTFA JT1FA JT10FA JT160FA JT17FA JT00FA JTFA JT0FA JT070FA JT090FA JTFA JT1FA JT10FA JT17FA JT00FA JTFA JT0FA JT080AA JTAA JT1AA JT160AA JT00AA JT0AA Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed JT4070FA JT4090FA JT4FA JT41FA JT410FA JT417FA JT400FA JT4FA JT40FA JT4080AA JT4AA JT41AA JT4160AA JT400AA JT40AA Table -8. Molded Case Switches JGK0KSK JGK0KSG JGK70KSG Note: Molded case switches will trip above 00 amperes. Table -9. Components Line and Load Terminal Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range No. Conductors Standard line and load terminals. Metric Wire Range mm Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 0 Aluminum Cu/Al 4 0 kcmil 18 TA0FJ 0 Stainless Steel Cu 4 0 kcmil 18 T0FJ Discount Symbol CB-

25 May Amperes JG-Frame - Product Selection Table -0. Components Frame IC at 41/480 Volts Maximum Amperes -Pole -Pole 4-Pole 0% Components % rated frame. To be used with electronic trip units only. Table -1. Plug-in Test Kit Table -. JG Electronic Trip Units / 0 JGE0NN JGE0NN JGE40NN 40/ 0 JGS0NN JGS0NN JGS40NN 70/6 0 JGH0NN JGH0NN JGH40NN / 0 JGC0NN JGC40NN 10/10 0 JGU0NN JGU40NN 00/00 0 JGX0NN JGX40NN / 0 JGE0NNWC 40/ 0 JGS0NNWC 70/6 0 JGH0NNWC JGH40NNWC Voltage 10 Vac 0 Vac Ampere LS MTST10V MTST0V LSI LSG Table -. Breaker Mount Ammeter Description Breaker Mount Ammeter DIGIVIEW Note: Use on electronic trip only. LSIG Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG -Pole 0 JT00 JT00 JT00 JT006 JGFCT00 JT JT JT JT6 JGFCT 160 JT160 JT160 JT160 JT1606 JGFCT160 0 JT0 JT0 JT0 JT06 JGFCT0 4-Pole 0 JT400 JT400 JT400 JT4006 JGFCT00 JT4 JT4 JT4 JT46 JGFCT 160 JT4160 JT4160 JT4160 JT41606 JGFCT160 0 JT40 JT40 JT40 JT406 JGFCT0 Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = % electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. Note: Long time pickup no rating plug. 0 Ampere Settings 0,, 00, 17, 160, 10, 1,. 160 Ampere Settings 160, 10, 1, 110,, 90, 80, 6. Ampere Settings, 90, 80, 70, 6, 0,, Ampere Settings 0,, 40,, 0,, 0. Note: Adjustable long time delay 4 seconds at 6 x lr. Adjustable short time delay Inst., 10, 00 ms Digitrip 10+ Test Kit Digitrip 10+ Test Kit Shown with JG MCCB JG Digitrip 10+ Electronic Trip Unit Ammeter Discount Symbol CB-

26 Amperes JG-Frame May 008 Table -4. Complete Breaker with Electronic Trip Units Ampere LS IEC/UL/CSA / -Pole LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG JGE00G JGEG JGE160G JGE0G JGE00G JGEG JGE160G JGE0G JGE00G JGEG JGE160G JGE0G JGE006G JGE6G JGE1606G JGE06G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 IEC/UL/CSA / 4-Pole JGE400G JGE4G JGE4160G JGE40G IEC/UL/CSA 40/ -Pole JGÒE400G JGE4G JGE4160G JGE40G JGE400G JGE4G JGE4160G JGE40G JGE4006G JGE46G JGE41606G JGE406G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT JGS00G JGSG JGS160G JGS0G JGS00G JGSG JGS160G JGS0G JGS00G JGSG JGS160G JGS0G JGS006G JGS6G JGS1606G JGS06G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 IEC/UL/CSA 40/ 4-Pole JGS400G JGS4G JGS4160G JGS40G IEC/UL/CSA 70/6 -Pole JGS400G JGS4G JGS4160G JGS40G JGS400G JGS4G JGS4160G JGS40G JGS4006G JGS46G JGS41606G JGS406G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT JGH00G JGHG JGH160G JGH0G JGH00G JGHG JGH160G JGH0G JGH00G JGHG JGH160G JGH0G JGH006G JGH6G JGH1606G JGH06G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 IEC/UL/CSA 70/6 4-Pole JGH400G JGH4G JGH4160G JGH40G IEC/UL/CSA / -Pole JGH400G JGH4G JGH4160G JGH40G JGH400G JGH4G JGH4160G JGH40G JGH4006G JGH46G JGH41606G JGH406G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT JGC00G JGCG JGC160G JGC0G JGC00G JGCG JGC160G JGC0G JGC00G JGCG JGC160G JGC0G JGC006G JGC6G JGC1606G JGC06G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 IEC/UL/CSA / 4-Pole JGC400G JGC4G JGC4160G JGC40G IEC/UL/CSA 10/10 -Pole JGC400G JGC4G JGC4160G JGC40G JGC400G JGC4G JGC4160G JGC40G JGC4006G JGC46G JGC41606G JGC406G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT JGU00G JGUG JGU160G JGU0G JGU00G JGUG JGU160G JGU0G JGU00G JGUG JGU160G JGU0G JGU006G JGU6G JGU1606G JGU06G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 IEC/UL/CSA 10/10 4-Pole JGU400G JGU4G JGU4160G JGU40G IEC/UL/CSA 00/00 -Pole JGU400G JGU4G JGU4160G JGU40G JGU400G JGU4G JGU4160G JGU40G JGU4006G JGU46G JGU41606G JGU406G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT JGX00G JGXG JGX160G JGX0G JGX00G JGXG JGX160G JGX0G JGX00G JGXG JGX160G JGX0G JGX006G JGX6G JGX1606G JGX06G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 IEC/UL/CSA 00/00 4-Pole JGX400G JGX4G JGX4160G JGX40G JGX400G JGX4G JGX4160G JGX40G JGX400G JGX4G JGX4160G JGX40G Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = % electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. JGX4006G JGX46G JGX41606G JGX406G JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 Discount Symbol CB-

27 May Amperes JG-Frame -7 Table -4. Complete Breaker with Electronic Trip Units (Continued) Ampere IEC/UL/CSA / IEC/UL/CSA 40/ IEC/UL/CSA 70/ LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG JGE00GC JGEGC JGE160GC JGE0GC JGS00GC JGSGC JGS160GC JGS0GC JGH00GC JGHGC JGH160GC JGH0GC JGE00GC JGEGC JGE160GC JGE0GC JGS00GC JGSGC JGS160GC JGS0GC JGH00GC JGHGC JGH160GC JGH0GC Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is required. JGE00GC JGEGC JGE160GC JGE0GC JGS00GC JGSGC JGS160GC JGS0GC JGH00GC JGHGC JGH160GC JGH0GC JGE006GC JGE6GC JGE1606GC JGE06GC JGS006GC JGS6GC JGS1606GC JGS06GC JGH006GC JGH6GC JGH1606GC JGH06GC JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 JGFCT00 JGFCT JGFCT160 JGFCT0 Discount Symbol CB-

28 Amperes JG-Frame May 008 Selection Guide and Ordering Information T0FJ TA0FJ Endcap Kit Line and Load Terminals JG-Frame circuit breakers include Cu/Al terminals T0FJ as standard. When optional copper only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Table -. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amps Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm Individually packed. Standard line and load. Contact factory for availability. Endcap Kits Endcap kits are used on J0-Frame breaker line side to connect bus bar or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. Table -6. Kit Control Wire Terminal Kit AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Multiwire Connectors Standard Pressure Type Terminals 0 Stainless Steel Cu 18 #4 0 (1) T0FJ 0 Aluminum Cu/Al 18 #4 0 (1) TA0FJ Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 0 Copper Cu/Al 18 #4 0 (1) TC0FJ of Poles 4 Metric FJRTWK FJ4RTWK Imperial FJRTDK FJ4RTDK Control Wire Terminal Kit For use with aluminum or copper terminals only. Table -7. Control Wire Terminal Kit Control Wire Terminal Kit Package of 14 d Individually FJCWTK Multiwire Connectors Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed for copper only as used on the load side (OFF) end. Table -8. JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of ) Max. Amps 0 0 Wires per Terminal 6 Wire Size Range AWG Cu Kit Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) Table -9. Terminal Shields IP0 Location Line or Load of Poles, Table -40. Interphase Barriers Package of of Poles 4 TA0FJ TA0FJ6 FJTSK FJTS4K FJIPBK FJIPBK4 Discount Symbol CB-

29 May Amperes JG-Frame -9 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -41. Accessories Description Reference -, -Pole 4-Pole Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -8 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -8 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -8 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -8 Shunt Trip Standard -8 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -8 External Accessories End Cap Kit -8 Control Wire Terminal Kit -8 Multiwire Connectors -8 Base Mounting Hardware -8 Interphase Barriers -8 Padlockable Handle Block -7 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -7 Key Interlock Kit -7 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -7 Electrical Operator -7 Plug-in Adapters -9 Handle Mechanisms -60 Earth Leakage/Ground Fault Protector - Drawout Cassette -9 Digitrip 10+ Test Kit - Ammeter/Cause of Trip Display - Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine/Naval Application, UL Supplement SA and SB Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both Contact Eaton

30 Amperes LG-Frame May 008 LG-Frame Typical LG-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description LG breaker is HACR rated. Interrupting Capacity s Table -4. UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles dc rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuits. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. -poles in series. 70 Vdc ratings available (4-poles in series, not UL listed). Contact Eaton. IEC rating is Vac. Interrupting Capacity (ka rms Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics LGE60, LGS60, LGH60, LGC60, LGU60, LGX60,

31 May Amperes LG-Frame -1 Product Selection Table -4. Main ing System L G S FA G C Frame Poles Amperes Trip Unit L Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected 6 = Four Neutral 60% Protected 7 = Four Neutral % Protected 8 = Four Neutral 0 60% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 0 Protected Performance AA = Adj. Adj. FA = Fixed Adj. KS = Molded Case Switch = 10+ Electronic LS = 10+ Electronic LSI = 10+ Electronic LSG 6 = 10+ Electronic LSIG 8 = 10+ Electronic ALSI 9 = 10+ Electronic ALSIG NN = Frame Only (No Trip) E 18 6 S H 6 70 C 0 00 U X Terminations Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric End Caps E = Imperial End Caps G = Line/Load Standard W = Without Terminals Metric Imperial Metric K Molded Case Switch Blank = 80% Rated C = % Rated Table -44. Trip Unit ing System LT FA Trip Poles Amperes Trip Unit LT = Three 4 = Four Neutral 0% Protected 8 = Four Neutral 0/60% Protected 9 = Four Neutral 0/% Protected AA = Adj. Adj. Thermal-Magnetic FA = Fixed Adj. Thermal-Magnetic KS = Molded Case Switch = 10+ Electronic LS = 10+ Electronic LSI = 10+ Electronic LSG 6 = 10+ Electronic LSIG 8 = 10+ Electronic ALSI 9 = 10+ Electronic ALSIG

32 Amperes Frame Size LG, 60 Amperes ( Amperes UL, CSA) May 008 LG-Frame, 60 Amperes Table -. Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) Ampere -Pole 4-Pole (0%) -Pole 4-Pole (0%) Fixed Thermal Adj. Magnetic Adj. Thermal Adj. Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adj. Magnetic Adj. Thermal Adj. Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adj. Magnetic Adj. Thermal Adj. Magnetic IC : kaic at 41 and 480 Vac IC : 0 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGE0FAG LGE00FAG LGE0FAG LGE400FAG LGE00FAG LGEFAG LGE0AAG LGE0AAG LGE400AAG LGE00AAG LGE60AAG LGE40FAG LGE400FAG LGE40FAG LGE4400FAG LGE00FAG LGE4FAG LGE40AAG LGE40AAG LGE4400AAG LGE00AAG LGE460AAG LGS0FAG LGS00FAG LGS0FAG LGS400FAG LGS00FAG LGSFAG LGS0AAG LGS0AAG LGS400AAG LGS00AAG LGS60AAG IC : 70 kaic at 41 Vac, 6 kaic at 480 Vac IC : kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGH0FAG LGH00FAG LGH0FAG LGH400FAG LGH00FAG LGHFAG LGH0AAG LGH0AAG LGH400AAG LGH00AAG LGH60AAG LGH40FAG LGH400FAG LGH40FAG LGH4400FAG LGH00FAG LGH4FAG LGH40AAG LGH40AAG LGH4400AAG LGH00AAG LGH460AAG LGC0FAG LGC00FAG LGC0FAG LGC400FAG LGC00FAG LGCFAG LGC0AAG LGC0AAG LGC400AAG LGC00AAG LGC60AAG IC : 10 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac IC : 00 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGU0FAG LGU00FAG LGU0FAG LGU400FAG LGU00FAG LGUFAG LGU0AAG LGU0AAG LGU400AAG LGU00AAG LGU60AAG LGU40FAG LGU400FAG LGU40FAG LGU4400FAG LGU00FAG LGU4FAG LGU40AAG LGU40AAG LGU4400AAG LGU00AAG LGU460AAG LGX0FAG LGX00FAG LGX0FAG LGX400FAG LGX00FAG LGXFAG LGX0AAG LGX0AAG LGX400AAG LGX00AAG LGX60AAG Fixed Thermal Adj. Magnetic LGS40FAG LGS40FAG LGS40FAG LGS4400FAG LGS00FAG LGS4FAG LGC40FAG LGC400FAG LGC40FAG LGC4400FAG LGC00FAG LGC4FAG LGX40FAG LGX400FAG LGX40FAG LGX4400FAG LGX00FAG LGX4FAG Replace suffix G with W for no line and load terminals. For -pole applications, use two outer poles. Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = %, 8 = adjustable 0 60% and 9 = 0 %. Neutral is on LH side. 0/60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. Note: Please contact Eaton for pricing. Adj. Thermal Adj. Magnetic LGS40AAG LGS40AAG LGS4400AAG LGS00AAG LGS460AAG LGC40AAG LGC40AAG LGC4400AAG LGC00AAG LGC460AAG LGX40AAG LGX40AAG LGX4400AAG LGX00AAG LGX460AAG Table -46. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Ampere -Pole Fixed Thermal/ Adj. Magnetic Adj. Thermal/ Adj. Magnetic 4-Pole (0%) Fixed Thermal/ Adj. Magnetic Adj. Thermal/ Adj. Magnetic LT0FA LT00FA LT0FA LT400FA LT00FA LTFA LT0AA LT0AA LT400AA LT00AA LT60AA LT40FA LT400FA LT40FA LT4400FA LT00FA LT4FA For -pole applications, use two outer poles. Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = %, 8 = adjustable 0 60% and 9 = 0 % Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed. LT40AA LT40AA LT4400AA LT00AA LT460AA Discount Symbol CB-

33 May Amperes Frame Size LG, 60 Amperes ( Amperes UL, CSA) - Table -47. Molded Case Switches Ampere of Poles For -pole applications, use two outer poles. 60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. Note: Molded case switches will trip above 600 amperes. Table -48. Breaker Frame Only Ampere IC at 41/ 480 V / / 0/0 0/0 70/6 70/6 / 10/10 00/00 60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG. For -pole applications, use two outer poles. % rated frame. For use with electronic trip units only. Table -49. Electronic Trip Units Digitrip 10+ Ampere Table -0. Plug-in Test Kit LGK400KSG LGK4400KSG LGK60KSG LGK460KSG -Pole 4-Pole (0%) LGE60NN LGE60NNWC LGS60NN LGS60NNWC LGH60NN LGH60NNWC LGC60NN LGU60NN LGX60NN LGE460NN LGS460NN LGH460NN LGC460NN LGU460NN LGX460NN LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG Table -1. Breaker Mount Ammeter Description -Pole 0 LT0 LT0 LT0 LT06 LGFCT0 400 LT400 LT400 LT400 LT4006 LGFCT400 LT LT LT LT6 LGFCT 60 LT60 LT60 LT60 LT606 LGFCT 4-Pole 0 LT40 LT40 LT40 LT406 LGFCT0 400 LT4400 LT4400 LT4400 LT44006 LGFCT400 LT4 LT4 LT4 LT46 LGFCT 60 LT460 LT460 LT460 LT4606 LGFCT Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = %. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. Note: Long time pickup no rating plug needed. 60 Ampere Settings 60,, 00, 400, 0, 1, 00, 0 (1, 60 are IEC ratings only). Ampere Settings, 00, 0, 400, 0, 1, 00, 0 (1 is IEC rating only). 400 Ampere Settings 400, 0, 1, 00, 0,, 00, 160 (1 is IEC rating only). 0 Ampere Settings 0,, 00, 17, 160, 10, 1, (160 is IEC rating only). Note: Adjustable long time delay 4 seconds at 6 x I r. Adjustable short time delay Inst., 10, 00 ms. Voltage Digitrip 10+ Test Kit Digitrip 10+ Test Kit Shown with JG MCCB LG Digitrip 10+ Electronic Trip Unit Ammeter 10 Vac 0 Vac MTST10V MTST0V Breaker Mount Ammeter DIGIVIEW Note: Use on electronic trip only. Discount Symbol CB-

34 Amperes Frame Size LG, 60 Amperes ( Amperes UL, CSA) May 008 Table -. IC at 41/480 V Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware) Ampere LS LSI -Pole IC : kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGE0G LGE400G LGEG LGE60G 4-Pole IC : kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGE40G LGE4400G LGE4G LGE460G -Pole IC : 0 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGS0G LGS400G LGSG LGS60G 4-Pole IC : 0 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGS40G LGS4400G LGS4G LGS460G LGE0G LGE400G LGEG LGE60G LGE40G LGE4400G LGE4G LGE460G LGS0G LGS400G LGSG LGS60G LGS40G LGS4400G LGS4G LGS460G -Pole IC : 70 kaic at 41 Vac, 6 kaic at 480 Vac LGH0G LGH400G LGHG LGH60G LGH0G LGH400G LGHG LGH60G 4-Pole IC : 70 kaic at 41 Vac, 6 kaic at 480 Vac LGH40G LGH4400G LGH4G LGH460G LGH40G LGH4400G LGH4G LGH460G -Pole IC : kaic at 41 Vac and 480 Vac LGC0G LGC400G LGCG LGC60G LGC0G LGC400G LGCG LGC60G 4-Pole IC : kaic at 41 Vac and 480 Vac LGC40G LGC4400G LGC4G LGC460G LGC40G LGC4400G LGC4G LGC460G -Pole IC : 10 kaic at 41 Vac and 480 Vac LGU0G LGU400G LGUG LGU60G LGU0G LGU400G LGUG LGU60G 4-Pole IC : 10 kaic at 41 Vac and 480 Vac LGU40G LGU4400G LGU4G LGU460G LGU40G LGU4400G LGU4G LGU460G -Pole IC : 00 kaic at 41 Vac and 480 Vac LGX0G LGX400G LGXG LGX60G LGX0G LGX400G LGXG LGX60G LSG LGE0G LGE400G LGEG LGE60G LGE40G LGE4400G LGE4G LGE460G LGS0G LGS400G LGSG LGS60G LGS40G LGS4400G LGS4G LGS460G LGH0G LGH400G LGHG LGH60G LGH40G LGH4400G LGH4G LGH460G LGC0G LGC400G LGCG LGC60G LGC40G LGC4400G LGC4G LGC460G LGU0G LGU400G LGUG LGU60G LGU40G LGU4400G LGU4G LGU460G LGX0G LGX400G LGXG LGX60G LSIG LGE06G LGE4006G LGE6G LGE606G LGE406G LGE44006G LGE46G LGE4606G LGS06G LGS4006G LGS6G LGS606G LGS406G LGS44006G LGS46G LGS4606G LGH06G LGH4006G LGH6G LGH606G LGH406G LGH44006G LGH46G LGH4606G LGC06G LGC4006G LGC6G LGC606G LGC406G LGC44006G LGC46G LGC4606G LGU06G LGU4006G LGU6G LGU606G LGU406G LGU44006G LGU46G LGU4606G LGX06G LGX4006G LGX6G LGX606G 4-Pole IC : 00 kaic at 41 Vac and 480 Vac 0 LGX40G LGX40G LGX40G LGX406G 400 LGX4400G LGX4400G LGX4400G LGX44006G LGX4G LGX4G LGX4G LGX46G 60 LGX460G LGX460G LGX460G LGX4606G Replace suffix G with W for no line and load terminals. Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. For -pole applications, use two outer poles. 60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = %. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable. Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT Discount Symbol CB-

35 May Amperes Frame Size LG, 60 Amperes ( Amperes UL, CSA) - Table -. LG % Rated Electronic Breaker Ampere LS LSI LSG LSIG Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG IEC/UL/CSA kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGE0GC LGE400GC LGEGC LGE60GC IEC/UL/CSA 0 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGS0GC LGS400GC LGSGC LGS60GC IEC/UL/CSA 70 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGH0GC LGH400GC LGHGC LGH60GC LGE0GC LGE400GC LGEGC LGE60GC LGS0GC LGS400GC LGSGC LGS60GC LGH0GC LGH400GC LGHGC LGH60GC LGE0GC LGE400GC LGEGC LGE60GC LGS0GC LGS400GC LGSGC LGS60GC LGH0GC LGH400GC LGHGC LGH60GC LGE06GC LGE4006GC LGE6GC LGE606GC LGS06GC LGS4006GC LGS6GC LGS606GC LGH06GC LGH4006GC LGH6GC LGH606GC 60 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG. Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is required. LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System LG with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Series G LG circuit breakers are available with the Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System integrated into the electronic trip units helping to improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time. The Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System unit utilizes a separate analog trip circuit that provides faster interruption times than the standard (digital) instantaneous protection. Work locations downstream of a circuit breaker with an Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System unit can have a significantly lower incident energy level, reducing arc flash potential to the system. Table -4. LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Ampere ALSI IEC/UL/CSA kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGE08G LGE4008G LGE8G LGE608G IEC/UL/CSA 0 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGS08G LGS4008G LGS8G LGS608G IEC/UL/CSA 70 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGH08G LGH4008G LGH8G LGH608G IEC/UL/CSA kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGC08G LGC4008G LGC8G LGC608G IEC/UL/CSA 10 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac LGU08G LGU4008G LGU8G LGU608G IEC/UL/CSA 00 kaic at 41 and 480 Vac ALSIG LGE609G LGE4009G LGE9G LGE609G LGS609G LGS4009G LGS9G LGS609G LGH609G LGH4009G LGH9G LGH609G LGC609G LGC4009G LGC9G LGC609G Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 Table -. LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Ampere LGX08G LGX4008G LGX8G LGX608G ALSI LT08 LT4008 LT8 LT608 LGU609G LGU4009G LGU9G LGU609G LGX609G LGX4009G LGX9G LGX609G ALSIG LT09 LT4009 LT9 LT609 LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 Neutral CT for LSG & LSIG LGFCT0 LGFCT400 LGFCT LGFCT60 Required for 4-wire systems if neutral protection is required. Discount Symbol CB-

36 Amperes Frame Size LG, 60 Amperes ( Amperes UL, CSA) May 008 Line and Load Terminals Table -6. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Metric Wire Range (mm ) of Terminals Included Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Aluminum Copper Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu/Al Cu (1) (1) (1) (1) 00 () 00 () 00 () 00 () 00 (1) 00 (1) Includes LTSK (-pole) or LTS4K (4-pole) terminal covers. Standard terminal included with complete breaker (1) (1) (1) (1) 40 () 40 () 40 () 40 () 40 (1) 40 (1) TA61LK 4TA61LK T61LK 4T61LK TA6LK 4TA6LK T6LK 4T6LK TA0LK T0LK Table -7. Terminal Covers Description Table -9. Control Wire Terminal Kit Description Terminal Body Type Table -61. Terminal Spreaders of Poles -Pole Terminal Cover 4-Pole Terminal Cover LTSK LTS4K Included in TA6IL, T6IL, TA6L kits listed above. Table -8. End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts) of Poles -Pole Kit 4-Pole Kit -Pole Kit 4-Pole Kit Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper TA6LKW 4TA6LKW T6LKW 4T6LKW Table -60. Terminal Extensions of Poles 4 Table -6. Handle Extension Description Handle Extension LGTES LGTES4 HEXLG 4 LRTWK L4RTWK 4 LGTEW LGTEW4 Table -6. Interphase Barrier Package of Interphase Barrier IPB Figure -. Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker Includes LTSK (-Pole) or LTS4K (4-Pole) Terminal Covers Note: Extended terminal covers add.1 inches (4.0 mm) to breaker length. Discount Symbol CB-

37 May Amperes LG-Frame -7 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -64. Accessories Description Reference -Pole 4-Pole Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -8 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -8 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -8 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -8 Shunt Trip Standard -8 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -8 External Accessories End Cap Kit -6 Handle Extension -6 Terminal Cover -6 Padlockable Handle Block -7 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -7 Key Interlock Kit -7 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -7 Electrical Operator -7 Plug-in Adapters -9 Rear Connecting Studs -7 Handle Mechanisms -60 Earth Leakage/Ground Fault Protector - Drawout Cassette -9 Digitrip 10+ Test Kit - Ammeter/Cause of Trip Display - Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine/Naval Application, UL Supplement SA and SB Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both Contact Eaton.

38 Amperes NG-Frame May 008 NG-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Table -6. UL 489/IEC Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles 40 (UL) Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs NGS,, NGH,, NGC,, amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 100 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG. Typical NG-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description All Cutler-Hammer NG-Frame Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are suitable for reverse feed use. All NG-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated.

39 May Amperes NG-Frame -9 NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -66. Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 10 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Digitrip OPTIM 100 rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame N N N Ampere Range 400 A 100 A 400 A 100 A 400 A 100 A Interrupting at 480 Volts 0, 6, (ka) 0, 6, (ka) 0, 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I t 1 Seconds 1 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No No x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short Delay Time I t ms No 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Pickup 1 x Ig (160 A) 1 x Ig (160 A) 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Delay I t No No 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contact Ground Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Adjust by rating plug. Zone interlock kit. With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). By OPTIMizer/BIM. Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit. OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Legend: BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting

40 Amperes NG-Frame May 008 Dimensions/Weights Table -67. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth, 4 8. (09.6) 11.1 (8.6) (406.4) (406.4).0 (19.7).0 (19.7) Table -68. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Type Product Selection Complete Breaker of Poles 4 NGS, NGH, NGC 7 (16.8) (0.4) 8 (6.) This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -69. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System N G S 800 T W P18 Frame N S H C K Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA Performance Molded Case Switch 6 00 of Poles = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit = LS = LSI = LSG 6 = LSIG Amperes 800 = = = 1 Suffix W = Without Terminals K = Molded Case Switch Plug P08 = 100AF = 100/0/800/ Adjustable P09 = 10AF = 10/0/800/60 Adjustable P18 = 800AF = 800//00/400 Adjustable P19 = 800AF = 800/60/00/400 Adjustable P = 1AF = 1/10/0/800 Adjustable P6 = 1AF = 10/0/800/60 Adjustable

41 May Amperes Frame Size NG, 100 Amperes 0 ka at 480 Vac or 41 Vac -41 NG-Frame, 100 Amperes Selection Guide and Ordering Information Table -70. Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 0 ka l cu at 480 Vac or 41 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Plugs L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Interchangeable Plugs (Order as Individual Component) Included with Breaker LS LSI LSG LSIG Fixed Plug Adj. Plug 8 x I n 8 x I n I 00 ms 8 x I n A I 00 ms 8 x I n I 00 ms A I 00 ms Ampere Adjustable Ampere Settings 800 -Pole NGS800TWP18 NGS800TWP18 NGS800TWP18 NGS800T6WP Pole NGS800TWP18 NGS800TWP18 NGS800TWP18 NGS800T6WP Pole NGS4800TWP18 NGS4800TWP Pole NGS1TWP08 NGS1TWP08 NGS1TWP08 NGS1T6WP Pole NGS1TWP08 NGS1TWP08 NGS1TWP08 NGS1T6WP Pole NGS41TWP08 NGS41TWP NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 For ac use only. NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 C or 0 C applications. Order suffix V to eliminate standard 40 C labeling. Order terminals separately. Unprotected left pole neutral. Insert E for % neutral or EH for 60% neutral between T or T and W (e.g., NGS41TEHWP08). Neutral is on LH side. Non-UL listed NG 10 with 10 ampere trip unit is also available. Note: NG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use ND MCCBs if imperial threading is required. Table -71. Molded Case Switches Ampere U e Maximum 690 Vac -Pole 4-Pole 800 MCS Only without Line and Load Terminals NGK800KSW MCS Only without Line and Load Terminals NGK4800KSW 100 MCS Only without Line and Load Terminals NGK1KSW MCS Only without Line and Load Terminals NGK41KSW 10 MCS Only without Line and Load Terminals NGK1KSW MCS Only without Line and Load Terminals NGK41KSW For ac use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. For -pole applications, use outer poles of -pole molded case switch.

42 Amperes Frame Size NG, 100 Amperes 6 ka at 480 Vac, 70 ka at 41 Vac May 008 Table -7. Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 6 ka I cu at 480 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 41 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Plugs L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Interchangeable Plugs (Order as Individual Component) LS LSI LSG LSIG Fixed Plug 8 x I n 8 x I n I 00 ms 8 x I n A I 00 ms 8 x I n I 00 ms A I 00 ms Ampere Included with Breaker Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere Settings 800 -Pole NGH800TWP18 NGH800TWP18 NGH800TWP18 NGH800T6WP Pole NGH800TWP18 NGH800TWP18 NGH800TWP18 NGH800T6WP Pole NGH4800TWP18 NGH4800TWP Pole NGH1TWP08 NGH1TWP08 NGH1TWP08 NGH1T6WP Pole NGH1TWP08 NGH1TWP08 NGH1TWP08 NGH1T6WP Pole NGH41TWP08 NGH41TWP NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 For ac use only. NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 C or 0 C applications. Order suffix V to eliminate standard 40 C labeling. Order terminals separately. Unprotected left pole neutral. Insert E for % neutral or EH for 60% neutral between T or T and W (e.g., NGH41TEHWP08). Neutral is on LH side. Non-UL listed NG 10 with 10 ampere trip unit is also available. Note: NG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use ND MCCBs if imperial threading is required.

43 May Amperes Frame Size NG, 100 Amperes ka at 480 Vac or 41 Vac -4 Table -7. Type NGC Very High Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, ka I cu at 480 Vac or 41 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Plugs L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Interchangeable Plugs (Order as Individual Component) LS LSI LSG LSIG Fixed Plug 8 x I n 8 x I n I 00 ms 8 x I n A I 00 ms 8 x I n I 00 ms A I 00 ms Ampere Included with Breaker Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere Settings 800 -Pole NGC800TWP18 NGC800TWP18 NGC800TWP18 NGC800T6WP Pole NGC800TWP18 NGC800TWP18 NGC800TWP18 NGC800T6WP Pole NGC4800TWP18 NGC4800TWP Pole NGC1TWP08 NGC1TWP08 NGC1TWP08 NGC1T6WP Pole NGC1TWP08 NGC1TWP08 NGC1TWP08 NGC1T6WP Pole NGC41TWP08 NGC41TWP NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES60T 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 /800/ 0/100 A1NES100T1 For ac use only. NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 C or 0 C applications. Order suffix V to eliminate standard 40 C labeling. Order terminals separately. Unprotected left pole neutral. Insert E for % neutral or EH for 60% neutral between T or T and W (e.g., NGC41TEHWP08). Neutral is on LH side. Non-UL listed NG 10 with 10 ampere trip unit is also available. Note: NG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use ND MCCBs if imperial threading is required.

44 Amperes Frame Size NG, 1 Amperes 0 ka at 41 Vac May 008 Table -74. Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 0 ka I cu at 41 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Trip Unit and Plugs L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG 8 x I n 8 x I n I 00 ms 8 x I n A I 00 ms LSIG 8 x I n I 00 ms A I 00 ms Adjustable Plug 1 -Pole 4-Pole Line and Load Terminals NGS16TWP NGS416TWP N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number. Table -7. Line and Load Terminals Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 10 Copper Copper 9 18 /0 400 (4) T100NBM Single terminals individually packed. Not suitable with 1 ampere frame version. Base Mounting Hardware Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch. Table -76. Base Mounting Hardware Metric hardware included with breaker. NGS16TWP NGS416TWP Keeper Nut Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded. Handle Extension NGS16TWP Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available. Table -78. Handle Extension NGS16T6WP For ac use only. NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 C or 0 C applications. Order suffix V to eliminate standard 40 C labeling. No UL or CSA label is available for the 1 ampere frame size. Unprotected left pole neutral. Insert 1 for % protected neutral or 6 for 60% protected neutral before WP suffix (e.g., NGS416T6WP). Note: NG 1 MCCB uses metric threading on line and load conductors. The NG 1 is not UL or CSA listed. Maximum Breaker Amperes of Poles - and 4-pole - and 4-pole Terminal Body Material Description Imperial Hardware:.1 18 x 1. Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lock Washers Metric Hardware: M8 Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lock Washers Wire Type BMH BMHM Metric Wire Range mm AWG Wire of Conductors Description Single Handle Extension HEX Interphase Barriers 800/ 0/ 10/ 1 The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Table -79. Interphase Barriers Description Interphase Barriers IPB Terminal Shield Table -77. Terminal Shield Description -Pole Terminal Shield NTSK Discount Symbol CB-

45 May Amperes NG-Frame - Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -80. Accessories Description Reference -Pole 4-Pole Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -8 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -8 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -8 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -8 Shunt Trip Standard -8 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -8 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -44 Interphase Barriers -44 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -7 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -7 Key Interlock Kit -7 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -7 Electrical Operator -7 Plug-in Adapters -9 Rear Connecting Studs -7 Handle Mechanisms -60 Drawout Cassette -9 Handle Extension -44 Digitrip 10 Test Kit - Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine/Naval Application, UL Supplement SA and SB Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both Contact Eaton

46 Amperes RG-Frame May 008 RG-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Table -81. UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Utilization Category A circuit breakers. Note: See Page -17 for Trip Unit Specifications. Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) RGH, RGC, RG-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description Cutler-Hammer RG-Frame Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals. All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use. Table -8. IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type RGH I cu I cs RGC I cu I cs of Poles, 4, 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz)

47 May Amperes Frame Size RG, 00 Amperes 6 ka at 480 Vac, 70 ka at 41 Vac Digitrip 10 Trip Unit -47 Product Selection Table -8. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System RGH 16 T W A01 Type RGH 6K RGC K Amperes 16 = 1 A 0 = 000 A = 00 A of Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Function Digitrip 10 T = LS T = LSI T = LSG T6 = LSIG Digitrip 610 T61 = LI T6 = LSI T6 = LS T64 = LIG T6 = LSG T66 = LSIG Digitrip 910 T91 = LI T9 = LSI T9 = LS T94 = LIG T9 = LSG T96 = LSIG R E P Modification Suffix = Ground Fault Remote RES Trip = % Protection (New Design 10) RES Trip Unit = % Prot. Neut. 4P RES Trip Unit V = Electronic Trip w/o Ambient Temperature Marked on Trip Unit W = w/o Terms K = Molded Case Switch Function Codes A1-A19 = Auxiliary Switch B01-B0 = Bell Alarm D01 = Drawout Moving Carrier E01-E1 = Electrical Operator H01-H11 = Special s J01 = Moisture Fungus Proof L01-L0 = Locks N01 = Low Energy Shunt Trip P01-P64 = Plugs Q01-Q0 = Terminal Block S1-S88 = Shunt Trip T1-T7 = UVR (DC) U-U8 = UVR (AC) W01 = Walking Beam Interlock X01-X08 = Load Termination Y01-Y08 = Line Termination Z01-Z08 = Line & Load Termination Dimensions/Weights Table -84. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles 4 Width Height Depth 1.0 (9.7) 0.00 (08.0) (406.4) (406.4) 9.7 (47.7) 9.7 (47.7) Table -8. Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg) Breaker Complete Breaker Type of Poles 4 1 Amperes RGH, RGC 10 (46.) 1 (61.) 000 Amperes RGH, RGC 10 (46.) 1 (61.) 00 Amperes RGH, RGC 1 (61.) 18 (8.6)

48 Amperes Frame Size RG, 00 Amperes 6 ka at 480 Vac, 70 ka at 41 Vac Digitrip 10 Trip Unit May 008 RG-Frame, 00 Amperes Selection Guide and Ordering Information Table -86. Type RGH with Digitrip 10 High Interrupting Capacity U e Maximum 690 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 41 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Plugs L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Interchangeable Plugs (Order as Individual Component) LS LSI LSG LSIG Fixed Plug 8 x I n 8 x I n I 00 ms 8 x I n A I 00 ms 8 x I n I 00 ms A I 00 ms Ampere Included with Breaker Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere Settings 1 -Pole RGH16TWP08 RGH16TWP08 RGH16TWP08 RGH16T6WP RGH0TWP16 RGH0TWP16 RGH0TWP16 RGH0T6WP RGHTWP9 RGHTWP9 RGHTWP9 RGHT6WP Pole RGH416TWP08 RGH416TWP RGH40TWP16 RGH40TWP RGH4TWP9 RGH4TWP RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T A0RES1T A0RES14T A0RES16T A0RES0T RES1T RES1T ARES16T ARES0T AREST 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T A0RES1T A0RES14T A0RES16T A0RES0T RES1T RES1T ARES16T ARES0T AREST For SCR application, use 000 ampere frame. Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add R to catalog number, e.g., RGH16TRW. Additional IEC ratings are available on adjustable rating plugs. Contact your Eaton representative. Unprotected left pole neutral. Add P to catalog number for % protected left pole neutral, add E for 60% protected, e.g., RGH416TPW, RGH416TEW. Note: RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. 800/0/ 100/1 A16RES16T1 0/100/ 1/000 A0RES0T1 100/1/ 000/00 AREST1 800/0/ 100/1 A16RES16T1 0/100/ 1/000 A0RES0T1 100/1/ 000/00 AREST1

49 May Amperes Frame Size RG, 00 Amperes ka at 480 Vac, 41 Vac Digitrip 10 Trip Unit -49 Table -87. Type RGC with Digitrip 10 Very High Interrupting Capacity U e Maximum 690 Vac, ka I cu at 41 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Plugs L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Interchangeable Plugs (Order as Individual Component) LS LSI LSG LSIG Fixed Plug 8 x I n 8 x I n I 00 ms 8 x I n A I 00 ms 8 x I n I 00 ms A I 00 ms Ampere Included with Breaker Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere Settings 1 -Pole RGC16TWP08 RGC16TWP08 RGC16TWP08 RGC16T6WP RGC0TWP16 RGC0TWP16 RGC0TWP16 RGC0T6WP RGCTWP40 RGCTWP40 RGCTWP40 RGCT6WP Pole RGC416TWP08 RGC416TWP RGC40TWP16 RGC40TWP RGC4TWP40 RGC4TWP RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T A0RES1T A0RES14T A0RES16T A0RES0T RES1T RES1T ARES16T ARES0T AREST 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T A0RES1T A0RES14T A0RES16T A0RES0T RES1T RES1T ARES16T ARES0T AREST For SCR application, use 000 ampere frame. Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add R to catalog number, e.g., RGH16TRW. Additional IEC ratings are available on adjustable rating plugs. Contact your Eaton representative. Unprotected left pole neutral. Add P to catalog number for % protected left pole neutral, add E for 60% protected, e.g., RGH416TPW, RGH416TEW. Note: RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. 800/0/ 100/1 A16RES16T1 0/100/ 1/000 A0RES0T1 100/1/ 000/00 AREST1 800/0/ 100/1 A16RES16T1 0/100/ 1/000 A0RES0T1 100/1/ 000/00 AREST1 Table -88. Molded Case Switches Ampere of Poles Pole 4-Pole Molded case switch will trip above 17,00 amperes. RGK16WK RGK0WK RGK416WK RGK40WK Discount Symbol CB-

50 Amperes Frame Size RG, 10 Amperes Digitrip 610 & 910 Trip Units May 008 Table -89. Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910 Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time Short Time Range Short Time Delay Instantaneous Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Plugs Order as Individual Component L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included. Not to exceed 100 ampere ground fault pickup. Note: RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. Digitrip RMS Interchangeable Plug (Order as Individual Component) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Plug x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 6 x M1 & M 0. I.0 n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 00 ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 00 ms 6 x M1 & M x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 6 x M1 & M x In 00 ms x I n 4 Sec. 6 x I r 00 ms x In 00 ms x I n 4 Seconds 6 x I r 00 ms 6 x M1 & M x In 00 ms Ampere Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 41 Vac 1 -Pole RGH16T61WP44 RGH16T6WP44 RGH16T6WP44 RGH16T64WP44 RGH16T6WP44 RGH16T66WP Includes 1 A Plug RGH0T61WP49 RGH0T6WP49 RGH0T6WP49 RGH0T64WP49 RGH0T6WP49 RGH0T66WP Includes 000 A Plug RGHT61WP RGHT6WP RGHT6WP RGHT64WP RGHT6WP RGHT66WP Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, ka I cu at 41 Vac 1 -Pole RGC16T61WP44 RGC16T6WP44 RGC16T6WP44 RGC16T64WP44 RGC16T6WP44 RGC16T66WP Includes 1 A Plug RGC0T61WP49 RGC0T6WP49 RGC0T6WP49 RGC0T64WP49 RGC0T6WP49 RGC0T66WP Includes 000 A Plug RGCT61WP RGCT6WP RGCT6WP RGCT64WP RGCT6WP RGCT66WP Includes 00 A Plug Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, 70 ka I cu at 41 Vac 1 -Pole RGH16T91WP44 RGH16T9WP44 RGH16T9WP44 RGH16T94WP44 RGH16T9WP44 RGH16T96WP Includes 1 A Plug RGH0T91WP49 RGH0T9WP49 RGH0T9WP49 RGH0T94WP49 RGH0T9WP49 RGH0T96WP Includes 000 A Plug RGHT91WP RGHT9WP RGHT9WP RGHT94WP RGHT9WP RGHT96WP 1 Includes 00 A Plug Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity U e Max. 690 Vac, ka I cu at 41 Vac 1 -Pole RGC16T91WP44 RGC16T9WP44 RGC16T9WP44 RGC16T94WP44 RGC16T9WP44 RGC16T96WP Includes 1 A Plug RGC0T91WP49 RGC0T9WP49 RGC0T9WP49 RGC0T94WP49 RGC0T9WP49 RGC0T96WP Includes 000 A Plug RGCT91WP RGCT9WP RGCT9WP RGCT94WP RGCT9WP RGCT96WP 1 Includes 00 A Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A1 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A1 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A1 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A1 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A1 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A1 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A1 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A1 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0

51 May Amperes Frame Size RG, Amperes -1 Line and Load Terminals R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -90. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Terminals Rear Connectors Terminal Body Material Aluminum Copper Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Wire Type Cu/Al Cu Cu/Al Hardware Metric Metric Metric AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ of Conductors 00 0 (4) 1 (4) (6) Metric Wire Range mm TA1RDM T1RDM TA000RDM Order one per pole single terminals individually packed. Order one TA000RD kit per -poles. number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of -pole breaker. Note: RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. Conductor (Viewed from Rear of Circuit Breaker and Cut Away for Clarity) Metric Metric Metric Conductor (Viewed from Front of Circuit Breaker) B016RDM B016RDLM B00RDM Securing Hardware Cu Only Terminal T1RDM (For 1 A Frame Only) OR Breaker Line/Load Conductors Figure -. TA000RD Wire Terminal Note: Order one TA000RDM kit per - poles. number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of -pole breaker. Base Mounting Hardware Supplied by customer. Handle Extension Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are available. Table -91. Handle Extension Description Single Handle Extension HEX6 Rear Connector (Cu) B016RDM B016RDLM (For % Application) (For 1 A and 000 A Frames) B00RDM for 00 A Securing Hardware Al/Cu Terminal TA1RDM (For 1 A Frame Only) Figure -4. RD Rear Connector Exploded View Order one per pole (or two per pole if line and load terminals are required) single terminals individually packed. RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required. Discount Symbol CB-

52 Amperes RG-Frame May 008 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -9. Accessories Description Reference -Pole 4-Pole Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -8 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -8 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -8 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -8 Shunt Trip Standard -8 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -8 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -1 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -7 Key Interlock Kit -7 Electrical Operator -7 Handle Mechanisms -60 Drawout Cassette -9 Handle Extension -1 Digitrip 10 Test Kit - Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine/Naval Application, UL Supplement SA and SB Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both Contact Eaton

53 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Motor Circuit Protectors - Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors Selection Guide and Ordering Information Table -9. EG-Frame 480 Vac, Y/47 Vac Maximum Continuous Amperes A B C D E F 7 A B C D E F 1 A B C D E F 0 A B C D E F 0 A B C D E F 70 A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting MCP UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 10 x I n are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be less than 11% of the motor full load ampere rating HMCPE00A0C HMCPE007C0C HMCPE01E0C HMCPE00H1C HMCPE00KC HMCPE070MC HMCPERC HMCPETC Table -94. JG-Frame Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters. Table -9. LG-Frame Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) HMCPJ0DL HMCPJ0FL HMCPJ0GL HMCPJ0JL HMCPJ0KL HMCPJ0LL HMCPJ0WL MCP HMCPLL6G HMCPLN6G HMCPLR6G HMCPLX6G HMCPLY6G HMCPLP6G HMCPLM6G Equipped with an electromechanical trip device. UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters. Note: 800 and 100 ampere, Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product. Discount Symbol CB-

54 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Motor Protector Circuit Breaker May 008 Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breaker (MPCB) Table -96. JGMPS and JGMPH and Ampere Range Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) 0 Breaker Type JGMPS JGMPH Breaker Capacity (ka rms) ac 0 60 Hz Product Description Eliminates need for separate overload relay. Features IEC UL 489 rating. CSA C. Phase unbalance protection. Phase loss protection. Hot trip/cold trip. High load alarm. Pre-detection trip relay option. Class 10, 1, 0, 0 protection. Applications Can be used with contactor to eliminate need for overload relay and still create manual motor control. Meets requirement for motor branch protection, including: Disconnecting means Branch circuit short circuit protection Overload protection IEC Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs NEMA UL Vac Vac 6 Vac of Poles Ampere Range Table -97. LGMPS and LGMPH and Ampere Range Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) 60 amperes is not a UL listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker. Table -98. JGMP s Continuous Amperes kaic 6 kaic Table -99. LGMP s Continuous Amperes 0 kaic 6 kaic 60 amperes is not a UL listed rating. amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker. Note: For pre-trip alarm option, order Style 71B1G Breaker Type LGMPS LGMPH Breaker Capacity (ka rms) ac 0 60 Hz IEC Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs Vac I cu I cs NEMA UL Vac Vac 0 6 Vac of Poles Ampere Range JGMPS00G JGMPSG JGMPS160G JGMPS0G LGMPS0G LGMPS400G LGMPSG LGMPS60G JGMPH00G JGMPHG JGMPH160G JGMPH0G LGMPH0G LGMPH400G LGMPHG LGMPH60G Discount Symbol CB-

55 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications 0 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules - 0 ma Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Clockwise from Left: JG, LG MCCBs Shown with Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules Product Description Eaton offers a - and 4-pole 0 ma ground fault (earth leakage) protection module for JG and LG breakers. The module does not restrict the use of other breaker accessories. UL-listed modules are available for JG and LG MCCBs. The JG and LG modules are both bottom mounted for circuits up to 160 and 0 amperes (JG), or 400 and 60 amperes for the LG. The module is completely self-contained since the current sensor, relay and power supply are located inside the product. Current pickup settings are selectable from amperes for all IEC-rated modules and JG UL-listed module, and amperes for the LG UL-listed modules. Time delays are also selectable from Instantaneous 1.0 seconds for 0.10 ampere settings and above. A current pickup setting of 0.0 amperes defaults to an Instantaneous time setting regardless of the time dial s position. Two alarm contacts come as standard: a 0% pretrip and a % after trip, both based only on earth leakage current levels. Product Selection Table -. JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 0/60 Hz) Amperes Poles ELJBN10W ELJBN410W ELJBN0W ELJBN40W Table JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted, 0 41 Vac, 0/60 Hz) Amperes Poles ELJBE160W ELJBE4160W ELJBE0W ELJBE40W Table -10. LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, Vac, 0/60 Hz) Amperes Poles ELLBN400W ELLBN4400W ELLBNW ELLBN4W Table -10. LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted, 0 41 Vac, 0/60 Hz) Amperes Poles ELLBE400W ELLBE4400W ELLBE60W ELLBE460W Figure -6. UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate Table Dimensions for Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module in Inches (mm) Frame Height Width Depth -Pole JG 11. (8.8) 4.1 (104.9).7 (90.7) LG 1.8 (90.7).48 (19.) 4.06 (10.1) 4-Pole JG 11. (8.8).0 (19.7).7 (90.7) LG 1.8 (90.7) 7. (18.6) 4.06 (10.1) Figure -7. IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate Discount Symbol CB-

56 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Special Features and Accessories May 008 Special Features and Accessories Internal Accessories Alarm Lockout The alarm switches operate when the circuit breaker is tripped by a short circuit or overcurrent, but also when it is tripped by a shunt trip or undervoltage release. Auxiliary Switches Auxiliary switches are used for signaling and control purposes. The various functions of the auxiliary switches (changeover) are shown in Figure -9. Shunt Trips The shunt trip is used for remote tripping. The coil of the shunt trip is rated only for short-time operation. It is not permissible with the circuit breaker open to apply a continuous opening command to the shunt trip in order to prevent the breaker from closing. This means that interlocking circuits with continuous commands may not be set up with shunt trips. Undervoltage Releases The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the undervoltage release is energized. If the release is not energized, the circuit breaker can only perform an idle switching operation. Frequent idle switching actions should be avoided as they shorten the endurance of the circuit breaker. Accessory Configurations for EG RG Circuit Breakers Figure -8. Internal Accessory Configurations Figure -9. Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker

57 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Special Features and Accessories -7 Special Calibration Special non-ul listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40ºC and for frequencies other than 0/60 Hz or dc. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. 0ºC Calibration Note: Breakers equipped with electronic trip units can operate reliably in ambient temperatures of 0ºC. Add suffix V to NG MCCBs to remove standard 40 C labeling. Add suffix V to catalog number for complete thermal magnetic breaker when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 0ºC ambients. 0ºC ambient MCCBs are not UL listed. Contact Eaton for availability. Moisture-Fungus Treatment All Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker cases are molded from glass-polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts which are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Order by description. Table -10. Calibrations and Treatment Description Frame EG JG LG NG RG Special Calibration Moisture-Fungus Treatment Table External Accessories and Test Kit Description External Accessories Non-Padlockable Handle Block Padlockable Handle Block Padlockable Handle Block Off-Only Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Off-Only Fit Type Frame EG Provision only. See Page -18 for bolt projection dimensions. Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm. Requires two breakers. JG LG Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 004. Contact Eaton for catalog numbers. NG Field EFHB LKD4 Field EFPHB Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF Field EFPHL FJPHL LPHL PLK HLK6 Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF PLKLOFF HLK6LOFF Kirk Key Interlock Kit Field KYKJG KYKLG KYK4 KYK6 Castell Key Interlock Kit Field CTKJG CTKLG CYK4 CYK6 Slide Bar Interlock Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI SBK Walking Beam -Pole EGWBI JGWBI LGWBI WBL WBL6 Interlock 4-Pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI WBL Electrical Operator 10 Vac MOPEG40C EOPFJ40C EOPLG40C EOPT07 EOP6T08 40 Vac MOPEG40C EOPFJ40C EOPLG40C EOPT11 EOP6T11K 4 Vdc MOPEG48D EOPFJ4D EOPLG4D EOPT1 EOP6T19K 48 Vdc MOPEG48D EOPFJ48D EOPLG48D EOPT EOP6T1K 1 Vdc MOPEG40C EOPFJ40C EOPLG40C EOPT6 Plug-In Adapters -Pole PADE PADJ PADL PAD 4-Pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L PAD4 Rear Connecting Studs Field EFRCSDL EFRCSDS EFRCSWL EFRCSWS Test Kit Electronic Portable Test Kit 10 V 0 V N/A N/A FJRCSDL FJRCSDS FJRCSWL FJRCSWS MTST10V MTST0V P LRCSWK 4P LRCS4WK MTST10V MTST0V RG STK STK Discount Symbol CB-

58 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Accessories May 008 Table Accessories Description Pole Location Frame EG, JG & LG NG RG Field Fit Kit s Alarm Lockout Make/Break Left A1LLPK Right ALM1M1BEPK A1LRPK A1L6RPK Make Make/ Break Left ALLPK Right ALMMBEPK ALRPK AL6RPK Break Auxiliary Switch 1A, 1B Left A1XPK Right AUX1A1BPK A1XPK A, B Left AXPK a Right AUXABPK AXPK AX6RPK b A, B Left AXLPK Right AXRPK 4A, 4B Left Right A4X6RPK Auxiliary Switch / Alarm Lockout Shunt Trip Standard ST a Shunt Trip Low Energy Undervoltage Release Mechanism UV All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK. Part number for JG and LG is ALMMBJPK. Left AA11LPK Right AUXALRMEPK AA11RPK 10 Vac Left SNT10CPK SNTLP11K Right SNT6P11K 40 Vac Left SNT10CPK SNTLP11K Right SNT6P11K 1 Vdc Left SNT01CPK Right 4 Vdc Left SNT060CPK SNTLP0K Right SNT6P0K 48 Vdc Left SNT060CPK SNTLPK Right SNT6PK 80 Vac Left SNT480CPK Right 0 0 Vdc or Vac SNTLP14K SNT6P14K 480 Vac SNTLP18K SNT6P18K Left LSTLPK Right LST6RPK Vac Left UVR10APK UVHLP08K Right UVH6RP08K Vac Left UVR40APK UVHLP11K Right UVH6RP11K 4 Vdc, Vac Left UVR04CPK UVHLP1K Right UVH6RP1K Vdc Left UVR048DPK UVHLPK Right UVH6RPK 1 Vdc, Vac Left UVR01CPK Right Vac Left UVR048APK UVHLP0K Right UVHRP0K 10 Vdc Left UVR1DPK UVHLP6K Right UVHRP6K 0 0 Vdc Left UVR0DPK UVHLP8K Right UVHRP8K Vac Left UVR480APK UVHLP9K Right UVHRP9K Vac Left UVRAPK Right 1 Vdc Left UVHLP0K Right UVH6RP0K 1 Vac Left UVHLP0K Right UVH6RP0K Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK Vdc, 0/60 Hz. 80 Vdc, 0/60 Hz. 4 Vdc only use UVHLP0K (NG) UVH6RP0K (RG) for 4 Vac. Discount Symbol CB-

59 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Plug-in Blocks and Drawout Cassettes -9 Plug-in Blocks Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Plug-ins are available for rear connection applications on - and 4-pole circuit breakers. Trip on drawout interlock kits are included. Stabs for EG, JG and LG plug-ins rotate 90 for flexible installation. Use terminal shields for IP0 protection. Drawout Cassette Description 6 ka/480 Vac Version ka/480 Vac Version Movable RDC0DOM Mechanism Stationary Mechanism RDC0DOS RDC0DOSS List price included in price of the stationary mechanism. Without shutters. With shutters. Drawout Cassette Movable mechanism must be ordered with RG circuit breaker and is shipped mounted to circuit breaker frame. Stationary mechanism is ordered separately. Table JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes Breaker Frame Poles LG Breaker with Plug-in Block Product Selection Table Plug-in Blocks Breaker Frame Poles EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-in Blocks EG EG JG JG LG LG PADE PAD4E PADJ PAD4J PADL PAD4L Trip-on Drawout Interlock Kit EG JG LG, 4, 4, 4 Terminal Shields IP0 EG EG JG JG LG LG PIILEG PIILJG PIILLG EFTSK EFTS4K FJTSK FJTS4K LTSK LTS4K Position Switch EG, 4 PADILE JG, 4 PADILJ LG, 4 PADILL Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block. JG and LG Drawout Cassettes The Drawout Cassette is available for use with JG, LG and NG, - and 4-pole breakers. Also available are drawout cassettes for use with the standard -pole 6 and ka/480 Vac, 1 ampere and 000 ampere RG circuit breakers. The cassettes consist of two separate components: the movable mechanism, which attaches to the breaker, and the stationary mechanism, which houses in the cassette. The stationary mechanism is shipped separately for the RG frame breakers. For the JG, LG and NG drawout cassettes, all necessary parts for installation are included in the one catalog number. Features of the drawout cassettes for the JG, LG and NG include: Trip on drawout Breaker will trip if it is in the ON position when withdrawn from the cassette. Secondary Terminal Block The drawout cassettes include a secondary terminal block for easier access when wiring low voltage accessories, including shunts and undervoltage releases. JG JGDOM 4 JG4DOM LG LGDOM 4 LG4DOM NG NGDOM 4 NG4DOM The drawout mechanism has three primary positions: Connected The breaker is fully connected to the primary stabs and secondary contacts. Disconnected Both the primary stabs and the secondary contacts are disconnected. Withdraw The breaker can be removed from the cassette. Table RG Drawout Cassette Description 6 ka/480 Vac Version Movable RD0DOM Mechanism Stationary Mechanism RD0DOS RD0DOSS Discount Symbol CB-

60 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Handle Mechanisms May 008 Handle Mechanisms Overview Handle mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations Flange Mounted, Through-the-Door and Direct (Close-Coupled) providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. Flange Mounted Flex Shaft Through-the-Door Universal Rotary Direct (Close Coupled) Universal Direct Euro IEC Handle mechanisms are typically used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton Electrical has a handle mechanism for virtually any need. Flex Shaft Ordering Information Table Flex Shaft Ordering Information Breaker Frame EG JG LG NG RG Breaker Frame EG JG LG NG RG Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms The Flex Shaft Flange Mounted handle mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, feet (0.9 m) through 10 feet ( m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of /8 inch (9. mm). Can be used with NEMA 1 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with NEMA 4 environments. Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) (0.61) (.9) 4 (1.) (1.) 6 (1.8) EHMFS0 N/A N/A N/A N/A EHMFS0 JHMFS0 N/A N/A EHMFS04 JHMFS04 LHMFS04 FS04CI F6S04 EHMFS0 JHMFS0 FS0CI F6S0 EHMFS06 JHMFS06 FS06CI F6S06 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) 7 (.1) 8 (.4) 9 (.7) 10 (.1) EHMFS07 JHMFS07 LHMFS07 N/A N/A EHMFS08 JHMFS08 N/A N/A EHMFS09 JHMFS09 N/A N/A EHMFS10 JHMFS10 LHMFS10 FS10CI N/A Note: Add Suffix L to the complete for 6-inch (1.4 mm) handle. Note: -Pole only for EG, and 4 Pole for JG and LG. Note: EG and LG can be left or right-hand mounted. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by funneling the cable through conduit. Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E6489 and meets CSA requirements. Note: NEMA 4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to the complete. Note: When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) is maintained to operate properly. The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. Flex Shaft Accessories (E- through R-Frame) Table -11. NEMA 1 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft Handle Length in Inches (mm) 4.00 (101.6) 6.00 (1.4) Roller Latch Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. The 1/4-inch x 1/-inch (6. x 1.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 1.4 mm) handle when point latching is required. Table -11. NEMA IP Crossover NEMA Type IP Type 1 R 1 4/4X C61KJ4 C61KJ6 C61KR IP0 IP IP4 IP66 Discount Symbol CB-

61 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Handle Mechanisms -61 Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Universal Rotary The Cutler-Hammer Universal Rotary is suitable for use with NEMA 1 enclosure types. An optional NEMA 4/4X handle mechanism is also available. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle Lock Off, to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. All Rotary handles indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/Reset positions, however, Universal Rotary has the added feature of international markings for ON (I) and OFF (O). The Universal Rotary is made of molded material. Inside handle is lockable. The Universal Rotary mechanisms for EG, JG and LG MCCBs can be operated by hand with the door open or locked off to prevent operation with the door open. For the NG-Frame MCCBs, a Cutler-Hammer Rotary with a metal handle (Table -11) is also available. 4/4X Handle Mechanism Table Universal Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Length in Inches (mm) EG-Frame 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) JG-Frame 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) LG-Frame 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) 4.00 (609.6) NG-Frame 6.00 (1.4) 6.00 (1.4) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) (406.4) Handle Color Black Black Black Red Red Red Black Black Black Red Red Red Black Black Black Red Red Red Black Black Black Red Red Red Black Black Black Red Red Red Black Black Black Red Red Red Black Black Black Black Black NEMA 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 1, 1 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 1 1 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R 4, 4X, R Complete EHMVD06B EHMVD1B EHMVD4B EHMVD06R EHMVD1R EHMVD4R EHMVD06BX EHMVD1BX EHMVD4BX EHMVD06RX EHMVD1RX EHMVD4RX FJHMVD06B FJHMVD1B FJHMVD4B FJHMVD06R FJHMVD1R FJHMVD4R FJHMVD06BX FJHMVD1BX FJHMVD4BX FJHMVD06RX FJHMVD1RX FJHMVD4RX KLHMVD06B KLHMVD1B KLHMVD4B KLHMVD06R KLHMVD1R KLHMVD4R KLHMVD06BX KLHMVD1BX KLHMVD4BX KLHMVD06RX KLHMVD1RX KLHMVD4RX HMVDB HMVDBT WHMR06X WHMR1X WHMR16X 4.00 (609.6) Black 4, 4X, R WHMR4X RG-Frame 9.00 (.0) Black 1 HMVD6B Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware. Same as HMVDB, except uses R-Frame T handle. EG-Frame JG & LG-Frames (JG Shown) Table -11. Cutler-Hammer Rotary Ordering Information NG-Frame Shaft Length in Inches (mm) 6.00 (1.4) 1.00 (04.8) (406.4) 4.00 (609.6) Handle Color Black Black Black Black Complete NEMA 1, R, 1 WHMR06 WHMR1 WHMR16 WHMR4 NEMA 4/4X WHMR06X WHMR1X WHMR16X WHMR4X Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware. Discount Symbol CB-

62 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Handle Mechanisms May 008 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms The Universal Direct handle mechanism is designed exclusively for the new Cutler-Hammer EG, JG and LG circuit breakers. It is available as standard with a door interlock to prevent opening the enclosure while the circuit breaker is in the ON position. It is also available without a door interlock. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL 489 listed, IEC / and meets CSA requirements. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is designed for NG and RG MCCBs. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is Universal Direct (EG LG) Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-Door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. They are typically for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. NEMA s Rated NEMA 1 and NEMA 1. Table Universal Direct Ordering Information Frame White Handle Color Red Handle Color with Interlock without Interlock without Interlock EG JG LG Table Euro IEC Direct Ordering Information Frame Black Handle NG RG EHMCCBI HMVDB HMVD6B EHMCCB JHMCCB LHMCCB EHMCCR JHMCCR LHMCCR Discount Symbol CB-

63 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes EG through JG -6 Dimensions Front Cover Cutout Front View -Pole SideView C L Breaker 0.14 (.6) R 1.8 (47.0) 0.90 (.9) C L Handle.0 (77.0).0 (19.7) 1.0 Dia (11.9) (.0) 0.94 (.9).00 (76.).77 (70.4) Figure -10. EG-Frame Dimensions in Inches (mm) Front Cover Cutout Front View -Pole SideView 0.6 (16.0) 0.8 (7.1).06 (77.7) 0.0 (1.7) 4.00 (101.6) 1. (1.8) 0.19 (4.8) R.0 (.1) 1.06 (7.0) C L C Handle 4.1 (104.9).9 (.).44 (87.4) 7.00 (177.8) Figure -11. JG-Frame Dimensions in Inches (mm)

64 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Sizes LG through NG May (61.7) BREAKER 4.06 (10.1) R. (6.4) (48.8).16 (80.) 10.1 (7.).00 (0.8).8 (16.7).69 (68.).48 (19.) 4-Pole Figure -1. LG-Frame Dimensions in Inches (mm) Note: TA6IL, T6IL, T6L, TA6L terminals add 1.19 inches (0. mm) to line or load side of LG. LTSK or LTS4K terminal covers add.1 inches (4.1 mm) to line or load side of LG. Front Cover Cutout.44 (87.4) BREAKER Front View -Pole Side View R. (6.4) 9. (.0) 1.0 (8.1) 1.91 (48.) (406.4) 6.8 (16.1).19 (81.0) 8. (09.6).0 (19.7) Figure -1. NG-Frame Dimensions in Inches (mm)

65 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Size RG -6 Front Cover Cutout Front View -Pole Side View 14.0 (68.) 0.16 R (4.1) 7. (184.) C L Breaker. (7.).10 (19.) 9.70 (46.4) C L Handle 7.7 (196.9) 1.00 (81.0) (406.4) 8. (09.6).44 R (11.) Tee Connectors May Be Rotated (0.) 4 Holes 0.44 Dia. (11.) 6.7 (166.9) 1.1 (.) 1.0 (9.7) 9.00 (8.6) 6.7 (171.) Figure -14. RG-Frame Dimensions in Inches (mm)

66 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Product Line Overview May 008 Product Line Description Special Calibration Special non-ul-listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40 C and for frequencies other than 0/60 Hz or dc. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. UL 489 Supplement SB requires 0 C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. ( Naval labeled per UL but no UL mark due to 0 C label.) Suffix H09 Naval 10% Adder Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as,... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as,... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material. The National Electrical Code (NEC ) describes them as, A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-automatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating. So designed, Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breakers. Electronic rms Trip Breakers. Molded Case Switches. Motor Circuit Protectors. Current Limiting Breakers. Special Application Breakers. Modified Breakers Cutler-Hammer breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge. Modified Breakers $7 List Adder Suffix H Hz 0% Adder 0 C Calibration Add suffix V to for complete breaker, listed above, when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 0 C ambients. (No price adder.) (No UL label.) Moisture-Fungus Treatment All circuit breaker cases are molded from glass-polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts which are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Suffix J01 Fungus Treated Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at -40 C. Suffix F01 Freeze Tested Marine Applications F- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46 ABS American Bureau of Shipping IEEE. These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with special nameplating, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied. Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine Use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 6 feet (19.8 m) in length. Requirements include 40 C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 0ºC available.) Suffix H08 Marine $7 + 0% Adder 0% Adder 10% Adder Standards and Certifications Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-199, Molded Case Circuit Breakers. Australian Standard AS 184, Molded Case Circuit Breakers. British Standards Institution Standard BS 47: Part 1, Switchgear and Control Gear Part 1: Circuit Breakers. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C. No., Service Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers. International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC , Circuit Breakers. Japanese T-Mark Standard Molded Case Circuit Breakers. South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 16, Standard Specification for Molded Case Circuit Breakers. Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 17-1, Safety Regulations for Circuit Breakers. Union Technique de l Electricite Standard NF C 6-10, Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Circuit Breaker Requirements. Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear, Circuit Breakers. Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-7b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure.

67 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Product Line Overview -67 Quick Reference Table Industrial Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Type G-Frame GHB GHB GHB GHB HGHB GHQ GHBS GBHS GD GD GHC GHC GHC GHC HGHC F-Frame EDB EDS ED EDH EDC EHD EHD FDB FDB FD FD FD FDE HFD HFD HFD HFDE FDC FDC FDCE Continuous Ampere at 40 C No. Poles 1, 1, 1 1 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,,,,, 1,, 4 1, 4 1, 4, 4 Volts Type of Trip Federal Specification W-C-7b N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuit breaker at 0 Vdc. Not defined in W-C-7b. Current limiting. Check with Eaton for availability. Refer to the Distribution Products CA08101E. UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical Amperes) ac dc ac (kv) dc (kv) 10 10/ Y/ Y/77 Y/ Y/ /0 1 1/0 1 1/ /0 1 1/ N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. 11a 10b, 11b, 1b, 14b, 1b 1c, 1a, 1b 1b 1b N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T. N.I.T.U. N.I.T. N.I.T.U. N.I.T. 1c, 1a 1b 1c, 1a 1b 1b 14b 1 1a 1b 18a 1a a 1a a 4a Page

68 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Product Line Overview May 008 Table Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type J-Frame JDB JD HJD JDC K-Frame DK KDB KD CKD HKD CHKD KDC L-Frame LDB LD CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC M-Frame MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL N-Frame ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC NDU Continuous Ampere at 40 C N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuit breaker at 0 Vdc. Current limiting. No. Poles,,, 4,, 4,, 4,,,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,,,,, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4 Volts Type of Trip Federal Specification W-C-7b UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical Amperes) ac dc ac (kv) dc (kv) 10 10/ N.I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. N.I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T. a a a a 14b a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a A A A A A A Page , -97, -10, , -104, , -97, -10, , -104, , -97, -10, , -11, , -1-11, -11, , -1-11, -11, , , , , -11-1, , , -1-14, , -1

69 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Product Line Overview -69 Table Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type R-Frame RD 1 CRD 1 RD 000 RD 00 CRD 000 RDC 1 CRDC 1 RDC 000 RDC 00 CRDC 000 Continuous Ampere at 40 C No. Poles, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuit breaker at 0 Vdc. Volts Type Federal UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical Amperes) ac dc of Specification Trip ac (kv) dc (kv) W-C-7b 10 10/ N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. N.I.T.U. 4a 4a 4a 4a 4a a a a a a Page Current-Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Non-Fused Type FCL 1, 480 N.I.T.U LCL 1 400, N.I.T.U TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused Type FB 1, 0 N.I.T.U. 16a, 16b, a, 6a LA , 0 I.T.U. 16a, 16b, 17a, 6a NB , 0 I.T.U. 16b, 17a, a PB 1, 0 I.T.U. 17a, 6a

70 -70 1 Amperes G-Frame May 008 Product Description All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type. On all -phase Delta (40 V) Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton. Single-pole circuit breakers, 1 and 0 amperes. Switching duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications. All G-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use. HACR rated. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s Table UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type GD of Poles Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. Two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Table UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc Y/77 1 GHQ 6 14 GHB 1, 6 6 HGHB GHC 1, 6 6 HGHC through 70 A breakers only Terminal Types For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below. Table -10. Terminal Types Circuit Breaker Amperes Standard 1 0 Terminal Type Material Clamp (Plated Steel) Pressure (Aluminum Body) Screw Head Type Slotted Slotted Wire Type Cu/Al Cu/Al AWG Wire Range /0 Optional GD Only 1 Pressure (Steel Body) Slotted Cu 14 Not UL listed sizes. Metric Wire Range (mm )

71 May Amperes G-Frame -71 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -11. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System GD K Circuit Breaker Type GD GHB GHC GHQ HGHB HGHC GHBGFEP GHCGFEP of Poles 1 = 1 Pole = Poles = Poles Trip Amperes Suffix K = Molded Case Switch D = Ring Type Terminals C = Steel Collars V = 0 C J01 = Fungus Proofed R01 = Shock Tested F01 = Freeze Tester HID = High Intensity Discharge HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC 1 pole, 1 0 ampere circuit breakers.

72 -7 1 Amperes G-Frame May 008 Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Product Selection Table -1. Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C 480 Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Includes Binding 14 kaic at 480 Vac kaic at 480 Vac Head Screws and Clamps 10 x.1 Includes Line and Load Terminals -Pole -Pole -Pole GD01 GD00 GD0 GD00 GD0 GD040 GD0 GD00 GD01 GD00 GD0 GD00 GD0 GD040 GD0 GD00 GD060 GD070 GD080 GD090 GD GD01D GD00D GD0D GD00D GD0D GD040D GD0D GD00D GD060D GD070D GD080D GD090D GDD Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker Standards and Certifications UL/CSA. Product Description Cable in, cable out. Includes mounting hardware and BMHE. Type GD Molded Case Switches Product Selection Table -1. Type GD Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc (Includes Line and Load Terminals) GD060K GDK GD060KC GDK Includes line and load steel terminals. Note: Molded Case Switches may open above 100 amperes. Discount Symbol CB-

73 May Amperes G-Frame -7 Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers Typical GHB Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-7b as follows: Type GHB, 10 and 40 V: 1 Pole: Class 11a, Poles: Classes 10b, 11b, 1b, 14b, 1b UL/CSA Type GHB, 77 and 480Y/77 V: 1 Pole: Classes 1c, 1a, Poles: Class 1b Type HGHB 77 V Type GHQ 77 V Product Selection Table -14. Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C Y/77 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for -phase Delta (480 V). 1 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Use () outside poles. Uses.190 (4.8) - screw type clamp terminals. Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 1 and 0 ampere, 1-pole are SWD rated. Table -1. Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C /480 Vac Maximum, 77/480 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc Maximum 1/0 Vdc Maximum 1-Pole -Pole -Pole GHB101 GHB100 GHB10 GHB100 GHB10 GHB1040 GHB10 GHB100 GHB1060 GHB1070 GHB1080 GHB1090 GHB1 1 and 0 ampere, 1-pole are SWD rated. GHB01 GHB00 GHB0 GHB00 GHB0 GHB040 GHB0 GHB00 GHB060 GHB070 GHB080 GHB090 GHB 77/480 Vac Maximum, 1/0 Vdc Maximum GHB01 GHB00 GHB0 GHB00 GHB0 GHB040 GHB0 GHB00 GHB060 GHB070 GHB080 GHB090 GHB Table -16. Type GHQ Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C 77 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc Maximum 1-Pole HGHB101 HGHB100 HGHB10 HGHB Vac Maximum 14 kaic, No dc (HID & SWD) 1-Pole 1 0 Includes 4A46H01 load clip. GHQ101 GHQ100 Discount Symbol CB-

74 -74 1 Amperes G-Frame May 008 Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 0 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors Technical Data Table -17. Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles GHBGFEP 1 14,000 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 77 Vac (0/60 Hz) Product Selection Table -18. Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 0 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C Single-Phase (Requires Poles) 77 Vac, 0 ma GHBGFEP101 GHBGFEP100 GHBGFEP100 GHBGFEP1040 GHBGFEP100 GHBGFEP1060 Single-Phase (Requires Poles) Product Description 1 60 amperes, 77 V, 0/60 Hz. Operational voltage 40 V to 0 V. Standards and Certifications These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL 489 and UL 10. Discount Symbol CB-

75 May Amperes G-Frame -7 Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers Typical GHC Product Description 1 amperes. 10, 40, 77, 480Y/77 V, 0/60 Hz, 1, 1/0 Vdc. 1, and poles. Cable in, cable out. Does not include mounting hardware. Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-7b as follows: Type GHC, 77 and 480Y/77 V: 1 Pole: Classes 1c, 1a, Poles: Class 1b UL/CSA Product Selection Table -19. Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Use () outside poles. Uses.190- screw type clamp terminals. Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 1 and 0 ampere, 1-pole are SWD rated. Table -10. Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C Vac Maximum, 480Y/77 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc Maximum 1/0 Vdc Maximum 1-Pole -Pole -Pole GHC101 GHC100 GHC10 GHC100 GHC10 GHC1040 GHC10 GHC100 GHC1060 GHC1070 GHC1080 GHC1090 GHC1 1 and 0 ampere, 1-pole are SWD rated. GHC01 GHC00 GHC0 GHC00 GHC0 GHC040 GHC0 GHC00 GHC060 GHC070 GHC080 GHC090 GHC 480Y/77 Vac Maximum, 1/0 Vdc Maximum GHC01 GHC00 GHC0 GHC00 GHC0 GHC040 GHC0 GHC00 GHC060 GHC070 GHC080 GHC090 GHC 77 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc Maximum 1-Pole HGHC101 HGHC100 HGHC10 HGHC100 Discount Symbol CB-

76 -76 1 Amperes G-Frame May 008 Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/ Cable-Out 0 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors Technical Data and Specifications Table -11. Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles GHCGFEP 1 14,000 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 77 Vac (0/60 Hz) Product Selection Table -1. Type GHCGFEP 0 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C Single-Phase (Requires Poles) 77 V, 0 ma GHCGFEP101 GHCGFEP100 GHCGFEP100 GHCGFEP1040 GHCGFEP100 GHCGFEP1060 Single-Phase (Requires Pole Spaces) Product Description 1 60 amperes, 77 V, 0/60 Hz. Operational voltage 40 V to 0 V. Standards and Certifications These circuit breakers meet the requirements of UL 489 and UL 10. Discount Symbol CB-

77 May Amperes G-Frame -77 Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers Product Description Eaton s Cutler-Hammer Type GHC circuit breakers have binding head screw-type terminals on line and load side. These circuit breakers with screw-type terminals (.190-) will be marked Special purpose breaker not for general use. To order this special breaker, use the from Tables -1 and -14. Product Selection Table -1. Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous Ampere at 40 C Use () outside poles. 77 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc Maximum 480Y/77 Vac Maximum, 1/0 Vdc Maximum 1-Pole -Pole -Pole GHC10D GHC100D GHC10D GHC1040D GHC10D GHC100D GHC1060D GHC1070D GHC1080D GHC1090D GHC1D GHC0D GHC00D GHC0D GHC040D GHC0D GHC00D GHC060D GHC070D GHC080D GHC090D GHCD 480Y/77 Vac Maximum, 1/0 Vdc Maximum GHC0D GHC00D GHC0D GHC040D GHC0D GHC00D GHC060D GHC070D GHC080D GHC090D GHCD Table -14. Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications Type Continuous Ampere at 40 C 77 Vac Maximum 1-Pole Cable-in 1 0 Bolt-on 1 0 GHC101HID GHC100HID GHB101HID GHB100HID Discount Symbol CB-

78 Amperes F-Frame May 008 F-Frame Typical F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit Product Description All Eaton s Cutler-Hammer F-Frame Circuit Breakers by are HACR rated. All circuit breakers 10 through 0 amperes are suitable for HID (high intensity discharge) use. All F-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use Technical Data and Specifications Table -1. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC of Poles,,,,, EHD 1, FDC,,, 4 00 FDCE dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. Electronics available on -pole only, no dc rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE. Current limiting. Check with Eaton for availability. Table -16. IEC 17-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity s (P1) FDC,, 4 00 dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. -pole circuit breaker, or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. Table -17. Digitrip Electronic Trip Units Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc FDB,, FD, 1 FDE,, 4 HFD, 1 HFDE,, 4 Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC of Poles,,,,, EHD 1, Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc 0, 40 80, FDB,, FD 1,, 4 HFD 1,, 4 Circuit Breaker Type Frame 6 6 s FDE, HFDE, FDCE FDE, HFDE, FDCE FDE, HFDE, FDCE, 110, 1, 10, 160, 17, 00, , 70, 80, 90,, 1, 10, , 0, 0, 40, 0, 60, 70, 80

79 May Amperes F-Frame -79 Table -18. F-Frame Digitrip Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 10+ rms Sensing Breaker Type Frame Ampere Range Interrupting at 480 V Protection Ordering Options Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Overtemperature Trip Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time I t Long Delay Time I 4 t Long Delay Thermal Memory High Load Alarm Short Delay Protection (S) ZSI (Zone Selective Interlocking) is optional. Must order with ZSI. Standard 10+ does not come with ZSI. Yes FDE 1 A, 6, (ka) LS LSG No Yes No 40 % Frame 4 Seconds Short Delay Pickup 00 0% x (I r ) Short Delay Time I t Short Delay Time Flat Short Delay Time Z.S.I. Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup Discriminator Instantaneous Override Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay I t Ground Fault Delay Flat Ground Fault Z.S.I. Ground Fault Thermal Memory System Diagnostics Cause of Trip LEDs Magnitude of Trip Information Remote Signal Contacts System Monitoring Digital Display Current Voltage Power and Energy Power Quality Harmonics Power Factor Communications PowerNet Testing Testing Method No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes No 0 % Frame No Inst 00 ms Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No Test Kit LSI LSIG No Inst 00 ms Legend: I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In

80 Amperes F-Frame May 008 Dimensions/Weights Table -19. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Depth of Poles (.1).7 (70.0) 4.1 (10.0).0 (19.7) 6.00 (1.4) 6.00 (1.4) 6.00 (1.4) 6.00 (1.4).8 (86.0).8 (86.0).8 (86.0).8 (86.0) Table Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg) Breaker of Poles Type 1 4 ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC (1.4) 4. (.0) EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC (.9) (1.4) 4. (.0) 6 (.7) FDE, HFDE, FDCE 4. (.0) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table Circuit Breaker ing System FDC L Circuit Breaker Type EHD FDB FD HFD FDC of Poles 1 = 1 Pole = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Amperes (FD, HFD, FDC, -, -, 4-Pole Only) 00 (FD, HFD, FDC, -, -, 4-Pole Only) (FD, HFD, FDC, -, -, 4-Pole Only) Suffix E = % Protected (4-Pole only) Neutral Pole EH = 0% Protected (4-Pole only) K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch L = Line and Load Terminals S = Stainless Steel Terminals V = 0 C Calibration W = Without Terminals Y = Line Terminals Only Z = Aluminum Terminals ( Amperes) EDC 00 L Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC of Poles = Poles = Poles Trip Amperes Suffix L = Line and Load Terminals W = Without Terminals Y = Line Terminals Only Z = Aluminum Terminals ( Amperes) FDE W Circuit Breaker Type FDE HFDE FDCE of Poles = Poles Trip Amperes Trip Unit = LS = LSI = LSG 6 = LSIG Suffix ZG = Zone Selective Interlocking Suffix W = Without Terminals L = Line and Load Terminals = Load Side Terminals only

81 May Amperes F-Frame -81 Product Selection Table -14. Types ED, EDH and EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non- Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C 40 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 6 kaic at 40 Vac kaic at 40 Vac 00 kaic at 40 Vac Type ED Type EDH Type EDC Current Limiting -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole ED01 ED00 ED0 ED00 ED0 ED040 ED00 ED060 ED ED1 ED10 ED17 ED00 ED ED01 ED00 ED0 ED00 ED0 ED040 ED00 ED060 ED ED1 ED10 ED17 ED00 ED EDH EDH1 EDH10 EDH17 EDH00 EDH EDH EDH1 EDH10 EDH17 EDH00 EDH EDC EDC1 EDC10 EDC17 EDC00 EDC EDC EDC1 EDC10 EDC17 EDC00 EDC Table -14. Types EDB and EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Maximum 40 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Continuous kaic at 40 Vac 4 kaic at 40 Vac Ampere Type EDB Type EDS at 40 C -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole EDB EDB110 EDB1 EDB10 EDB17 EDB00 EDB EDB EDB110 EDB1 EDB10 EDB17 EDB00 EDB EDS EDS110 EDS1 EDS10 EDS17 EDS00 EDS EDS EDS110 EDS1 EDS10 EDS17 EDS00 EDS Table Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum 77 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc 480 Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Continuous 14 kaic at 77 Vac 14 kaic at 480 Vac Ampere Type EHD (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) at 40 C 1-Pole -Pole -Pole EHD1010 EHD101 EHD100 EHD10 EHD100 EHD10 EHD1040 EHD10 EHD100 EHD1060 EHD1070 EHD1080 EHD1090 EHD1 EHD010 EHD01 EHD00 EHD0 EHD00 EHD0 EHD040 EHD0 EHD00 EHD060 EHD070 EHD080 EHD090 EHD Not UL listed. kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40-8(d). EHD010 EHD01 EHD00 EHD0 EHD00 EHD0 EHD040 EHD0 EHD00 EHD060 EHD070 EHD080 EHD090 EHD Discount Symbol CB-

82 -8 10 Amperes F-Frame May 008 Table -1. Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Cont. Ampere at 40 C Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc 77 Vac Maximum, Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc 1 Vdc 14 kaic at Vac kaic at 77 Vac kaic at 480 Vac Type FDB (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Type FD (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) -Pole -Pole 4-Pole 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole FDB010 FDB01 FDB00 FDB0 FDB00 FDB0 FDB040 FDB0 FDB00 FDB060 FDB070 FDB080 FDB090 FDB FDB110 FDB1 FDB10 FDB010 FDB01 FDB00 FDB0 FDB00 FDB0 FDB040 FDB0 FDB00 FDB060 FDB070 FDB080 FDB090 FDB FDB110 FDB1 FDB10 FDB4010 FDB401 FDB400 FDB40 FDB400 FDB40 FDB4040 FDB40 FDB400 FDB4060 FDB4070 FDB4080 FDB4090 FDB4 FDB4110 FDB41 FDB410 Not UL listed. kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40-8(d). FD1010 FD101 FD100 FD10 FD100 FD10 FD1040 FD10 FD100 FD1060 FD1070 FD1080 FD1090 FD1 FD1110 FD11 FD110 FD01 FD00 FD0 FD00 FD0 FD040 FD0 FD00 FD060 FD070 FD080 FD090 FD FD110 FD1 FD10 FD17 FD00 FD FD01 FD00 FD0 FD00 FD0 FD040 FD0 FD00 FD060 FD070 FD080 FD090 FD FD110 FD1 FD10 FD17 FD00 FD FD401 FD400 FD40 FD400 FD40 FD4040 FD40 FD400 FD4060 FD4070 FD4080 FD4090 FD4 FD4110 FD41 FD410 FD417 FD400 FD4 Table Types HFD and FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Cont. Ampere at 40 C 77 Vac Maximum, 1 Vdc Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc 6 kaic at 77 Vac 6 kaic at 480 Vac kaic at 480 Vac Type HFD (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) Type FDC Current Limiting (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole HFD101 HFD100 HFD10 HFD100 HFD10 HFD1040 HFD10 HFD100 HFD1060 HFD1070 HFD1080 HFD1090 HFD1 HFD1110 HFD11 HFD110 HFD01 HFD00 HFD0 HFD00 HFD0 HFD040 HFD0 HFD00 HFD060 HFD070 HFD080 HFD090 HFD HFD110 HFD1 HFD10 HFD17 HFD00 HFD HFD01 HFD00 HFD0 HFD00 HFD0 HFD040 HFD0 HFD00 HFD060 HFD070 HFD080 HFD090 HFD HFD110 HFD1 HFD10 HFD17 HFD00 HFD UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40-8(d). HFD401 HFD400 HFD40 HFD400 HFD40 HFD4040 HFD40 HFD400 HFD4060 HFD4070 HFD4080 HFD4090 HFD4 HFD4110 HFD41 HFD410 HFD417 HFD400 HFD4 FDC01 FDC00 FDC0 FDC00 FDC0 FDC040 FDC0 FDC00 FDC060 FDC070 FDC080 FDC090 FDC FDC110 FDC1 FDC10 FDC17 FDC00 FDC FDC01 FDC00 FDC0 FDC00 FDC0 FDC040 FDC0 FDC00 FDC060 FDC070 FDC080 FDC090 FDC FDC110 FDC1 FDC10 FDC17 FDC00 FDC FDC401 FDC400 FDC40 FDC400 FDC40 FDC4040 FDC40 FDC400 FDC4060 FDC4070 FDC4080 FDC4090 FDC4 FDC4110 FDC41 FDC410 FDC417 FDC400 FDC4 Discount Symbol CB-

83 May Amperes F-Frame -8 Table Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Ampere Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG IC kaic at 480 Vac CTF080 CTF160 CTF IC 6 kaic at 480 Vac CTF080 CTF160 CTF IC kaic at 480 Vac CTF080 CTF160 CTF Check with Eaton for availability. Molded Case Switches Eaton s Cutler-Hammer molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. Except as noted, terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standards UL 486A and UL 486B. Unless otherwise specified, F-Frame circuit breakers are factory equipped with load terminals only. Ordering Information F-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have load terminals only as standard equipment. When standard line-end terminals (same as standard load-end terminals) are required, add Suffix L to the circuit breaker. When nonstandard or optional line and/or load terminals are required, order by style number. Specify if factory installation is required. LS LSI LSG LSIG FDE080 FDE160 FDE HFDE080 HFDE160 HFDE FDCE080 FDCE160 FDCE FDE080 FDE160 FDE HFDE080 HFDE160 HFDE FDCE080 FDCE160 FDCE FDE080 FDE160 FDE HFDE080 HFDE160 HFDE FDCE080 FDCE160 FDCE Table FDE Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective Interlocking Ampere kaic at 480 Vac kaic at 480 Vac LSI w/zsi Table Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole 10 -Pole 10 4-Pole 10 FDE080ZG FDE160ZG FDEZG HFDE080ZG HFDE160ZG HFDEZG LSIG w/zsi FDE0806ZG FDE1606ZG FDE6ZG HFDE0806ZG HFDE1606ZG HFDE6ZG Note: Molded Case Switches will open above 1800 amperes. FDE0806 FDE1606 FDE6 HFDE0806 HFDE1606 HFDE6 FDCE0806 FDCE1606 FDCE6 Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side Terminals Only 480 Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc EHDK EHDK Table -10. Breaker Mount Ammeter Description Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc FDK FD10K FDK FDK FD10K FDK FD4K FD410K FD4K HFDK HFD10K HFDK HFDK HFD10K HFDK HFD4K HFD410K HFD4K Breaker Mount Ammeter DIGIVIEW Note: Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only. Ammeter Discount Symbol CB-

84 Amperes F-Frame May 008 Line and Load Terminals (Continued) Table -11. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Standard Pressure Type Terminals 0 (EHD) Steel Steel Aluminum Optional Pressure Terminals 0 00 Aluminum Aluminum Stainless Steel Aluminum Wire Type AWG Wire Range Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu Cu/AI /0 4 4/ /0 4 4/ kcmil Metric Wire Range mm Package of Terminals T0FB TFB TAFD TA0FB TAFD T10FB TAFDK Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers. Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately inches (76.) to breaker height. Available for use on -pole breaker only. Screw Collar Nut Collar Clip Conductor Wire Clamp Conductor Washer Screw Conductor Extrusion Figure -1. T0FB Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Figure -16. TFB, T10FB Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Figure -17. TAFD Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around bottom of collar. Collar Conductor Collar Conductor Washer Screw Washer Screw Figure -18. TA0FB Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Figure -19. TAFD Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw and lockwasher. Figure -0. TAFDK (Up to 10 mm ) Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with this collar. Note: For 18 mm, use TAFDK1. Discount Symbol CB-

85 May Amperes F-Frame -8 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -1. Accessories Description Reference 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only) -18 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Shunt Trip Standard -191 Shunt Trip Low Energy -196 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 External Accessories End Cap Kit -08 Keeper Nut -08 Control Wire Terminal Kit -09 Multiwire Connectors -10 Base Mounting Hardware -11 Terminal Shields -1 Terminal End Covers -14 Interphase Barriers -14 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -16 Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -16 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -17 Cylinder Lock -17 Key Interlock Kit -18 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Electrical (Solenoid and Motor) Operators -0 Plug-in Adapters - Rear Connecting Studs - Panelboard Connecting Straps -6 Handle Mechanisms -7 LFD Current Limiter - IQ Energy Sentinel - Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both

86 Amperes J-Frame May 008 J-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Table -1. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc JDB JD HJD JDC,,, 4,, 4,, 4 -pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. Current limiting Typical J-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description All Eaton s Cutler-Hammer J-Frame Circuit Breakers are HACR rated. J-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. J-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Table -14. IEC 17-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type JD HJD JDC of Poles,, 4,, 4,, 4 Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 10

87 May Amperes J-Frame -87 Dimensions/Weights Table -1. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth, (10.0).0 (19.7) (4.0) (4.0) 4.06 (104.1) 4.06 (104.1) Table -16. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Type Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit of Poles JDB JD HJD JDC 11. (.1) 11. (.1) 11. (.1) 1. (.6) 1.0 (.7) 1.0 (.7) 1.0 (.7) 1.0 (6.1) 1. (6.0) 1. (6.0) 14. (6.) 9.00 (4.1) 9.00 (4.1) (4.) (4.) (4.) (.0) 10.0 (4.8) 10.0 (4.8) 11.0 (.).00 (.9).00 (.9).00 (.9).00 (.9).00 (.9).00 (.9). (1.0). (1.0). (1.0) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -17. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System JD 0 F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type JDB JD HJD JDC of Poles = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Suffix C = Non-Aluminum Terminals F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C Calibration W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only Table -18. Trip Unit ing System JT 0 T Trip Unit Type JT = Thermal-Magnetic of Poles = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit / Plug Ampere Suffix T = Trip Unit Thermal-Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adj. Magnetic V = 0 C Calibration (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only)

88 Amperes J-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table -19. Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Cont. Amp at 40 C -Pole Pole Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals JD070 JD090 JD JD1 JD10 JD17 JD00 JD JD0 JD070 JD090 JD JD1 JD10 JD17 JD00 JD JD0 JD41 JD410 JD417 JD400 JD4 JD40 High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HJD070 HJD090 HJD HJD1 HJD10 HJD17 HJD00 HJD HJD0 Magnetic trip adjustable 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. Fully rated neutral pole with no protection. Neutral is in right pole. Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals JDC070 JDC090 JDC JDC1 JDC10 JDC17 JDC00 JDC JDC0 Table Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac -Pole HJD070 HJD090 HJD HJD1 HJD10 HJD17 HJD00 HJD HJD0 HJD41 HJD410 HJD417 HJD400 HJD4 HJD40 High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac JDC070 JDC090 JDC JDC1 JDC10 JDC17 JDC00 JDC JDC0 JDC41 JDC410 JDC417 JDC400 JDC4 JDC40 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac JD0F HJD0F JDC0F -Pole JD0F HJD0F JDC0F 4-Pole JD40F HJD40F JDC40F Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames JT070T JT090T JTT JT1T JT10T JT17T JT00T JTT JT0T JT070T JT090T JTT JT1T JT10T JT17T JT00T JTT JT0T JT1T JT10T JT17T JT00T JTT JT0T Standard Terminals Only See Page -90 for Optional Terminals TA0KB TA0KB TA0KB Discount Symbol CB-

89 May Amperes J-Frame -89 Table Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Application Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Pole Vac Rated, 0 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals JDB070W JDB090W JDBW JDB1W JDB10W JDB17W JDB00W JDBW JDB0W JDB070W JDB090W JDBW JDB1W JDB10W JDB17W JDB00W JDBW JDB0W With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only JDB070 JDB090 JDB JDB1 JDB10 JDB17 JDB00 JDB JDB0 JDB070 JDB090 JDB JDB1 JDB10 JDB17 JDB00 JDB JDB0 Molded Case Switches Eaton s Cutler-Hammer molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Table -16. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole 0 JD0KW HJD0KW -Pole 0 JD0KW HJD0KW 4-Pole 0 JD40KW HJD40KW Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Standard Complete Circuit Breaker Only without Terminals Only Line and Load Terminals Suitable for Reverse Feed Use JDB0KW HJDB0KW JDB0KW HJDB0KW JDB40KW HJDB40KW Individually packed. Note: Molded case switches may open above 00 amperes. See Page -90 for Optional Terminals TA0KB TA0KB TA0KB Discount Symbol CB-

90 Amperes J-Frame May 008 Line and Load Terminals Eaton s Cutler-Hammer line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 6, or Electrical Bulletin 116. Unless otherwise specified, J-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The bottom of the standard TA0KB terminal contains a recess which is positioned over the J-Frame circuit breaker terminal conductor. Ordering Information J-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper-only terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -16. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Note: No dual lugs. See multiwire lugs Page -10. Metric Wire Range mm Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 0 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 0 kcmil 18 TA0KB Optional Cu Pressure Terminals 0 Stainless Steel Cu 4 0 kcmil 18 T0KB Slotted Screw Collar Nut Collar Slotted Screw Figure -1. T0KB Terminal Figure -. TA0KB Terminal (Standard) Discount Symbol CB-

91 May Amperes J-Frame -91 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table Accessories Description Reference -, -Pole 4-Pole Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Shunt Trip Standard -191 Shunt Trip Low Energy -196 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 External Accessories End Cap Kit -08 Plug Nut -09 Control Wire Terminal Kit -09 Multiwire Connectors -10 Base Mounting Hardware -11 Terminal Shields -1 Interphase Barriers -14 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -16 Padlockable Handle Block -16 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -17 Cylinder Lock -17 Key Interlock Kit -18 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Electrical (Solenoid) Operator -0 Plug-in Adapters - Rear Connecting Studs - Panelboard Connecting Straps -6 Handle Mechanisms -7 Handle Extension - IQ Energy Sentinel - Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment -66 Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine/Naval Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both

92 Amperes K-Frame May 008 K-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Table -16. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description All Cutler-Hammer K-Frame Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are HACR rated. K-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. K-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use. DK KDB KD HKD, HKDB KDC CKD CHKD,,, 4,, 4,, pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. Current limiting. Table IEC 17-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type DK KDB KD HKD, HKDB KDC,, 4 of Poles,,, 4,, 4,, 4,, pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of -pole circuit breaker. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc

93 May Amperes K-Frame -9 K-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 10 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Digitrip OPTIM 100 rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame K K K Ampere Range 1 400A 1 400A 1 400A Interrupting at 480 Volts, 6, (ka), 6, (ka), 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I t 1 Seconds 1 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short Delay Time I t ms No 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Delay I t No No 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contact Ground Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No Yes Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Adjust by rating plug. Zone interlock kit. With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). By OPTIMizer/BIM. Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit. 400 ampere frame 1 x I g (80 A). 0 ampere frame 1 x I g (0 A). 1 ampere frame 1 x I g ( A). Legend: BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting

94 Amperes K-Frame May 008 Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth, 4.0 (149.7) 7. (18.4) 10.1 (7.) 10.1 (7.) 4.10 (104.1) 4.10 (104.1) Table Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg) Breaker Type DK KDB KD HKD, HKDB KDC Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit of Poles 10.0 (4.) 10.0 (4.) 10.0 (4.) 10.0 (4.) 10.0 (4.) 11. (.) 11. (.) 11. (.) 11. (.) 11. (.) 7. (.4) 7. (.4) 7. (.4) 8. (.9) 8. (.9) 8. (.9) 1. (.7) 1. (.7) 1. (.7) Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. -pole electronic trip units weigh. lbs. (1.1 kg). 1. (.7) 1. (.7) 1. (.7)

95 May Amperes K-Frame -9 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System KD 400 F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type DK KD KDB HKD HKDB KDC CKD CHKD of Poles = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Suffix C = Copper Terminals E = 0% Protected Neutral Pole (4-Pole Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker Only) F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C Calibration (Thermal- Magnetic Trip Units Only) W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only No Suffix Indicates Standard Load and Lineside Terminals Table Trip Unit ing System KT 400 T Trip Unit Type KT = Thermal-Magnetic KES = Electronic of Poles = -Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit / Plug Ampere Suffix LS = Electronic Trip Unit Adjustable Short Time Delay with I t Short Delay Ramp LSI = Electronic Trip Unit Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay LSG = Electronic Trip Unit Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection LSIG = Electronic Trip Unit Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection V = 0 C Calibration (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) E = 0% Protected Neutral Pole (4-Pole Electronic Trip Unit Only) Terminals Only T = Trip Unit Only Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only. Table -17. OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System KD 1 T 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD of Poles = Poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere Trip Model T = Model 0 T10 = Model 100 Trip Type = LSI 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Suffix W = Without Terminals

96 Amperes K-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table -17. Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Pole Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals KD KD1 KD10 KD17 KD00 KD KD0 KD00 KD0 KD400 KD KD1 KD10 KD17 KD00 KD KD0 KD00 KD0 KD400 KD4 KD41 KD410 KD417 KD400 KD4 KD40 KD400 KD40 KD4400 High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HKD HKD1 HKD10 HKD17 HKD00 HKD HKD0 HKD00 HKD0 HKD400 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals KDC KDC1 KDC10 KDC17 KDC00 KDC KDC0 KDC00 KDC0 KDC400 Magnetic trip adjustable 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. TA400K, TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Table Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac -Pole HKD HKD1 HKD10 HKD17 HKD00 HKD HKD0 HKD00 HKD0 HKD400 HKD4 HKD41 HKD410 HKD417 HKD400 HKD4 HKD40 HKD400 HKD40 HKD4400 High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac KDC KDC1 KDC10 KDC17 KDC00 KDC KDC0 KDC00 KDC0 KDC400 KDC4 KDC41 KDC410 KDC417 KDC400 KDC4 KDC40 KDC400 KDC40 KDC4400 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac KD400F HKD400F KDC400F -Pole KD400F HKD400F KDC400F 4-Pole KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames KTT KT1T KT10T KT17T KT00T KTT KT0T KT00T KT0T KT400T KTT KT1T KT10T KT17T KT00T KTT KT0T KT00T KT0T KT400T KTT KT1T KT10T KT17T KT00T KTT KT0T KT00T KT0T KT400T Standard Terminals Only See Page -106 for Optional Terminals TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA0K TA0K TA400K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA0K TA0K TA400K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA0K TA0K 4TA400K Discount Symbol CB-

97 May Amperes K-Frame -97 Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug, Terminals. Table -17. Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Max. Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Unit Only Digitrip 10 Plug Only Standard Cont. Standard Options Ampere Fixed Adjustable Terminals Ampere Plug Only at 40 C Plug -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection 1 KD400F HKD400F KDC400F KES1LS KES1LSI KES1LSG KES1LSIG KD400F HKD400F KDC400F KES0LS KES0LSI KES0LSG KES0LSIG KD400F HKD400F KDC400F KES400LS KES400LSI KES400LSG KES400LSIG Pole 1 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES41LS KES41LSI KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES40LS KES40LSI KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI Ampere 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KES1T KES070T KEST KES1T KES10T KES160T KES17T KES00T KEST KES0T 4KES00T 4KEST 4KES0T 4KES00T 4KES0T 4KES400T 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KES1T KES070T KEST KES1T KES10T KES160T KES17T KES00T KEST KES0T 4KES00T 4KEST 4KES0T 4KES00T 4KES0T 4KES400T 70/90//1 A1KES1T1 1/10/00/0 AKES0T1 00/0/00/400 A4KES400T1 00/40/60/80 A4KES00T 0/40/60/80 A4KES00T 70/90//1 A1KES1T1 1/10/00/0 AKES0T1 00/0/00/400 A4KES400T1 00/40/60/80 A4KES00T 0/40/60/80 A4KES00T See Table -176 on Page -98 for prices. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. For ac use only. -pole KES Trip Units are for use in -pole frames only. Individually packed. TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding -pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required. Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 0% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to 4-pole trip unit. See Page -106 for Optional Terminals TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA400K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA0K TA0K 4TA400K

98 Amperes K-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Unit s A1KES1T1 AKES0T1 A4KES400T1 HKD400F HKD4400F KDC400F KDC4400F KD400F KD4400F KES1LS KES1LSG KES1LSI KES1LSIG KES0LS KES0LSG KES0LSI KES0LSIG KES400LS KES400LSG KES400LSI KES400LSIG KES41LS KES41LSI KES40LS KES40LSI KES4400LS KES4400LSI TA00K TA0K 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KES1T KES070T KEST KES1T KES10T KES160T KES17T KES00T KEST KES0T TA400K 4KES00T 4KEST 4KES0T 4KES00T 4KES0T 4KES400T 4TA400K Table Types KDB and HKDB with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40ºC of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Tip Unit Less Terminals and Plug L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Time Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG Digitrip RMS 10 Plug (Order as Separate Items) Fixed Adjustable Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay 8 x I n 8 x I n 0 00 ms 8 x I n Varies by Frame 0 00 ms 8 x I n 0 00 ms Varies by Frame 0 00 ms Type KDB with Digitrip 10 Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed 1 KDB1FTW KDB1FTW KDB1FTW KDB1FT6W 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES1T 0 KDB0FTW KDB0FTW KDB0FTW KDB0FT6W KES070T KES090T KEST KES1T KES10T KES160T KES17T KES00T KEST KES0T 400 KDB400FTW KDB400FTW KDB400FTW KDB400FT6W 4KES00T 4KEST 4KES0T 4KES00T 4KES0T 4KES400T 70/90//1 A1KES1T1 1/10/00/0 AKES0T1 00/0/00/400 A4KES400T1 00/40/60/80 A4KES00T 0/40/60/80 A4KES00T Discount Symbol CB-

99 May Amperes K-Frame -99 Table Types KDB and HKDB with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed (Continued) Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40ºC of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Tip Unit Less Terminals and Plug L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Time Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG Digitrip RMS 10 plug (Order as Separate Items) Fixed Adjustable Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay 8 x I n 8 x I n 0 00 ms 8 x I n Varies by Frame 0 00 ms 8 x I n 0 00 ms Varies by Frame 0 00 ms Type HKDB with Digitrip 10 Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed 1 HKDB1FTW HKDB1FTW HKDB1FTW HKDB1FT6W 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES1T 0 HKDB0FTW HKDB0FTW HKDB0FTW HKDB0FT6W KES070T KES090T KEST KES1T KES10T KES160T KES17T KES00T KEST KES0T 400 HKDB400FTW HKDB400FTW HKDB400FTW HKDB400FT6W 4KES00T 4KEST 4KES0T 4KES00T 4KES0T 4KES400T 70/90//1 AKES1T1 1/10/00/0 AKES0T1 1/10/00/0 A4KES0T1 00/40/60/80 A4KES00T 0/40/60/80 A4KES00T

100 Amperes K-Frame May 008 Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for reverse feed application. Table Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Pole Vac Rated, 0 Vdc Vac Rated, 0 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals DK0W DK00W DK0W DK400W DK0W DK00W DK0W DK400W With Line Terminals Only DK0Y DK00Y DK0Y DK400Y DK0Y DK00Y DK0Y DK400Y With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only DK0 DK00 DK0 DK400 DK0 DK00 DK0 DK400 Without Line and Load Terminals KDBW KDB1W KDB10W KDB17W KDB00W KDBW KDB0W KDB00W KDB0W KDB400W KDBW KDB1W KDB10W KDB17W KDB00W KDBW KDB0W KDB00W KDB0W KDB400W With Standard Line and Load Terminals KDB KDB1 KDB10 KDB17 KDB00 KDB KDB0 KDB00 KDB0 KDB400 KDB KDB1 KDB10 KDB17 KDB00 KDB KDB0 KDB00 KDB0 KDB400 Molded Case Switches Eaton s Cutler-Hammer molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL Table Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C 40 Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals -Pole 400 DK400K KD400K HKD400K -Pole 400 DK400K KD400K HKD400K 4-Pole 400 KD4400K HKD4400K Note: Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes. Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals. Suitable for Reverse Feed Use KDB400K HKDB400K KDB400K HKDB400K KDB4400K HKDB4400K Discount Symbol CB-

101 May Amperes K-Frame -101 % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. All % rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Table % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Unit Only Digitrip 10 Plug Only Standard Standard Options Ampere Adjustable Terminals Plug Only Standard Interrupting Capacity kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 6 kaic at 480 Vac Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection See Table -181 below for prices. Individually packed. TA400K terminal kit contains one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection 1 CKD400F CHKD400F KES1LS KES1LSI KES1LSG KES1LSIG CKD400F CHKD400F KES0LS KES0LSI KES0LSG KES0LSIG CKD400F CHKD400F KES400LS KES400LSI KES400LSG KES400LSIG Fixed Plug Ampere 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KES1T KES070T KEST KES1T KES10T KES160T KES17T KES00T KEST KES0T 4KES00T 4KEST 4KES0T 4KES00T 4KES0T 4KES400T 70/90//1 A1KES1T1 1/10/00/ AKES0T1 00/0/00/400 A4KES400T1 0/40/60/80 A4KES00T 0/40/60/80 A4KES00T See Page -106 for Optional Terminals TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA00K TA00K TA0K TA0K TA0K TA400K Table % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers s A1KES1T1 AKES0T1 A4KES400T1 A4KES00T A4KES00T CHKD400F CKD400F KES1LS KES1LSG KES1LSI KES1LSIG KES0LS KES0LSG KES0LSI KES0LSIG KES400LS KES400LSG KES400LSI KES400LSIG TA00K TA0K 1KES070T 1KES090T 1KEST 1KES110T 1KES1T KES070T KEST KES1T KES10T KES160T KES17T KES00T KEST KES0T TA400K 4KES00T 4KEST 4KES0T 4KES00T 4KES0T 4KES400T Discount Symbol CB-

102 Amperes K-Frame May 008 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -18. Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) ➀ S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 KD1TW KD1T6W KD1T7W KD0TW KD0T6W KD0T7W KD400TW KD400T6W KD400T7W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 HKD1TW HKD1T6W HKD1T7W HKD0TW HKD0T6W HKD0T7W HKD400TW HKD400T6W HKD400T7W Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 KDC1TW KDC1T6W KDC1T7W KDC0TW KDC0T6W KDC0T7W KDC400TW KDC400T6W KDC400T7W ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 Discount Symbol CB-

103 May Amperes K-Frame -10 Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -18. Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) Ampere Fixed Plug I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG LSIA -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 KD1T106W KD1T107W KD0T106W KD0T107W KD400T106W KD400T107W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 HKD1T106W HKD1T107W HKD0T106W HKD0T107W HKD400T106W HKD400T107W Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 KDC1T106W KDC1T107W KDC0T106W KDC0T107W KDC400T106W KDC400T107W Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 Discount Symbol CB-

104 Amperes K-Frame May 008 % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CKD1TW CKD1T6W CKD1T7W CKD0TW CKD0T6W CKD0T7W CKD400TW CKD400T6W CKD400T7W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CHKD1TW CHKD1T6W CHKD1T7W CHKD0TW CHKD0T6W CHKD0T7W CHKD400TW CHKD400T6W CHKD400T7W ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 Discount Symbol CB-

105 May Amperes K-Frame -10 % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -18. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG LSIA -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CKD1T106W CKD1T107W CKD0T106W CKD0T107W CKD400T106W CKD400T107W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CHKD1T106W CHKD1T107W CHKD0T106W CHKD0T107W CHKD400T106W CHKD400T107W Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 ORPK1A70 ORPK1A90 ORPK1A ORPK1A110 ORPK1A1 ORPK0A1 ORPK0A10 ORPK0A17 ORPK0A00 ORPK0A ORPK0A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A ORPK40A0 ORPK40A00 ORPK40A0 ORPK40A400 Discount Symbol CB-

106 Amperes K-Frame May 008 Line and Load Terminals Eaton s Cutler-Hammer line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 6, or Electrical Bulletin 116. Unless otherwise specified, K- Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. Ordering Information K-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Wire Type Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors 0/(1) 0 00/(1) /0 0/() Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals Copper Copper Copper Aluminum Aluminum Copper Cu Cu Cu Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu 0/(1) 0 00/(1) /0 0/() /0 0/() or /0 00/(1) 00 70/(1) 00 70/(1) Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. -pole kit. -pole kit. 4-pole kit. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers. Metric Wire Terminal Figure Terminals with Range mm Control Wire Termination TA00K TA0K TA400K TA400K 4TA400K T00K T0K T400K T400K 4T400K TA401K TA401K 4TA401K TA40K TA40K 4TA40K T40K T40K 4T40K TA400KCW TA400KCW 4TA400KCW T400KCW T400KCW 4T400KCW TA401KCW TA401KCW 4TA401KCW Figure Figure -. TA401K Figure -4. TA400K, T400K Figure -. TA0K, T0K Tab is 1/4 x.0 Figure -6. TA00K, T00K Figure -7. T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA401KCW Figure -8. TA40K, T40K Discount Symbol CB-

107 May Amperes K-Frame -107 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table Accessories Description Reference -Pole -Pole 4-Pole Page Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Shunt Trip Standard -191 Shunt Trip Low Energy -196 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 PowerNet or Zone Interlock Kit (OPTIM 0) -07 External Accessories End Cap Kit -08 Keeper Nut -08 Control Wire Terminal Kit -09 Terminal Adapter -09 Multiwire Connectors -10 Base Mounting Hardware -11 Terminal Shields -1 Interphase Barriers -14 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -16 Padlockable Handle Block -16 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -17 Cylinder Lock -17 Key Interlock Kit -18 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Electrical (Solenoid) Operator -0 Plug-in Adapters - Rear Connecting Studs - Panelboard Connecting Straps -6 Handle Mechanisms -7 Handle Extension - IQ Energy Sentinel - Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit - OPTIM System Components -Poles Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -4 Digitrip OPTIMizer -4 Auxiliary Power Module -4 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment -66 Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position. May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available. not both. -pole breaker supplied in -pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units.

108 Amperes L-Frame May 008 L-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description All Cutler-Hammer L-Frame Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are HACR rated. L-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. L-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use. CE marked. Table UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type LDB LD CLD HLD, HLDB CHLD of Poles,,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4 LDC, LDCB,, 4 CLDC,, 4 Interrupting Capacity (ka rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc Utilization category A circuit breakers. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. -pole circuit breaker or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Incorporating Thermal-Magnetic trip unit only. % rated breakers. Current limiting. Table IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type LDB LD CLD HLD, HLDB CHLD LDC, LDCB CLDC of Poles,,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4 Utilization category A circuit breakers. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. -pole circuit breaker or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Incorporating Thermal-Magnetic trip unit only. % rated breakers Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs

109 May Amperes L-Frame -109 L-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 10 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Digitrip OPTIM 100 rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame L L L Ampere Range 00 A 00 A 00 A Interrupting at 480 Volts, 6, (ka), 6, (ka), 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I t 1 Seconds 1 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short Delay Time I t ms No 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Pickup 1 x I g (10 A) 1 x I g (10 A) 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Delay I t No No 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contact Ground Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No Yes Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Adjust by rating plug. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit. Zone interlock kit. With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). Legend: BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting

110 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth, 4 8. (09.6) (79.4) 10.7 (7.1) 10.7 (7.1) 4.06 (10.1) 4.06 (10.1) Table -19. Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg) Breaker Type Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit of Poles LD, HLD, LDC LDB 18 (8.) 18 (8.) 0 (9.1) 0 (9.1) (11.) (11.) 14 (6.4) 1 (6.8) 0 (9.1) (1.4) 4 (1.8) (.)

111 May Amperes L-Frame -111 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -19. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System LD F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LDB LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC of Poles = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Suffix C = Copper Terminals F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only Table Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit ing System LT 400 T Trip Unit Type LT = Thermal Magnetic of Poles = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit / Plug Ampere Suffix T = Trip Unit Thermal-Magnetic Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic V = 0 C Calibration (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) Table -19. OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System LD 1 T 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC of Poles = Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere 1 = (Available on Model 100 Only) 0 = (Available on Model 100 Only) 400 Trip Type = LSI (0 Only) 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Trip Model T = Model 0 T10 = Model 100 Suffix W = Without Terminals Table Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Unit ing System LES LS P Trip Unit Type LES = Electronic of Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Trip Unit Ampere Suffix LS LSI LSG LSIG Suffix P = % Protected Neutral on 4-Pole Trip Unit

112 -11 1 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Pole Pole Magnetic trip range 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Neutral is in right pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals LD00 LD0 LD400 LD0 LD00 LD LD00 LD0 LD400 LD0 LD00 LD LD400 LD40 LD4400 LD40 LD00 LD4 High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HLD00 HLD0 HLD400 HLD0 HLD00 HLD Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals LDC00 LDC0 LDC400 LDC0 LDC00 LDC Table Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac -Pole HLD00 HLD0 HLD400 HLD0 HLD00 HLD HLD400 HLD40 HLD4400 HLD40 HLD00 HLD4 High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac LDC00 LDC0 LDC400 LDC0 LDC00 LDC LDC400 LDC40 LDC4400 LDC40 LDC00 LDC4 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac LDF HLDF LDCF -Pole LDF HLDF LDCF 4-Pole LD4F HLD4F LDC4F Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames LT00T LT0T LT400T LT0T LT00T LTT LT00T LT0T LT400T LT0T LT00T LTT LT400T LT40T LT4400T LT40T LT00T LT4T Standard Terminals Only See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LDK TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LDK TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD 4TA60LDK Discount Symbol CB-

113 May Amperes L-Frame -11 Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug, Terminals. Table Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Unit Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Ampere Fixed Adjustable Terminals Continuous Plug) Plug Only S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Plug Ampere Delay Time (I Ampere t Response) or Adjustable Short at 40 C Delay Time (Flat Response) -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac See Table -00 below for prices. Individually packed. For ac use only. Neutral is in right pole. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) LDF HLDF LDCF LESLS LESLSI LESLSG LESLSIG Pole LD4F HLD4F LDC4F LES4LS LES4LSI LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST 6LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST 00/400/ 00/ A6LEST1 40/440/ 460/480 A6LES400T 0/40/ 60/80 A6LES00T 00/400/ 00/ A6LEST1 40/440/ 460/480 A6LES400T 0/40/ 60/80 A6LES00T See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LDK TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD 4TA60LDK Table -00. Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units s A6LEST1 HLDF HLD4F LDCF LDC4F LDF LD4F LESLS LESLSG LESLSI LESLSIG LES4LS LES4LSI TA60LD TA60LDK 4TA60LDK 6LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST A6LES400T A6LES00T Discount Symbol CB-

114 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Table -01. Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40ºC of Poles Circuit Breaker Frame Including DigiTrip RMS 10 Electronic Tip Unit Less Terminals and Plug L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time I (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Time (Flat Response) Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Time Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Digitrip RMS 10 Plug (Order as Separate Items) Fixed LS LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay For ac use only. 8 x I n 8 x I n 0 00 ms 8 x I n Varies by Frame 0 00 ms 8 x I n 0 00 ms Varies by Frame 0 00 ms Type LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 10 Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit LDBFTW LDBFTW LDBFTW LDBFTW 6LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST HLDBFTW HLDBFTW HLDBFTW HLDBFT6W 6LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST LDCBFTW LDCBFTW LDCBFTW LDCBFT6W 6LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST 00/400/00/ A6LEST1 40/440/460/480 A6LES400T 0/40/60/80 A6LES00T 00/400/00/ A6LEST1 40/440/460/480 A6LES400T 0/40/60/80 A6LES00T 00/400/00/ A6LEST1 40/440/460/480 A6LES400T 0/40/60/80 A6LES00T

115 May Amperes L-Frame -11 % Rated Types CLD, CHLD, and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. All % rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug and Terminals. Table -0. % Rated Types CLD, CHLD, and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Unit Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard Standard Options Ampere Adjustable Terminals Plug Only Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection See Table -0 below for prices. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. Individually packed. TA60LDK terminal kit contains one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection CLDF CHLDF CLDCF LESLS LESLSI LESLSG LESLSIG Fixed Plug Ampere 6LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST 00/400/ 00/ A6LEST1 40/440/460/480 A6LES400T 0/40/60/80 A6LES00T See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LD TA60LDK Table -0. % Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units s A6LEST1 CHLDF CLDCF CLDF LESLS LESLSG LESLSI LESLSIG TA60LD TA60LDK 6LES00T 6LES0T 6LES400T 6LES0T 6LES00T 6LEST Discount Symbol CB-

116 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Table -04. Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere -Pole Pole Vac Rated, 0 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals LDB00W LDB0W LDB400W LDB0W LDB00W LDBW LDB00W LDB0W LDB400W LDB0W LDB00W LDBW Factory sealed suitable for reverse feed application. With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only LDB00 LDB0 LDB400 LDB0 LDB00 LDB LDB00 LDB0 LDB400 LDB0 LDB00 LDB Molded Case Switches Eaton s Cutler-Hammer molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Table -0. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole -Pole 4-Pole Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Standard Terminals Only Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals LDWK LDBWK HLDWK LDWK LDBWK HLDWK LD4WK LDB4WK HLD4WK See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA60LDK TA60LDK TA60LDK TA60LDK TA60LDK TA60LDK 4TA60LDK 4TA60LDK 4TA60LDK Factory sealed suitable for reverse feed application. Note: Molded case switch will trip above 0 amperes. Discount Symbol CB-

117 May Amperes L-Frame -117 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -06. Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 LD1TW LD1T6W LD1T7W 0 LD0TW LD0T6W LD0T7W 400 LD400TW LD400T6W LD400T7W LDTW LDT6W LDT7W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 HLD1TW HLD1T6W HLD1T7W HLD0TW HLD0T6W HLD0T7W HLD400TW HLD400T6W HLD400T7W HLDTW HLDT6W HLDT7W ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

118 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Table -06. Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug (Continued) Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). -Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 LDC1TW LDC1T6W LDC1T7W 0 LDC0TW LDC0T6W LDC0T7W 400 LDC400TW LDC400T6W LDC400T7W LDCTW LDCT6W LDCT7W ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

119 May Amperes L-Frame -119 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -07. Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 LD1T106W LD1T107W LD0T106W LD0T107W LD400T106W LD400T107W LDT106W LDT107W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 HLD1T106W HLD1T107W HLD0T106W HLD0T107W HLD400T106W HLD400T107W HLDT106W HLDT107W Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

120 -10 1 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Table -07. Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug (Continued) Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG LSIA -Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 LDC1T106W LDC1T107W LDC0T106W LDC0T107W LDC400T106W LDC400T107W LDCT106W LDCT107W Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

121 May Amperes L-Frame -11 % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -08. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CLD1TW CLD1T6W CLD1T7W CLD0TW CLD0T6W CLD1T7W CLD400TW CLD400T6W CLD400T7W CLDTW CLDT6W CLDT7W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CHLD1TW CHLD1T6W CHLD1T7W CHLD0TW CHLD0T6W CHLD1T7W CHLD400TW CHLD400T6W CHLD400T7W CHLDTW CHLDT6W CHLDT7W ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

122 -1 1 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Table -08. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug (Continued) Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). -Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CLDC1TW CLDC1T6W CLDC1T7W CLDC0TW CLDC0T6W CLDC1T7W CLDC400TW CLDC400T6W CLDC400T7W CLDCTW CLDCT6W CLDCT7W ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

123 May Amperes L-Frame -1 Table -09. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 100 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG LSIA -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CLD1T106W CLD1T107W CLD0T106W CLD0T107W CLD400T106W CLD400T107W CLDT106W CLDT107W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CHLD1T106W CHLD1T107W CHLD0T106W CHLD0T107W CHLD400T106W CHLD400T107W CHLDT106W CHLDT107W Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPL1A07 ORPL1A09 ORPL1A10 ORPL1A11 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A0 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

124 -14 1 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Table -09. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug (Continued) Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG LSIA -Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CLDC1T106W CLDC1T107W CLDC0T106W CLDC0T107W CLDC400T106W CLDC400T107W CLDCT106W CLDCT107W Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPL1A070 ORPL1A090 ORPL1A ORPL1A110 ORPL1A1 ORPL0A1 ORPL0A10 ORPL0A17 ORPL0A00 ORPL0A ORPL0A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A ORPL40A0 ORPL40A00 ORPL40A0 ORPL40A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A0 ORPL60A400 ORPL60A00 ORPL60A Discount Symbol CB-

125 May Amperes L-Frame -1 Line and Load Terminals Eaton s Cutler-Hammer line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 6M. Unless otherwise specified, L-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The wire connecting terminal is secured with two pan-head, slotted screws and lockwashers which can be checked for the correct torque loading or retightened from the front of the circuit breaker before installation of the conductors. (Applies to all styles.) The circuit breaker line/load terminal conductors are positioned in the conducting holes in the wire connecting terminal and are secured with recessed socket screws which are tightened to the correct torque loading from the front of the circuit breaker. Ordering Information L-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -10. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Individually packed. Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Metric Wire Terminal Terminals with Range mm Control Wire Termination Poles Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 (1) Pole Kit -Pole Kit 4-Pole Kit 0 00 Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI 4 4/0 () /0 0 () () Pole Kit -Pole Kit 4-Pole Kit TA401LDK TA401LDK 4TA401LDK TA0LD TA60LD TA60LDK TA60LDK 4TA60LDK TA60LDCW TA60LDKCW TA60LDKCW 4TA60LDKCW Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals Copper Cu 0 0 () 10 0 T60LD T60LDCW TA401LD or TA60LD Terminal (Step-Type Terminal Requires Terminal Cover and Warning Label. See Inset.) Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers TA0LD or TA60LD or T60LD Terminal Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers (Installed before Cable Clamping Screws) Terminal Cover Warning Label Retainer Circuit Breaker Line Terminal Cover Screws Figure -9. Terminals Discount Symbol CB-

126 -16 1 Amperes L-Frame May 008 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -11. Accessories Description Reference Page Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Shunt Trip Standard -191 Shunt Trip Low Energy -196 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 0) -07 External Accessories End Cap Kit -08 Control Wire Terminal Kit -09 Base Mounting Hardware -11 Terminal Shields -1 Interphase Barriers -14 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -16 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -17 Key Interlock Kit -18 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Electrical (Motor) Operator -0 Plug-in Adapters - Rear Connecting Studs - Panelboard Connecting Straps -6 Handle Mechanisms -7 Handle Extension - Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit - OPTIM System Components -Poles Ground Fault Alarm Unit - Potential Transformer Module - Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -4 Digitrip OPTIMizer -4 Auxiliary Power Module -4 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment -66 Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both -pole breaker supplied in -pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. OPTIM model 100 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. -Pole, -Pole 4-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

127 May 008 M-Frame Amperes M-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Table -1. UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type MDL, MDLB CMDL HMDL, HMDLB CHMDL of Poles,,,, Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc Utilization category A circuit breakers. -pole or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not dc rated. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds at ka Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description All Cutler-Hammer M-Frame Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are HACR rated. MDL-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers. MDLB, HMDLB-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use. CE marked. Table -1. IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type MDL, MDLB CMDL HMDL, HMDLB CHMDL of Poles,,,, Interrupting Capacity rms (ka Symmetrical Amperes) I CU I CS Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Volts dc /6 6/6 / / 0/0 0/0 70/0 70/0 0/10 0/10 /1 /1 0/10 0/10 Utilization category A circuit breakers. -pole or two poles of -pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not dc rated. Time constant is milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds at 0 ka.

128 Amperes M-Frame May 008 MDL-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -14. Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 10 rms Sensing Breaker Type Frame Ampere Range Interrupting at 480 Volts Protection Adjust by rating plug. With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). Yes MDL, MDLB, CMDL, HMDL, HMDLB, CHMDL A 0, 6 (ka) Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) Long Delay Time I t 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Short Delay Time I t ms No Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No Ground Fault Pickup 1 x I g (160 A) 1 x I g (160 A) Ground Fault Delay I t No No Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Magnitude of Trip Information No No Remote Signal Contacts Ground Alarm Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital Display No No Current No No Power and Energy No No Power Quality Harmonics No No Power Factor No No Communications Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No Testing Testing Method Test Set Legend: I n = Plug

129 May Amperes M-Frame -19 Dimensions/Weights Table -1. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth, 8. (09.6) (406.4) 4.06 (10.1) Table -16. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Type of Poles MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) 6. (1.0) Thermal-magnetic only. 9.0 (1.) 0.0 (1.6) 4. (11.1) 6.0 (11.8) 6.0 (11.8). (1.1).0 (1.4) 4.0 (1.8) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -17. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System MDL 800 F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type MDL, MDLB HMDL, HMDLB of Poles = Poles = Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere Suffix F = Frame Only K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch V = 0 C (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) W = Without Terminals X = Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only Thermal-magnetic only. Table -18. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit ing System MT 800 T Trip Unit Type MT MES of Poles = Poles = Poles Trip Unit / Plug Ampere T V Suffix = Thermal-Magnetic = 0 C (Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Only) LS = Digitrip RMS 10 LSI = Digitrip RMS 10 LSG = Digitrip RMS 10 LSIG = Digitrip RMS 10 Thermal-magnetic only.

130 Amperes M-Frame May 008 Product Selection Table -19. Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page -1 for Optional Terminals Magnetic Trip Range is 10 up through A; 4 8 on 700 and 800 A x Continuous Ampere -Pole Pole MDL00 MDL0 MDL400 MDL0 MDL00 MDL MDL700 MDL800 MDL00 MDL0 MDL400 MDL0 MDL00 MDL MDL700 MDL800 Two terminals are required per pole. MDL800F MDL800F HMDL00 HMDL0 HMDL400 HMDL0 HMDL00 HMDL HMDL700 HMDL800 HMDL00 HMDL0 HMDL400 HMDL0 HMDL00 HMDL HMDL700 HMDL800 HMDL800F HMDL800F MT00T MT0T MT400T MT0T MT00T MTT MT700T MT800T MT00T MT0T MT400T MT0T MT00T MTT MT700T MT800T U.S.$ TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA U.S.$ Table -0. Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Pole Factory sealed for reverse feed application. Two terminals are required per pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals MDLB00 MDLB0 MDLB400 MDLB0 MDLB00 MDLB MDLB700 MDLB800 MDLB00 MDLB0 MDLB400 MDLB0 MDLB00 MDLB MDLB700 MDLB800 High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals HMDLB00 HMDLB0 HMDLB400 HMDLB0 HMDLB00 HMDLB HMDLB700 HMDLB800 HMDLB00 HMDLB0 HMDLB400 HMDLB0 HMDLB00 HMDLB HMDLB700 HMDLB800 Standard Terminals Only See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA700MA1 TA800MA Discount Symbol CB-

131 May Amperes M-Frame -11 Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as Individual Components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Plug, Terminals. Table -1. Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous Ampere Ampere at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Ampere rating is established by rating plug. For ac use only. Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Terminals Unit Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) -Pole 800 MDL800F HMDL800F MES800LS MES800LSI MES800LSG MES800LSIG Fixed Plug 8MES400T 8MES00T 8MEST 8MES700T 8MES800T Adjustable Plugs Ampere 400/00//800 A8MES800T 60/640/660/680 A8MEST 70/740/760/780 A8MES700T See Page -1 for Standard and Optional Terminals Discount Symbol CB-

132 Amperes M-Frame May 008 Table -. Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Continuous LS LSI LSG LSIG Ampere at 40 C -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac 800 MDLB800TW MDLB800TW MDLB800TW MDLB800T6W -Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HMDLB800TW HMDLB800TW HMDLB800TW HMDLB800T6W Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. All % rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating plug and terminals. Table -. % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Unit Only Digitrip RMS 10 Trip Unit Only Terminals Continuous Standard Options Ampere Fixed Adjustable Ampere Plug at 40 C Plug -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 0 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 6 kaic at 480 Vac See Table -4 below for prices. Ampere rating is established by rating plug. For ac use only. Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection 800 CMDL800F CHMDL800F MES800LS MES800LSI MES800LSG MES800LSIG Ampere 8MES400T 8MES00T 8MEST 8MES700T 8MES800T 400/00/ /800 A8MES800T 60/640/ 660/680 A8MEST 70/740/ 760/780 A8MES700T See Page -1 for Standard and Optional Terminals Table -4. % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units s A8MES800T CHMDL800F CMDL800F MES800LS MES800LSG MES800LSI MES800LSIG 8MES400T 8MES00T 8MEST 8MES700T 8MES800T Discount Symbol CB-

133 May Amperes M-Frame -1 Molded Case Switches Eaton s Cutler-Hammer molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Table -. Molded Case Switches Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals -Pole 800 MDL800WK MDLB800WK HMDL800WK -Pole 800 MDL800WK MDLB800WK HMDL800WK MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reversefeed applications. Note: Molded case switch may trip above 0 amperes. Line and Load Terminals M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -6. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Figure -0. TA700MA1 Wire Type Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 800 std. 800 Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors () 1 00 kcmil () /0 400 kcmil () kcmil Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 800 Copper Copper Cu Cu () /0 00 kcmil () /0 00 kcmil Terminal TA700MA1 TA800MA TA801MA TMA1 T800MA1 Figure -. TA801MA Terminals with Control Wire Termination TA700MA1CWT TA800MACWT TA801MACWT Figure -1. TA800MA Discount Symbol CB-

134 Amperes M-Frame May 008 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -7. Accessories Description Reference -Pole -Pole Page Left Right Left Center Right Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Shunt Trip Standard -191 Shunt Trip Low Energy -196 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -11 Terminal Shields -1 Interphase Barriers -14 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -16 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -17 Key Interlock Kit -18 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Electrical (Motor) Operator -0 Plug-in Adapters - Rear Connecting Studs - Panelboard Connecting Straps -6 Handle Mechanisms -7 Handle Extension - Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit - Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment -66 Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both -pole breaker supplied in -pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units.

135 May 008 N-Frame Typical N-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description All Cutler-Hammer N-Frame Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are suitable for reverse feed use. All N-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated Amperes N-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Table -8. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type of Poles ND,, 4 CND,, 4 HND,, 4 CHND,, 4 NDC CNDC NDU Utilization Category A circuit breakers. % rated breakers. 800 amperes maximum rating. Successfully tested at 00 kaic, although UL recognizes maximum of 00 kaic at 40 Vac. Successfully tested at 7 kaic, although UL recognizes maximum of 6 kaic at Vac. Table -9. IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type ND I cu I cs CND I cu I cs HND I cu I cs CHND I cu I cs NDC I cu I cs CNDC I cu I cs,, 4,, 4 of Poles,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4,, 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. % rated breakers. Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz)

136 Amperes N-Frame May 008 N-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -0. Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 10 Digitrip OPTIM 0 Digitrip OPTIM 100 rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame N N N Ampere Range 400 A 100 A 400 A 100 A 400 A 100 A Interrupting at 480 Volts 0, 6, (ka) 0, 6, (ka) 0, 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I t 1 Seconds 1 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No 1 Seconds 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No No x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short Delay Time I t ms No 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % x (I n ) % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 0 % x (I s ) 0 % x (I s ) Ground Fault Delay I t No No 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Remote Signal Contact Ground Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included System Monitoring Digital Display No No Yes Yes Current No No Yes Yes Power and Energy No No No Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No Yes Power Factor No No No Yes Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Adjust by rating plug. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Zone interlock kit. With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU). Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit. OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Legend: BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting

137 May Amperes N-Frame -17 Dimensions/Weights Table -1. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth, 4 8. (09.6) 11.1 (8.6) (406.4) (406.4).0 (19.7).0 (19.7) Table -. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Type Complete Breaker of Poles 4 ND, HND, NDC, NDU 7 (16.8) (0.4) 8 (6.) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding s. It is not to be used to build s for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System ND 1 T W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type ND HND NDC NDU CND CHND CNDC of Poles = Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Ampere 800 = 800 Amperes 1 = 100 Amperes Trip Model T = Model 10 T = Model 0 T7 = Model 70 T10 = Model 100 Trip Type = LSI = LS = LSG 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Suffix E = % R.P. protected (4-Pole) EH = 0% R.P. protected (4-Pole) K = High Magnetic Molded Case Switch W = Without Terminals X = Load Only Terminals Y = Line Only Terminals

138 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Product Selection Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -4. Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard Terminals Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac Ampere Fixed Adjustable Plug Only Standard Options Adjustable Plugs Ampere s See Adjustable Short Independently Adjustable Short Independently Page -1 Time Pickup Adjustable Time Pickup Adjustable Short for Optional with I t Short Short Time with I t Short Time Pickup and Terminals Delay Ramp Pickup and Delay and Delay and Delay Ground Fault Protection Ground Fault Protection -Pole 800 ND800TW ND800TW ND800TW ND800T6W Pole 800 ND800TW or ND4800TEW (% Neutral) See Table - on Page -19 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. ND800TW ND800TW ND800T6W Pole 800 ND4800TW ND4800TW Pole 100 ND1TW ND1TW ND1TW ND1T6W Pole 100 ND1TW ND1TW ND1TW ND1T6W Pole 100 ND41TW ND41TW NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1

139 May Amperes N-Frame -19 Table -. Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit s A1NES100T1 A8NES800T1 ND1TW ND1TW ND1TW ND1T6W ND800TW ND800TW ND800TW ND800T6W ND1TW ND1TW ND1TW ND1T6W ND800TW ND800TW ND800TW ND800T6W ND41TW ND41TW ND4800TW ND4800TW TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T Discount Symbol CB-

140 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -6. Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Ampere Fixed Adjustable Plug Terminals Only Standard Options Adjustable Plugs Ampere s See Page -1 for Optional Terminals Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection -Pole 800 HND800TW HND800TW HND800TW HND800T6W Pole 800 HND800TW HND800TW HND800TW HND800T6W Pole 800 HND4800TW HND4800TW Pole 100 HND1TW HND1TW HND1TW HND1T6W Pole 100 HND1TW HND1TW HND1TW HND1T6W Pole 100 HND41TW HND41TW See Table -7 on Page -141 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1

141 May Amperes N-Frame -141 Table -7. Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit s A1NES100T1 A8NES800T1 HND1TW HND1TW HND1TW HND1T6W HND800TW HND800TW HND800TW HND800T6W HND1TW HND1TW HND1TW HND1T6W HND800TW HND800TW HND800TW HND800T6W HND41TW HND41TW HND4800TW HND4800TW TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T Discount Symbol CB-

142 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -8. Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Terminals Only Ampere -Pole 800 NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800T6W Pole 800 NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800T6W Pole 800 NDC4800TW NDC4800TW Pole 100 NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1T6W Pole 100 NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1T6W Pole 100 NDC41TW NDC41TW See Table -9 on Page -14 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Fixed Plugs Adjustable Plug Standard Options Adjustable Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ampere s 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1

143 May Amperes N-Frame -14 Table -9. Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit s A1NES100T1 A8NES800T1 NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1T6W NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800T6W NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1TW NDC1T6W NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800TW NDC800T6W NDC41TW NDC41TW NDC4800TW NDC4800TW TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T Discount Symbol CB-

144 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Type ND, 100 Amperes 10 ka at 480 Vac Table -40. Type NDU Ultra High Capacity U e Max. Vac, 10 ka I cu at 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C of Poles Short Time Range Short Time Delay Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Plugs L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat Response) Interchangeable Plugs (Order as Individual Component) LS LSI LSG LSIG Fixed Plug 8 x I n 8 x I n I 00 ms 8 x I n A I 00 ms 8 x I n I 00 ms A I 00 ms Ampere Included with Breaker Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere Setting 800 -Pole NDU800TW NDU800TW NDU800TW NDU800T6W Pole NDU4800TW NDU4800TW NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T For ac use only. ND MCCBs are suitable for 40 C or 0 C applications. Order suffix V to eliminate standard 40 C labeling. Order terminals separately. Unprotected left pole neutral. Insert E for % neutral or EH for 60% neutral between W and P (e.g., NDS41TEHP08). Neutral is on LH side. Note: Non-UL listed ND 10 with 10 ampere trip unit is also available NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NES0T 8NEST 8NES60T 8NES700T 8NES800T 400/00//800 A8NES800T1 400/00//800 A8NES800T1

145 May Amperes N-Frame -1 % Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -41. % Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac Ampere Fixed Adjustable Plug Terminals Only Standard Options Adjustable Plugs Ampere s See Page -1 for Optional Terminals Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection -Pole 800 CND800TW CND800TW CND800TW CND800T6W Pole 800 CND800TW CND800TW CND800TW CND800T6W Pole 800 CND4800TW CND4800TW Pole 100 CND1TW CND1TW CND1TW CND1T6W Pole 100 CND1TW CND1TW CND1TW CND1T6W Pole 100 CND41TW CND41TW NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T See Table -4 on Page -146 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Includes conductor extension kit which increase breaker length.7 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1

146 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Table -4. % Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit s A1NES100T1 A8NES800T1 CND1TW CND1TW CND1TW CND1T6W CND800TW CND800TW CND800TW CND800T6W CND1TW CND1TW CND1TW CND1T6W CND800TW CND800TW CND800TW CND800T6W CND41TW CND41TW CND4800TW CND4800TW TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T Discount Symbol CB-

147 May Amperes N-Frame -147 % Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -4. % Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Terminals Only Ampere Fixed Plugs See Table -44 on Page -148 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Includes conductor extension kit which increase breaker length.7 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Adjustable Plug Standard Options Adjustable Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ampere s 800 CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800T6W Pole 800 CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800T6W Pole 800 CHND4800TW CHND4800TW Pole 100 CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1T6W Pole 100 CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1T6W Pole 100 CHND41TW CHND41TW NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1

148 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Table -44. % Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit s A1NES100T1 A8NES800T1 CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1T6W CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800T6W CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1TW CHND1T6W CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800TW CHND800T6W CHND41TW CHND41TW CHND4800TW CHND4800TW TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T Discount Symbol CB-

149 May Amperes N-Frame -149 % Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Plug, Terminals. Table -. % Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Standard Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac Terminals Only Ampere Fixed Plugs See Table -46 on Page -10 for prices. Two terminals are required per pole. Neutral is in right pole. Includes conductor extension kit which increases breaker length.7 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Adjustable Plug Standard Options Adjustable Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ampere s 800 CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800T6W Pole 800 CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800T6W Pole 800 CNDC4800TW CNDC4800TW Pole 100 CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1T6W Pole 100 CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1T6W Pole 100 CNDC41TW CNDC41TW NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 1NES0T 1NES100T Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are: 400, 00,, 800 A8NES800T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 Adjustable Settings are:, 800, 0, 100 A1NES100T1 See Page -1 for Optional Terminals TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1

150 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Table -46. % Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit s A1NES100T1 A8NES800T1 CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1T6W CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800T6W CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1TW CNDC1T6W CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800TW CNDC800T6W CNDC41TW CNDC41TW CNDC4800TW CNDC4800TW TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA700NB1 1NES0T 1NES100T 1NEST 1NES700T 1NES800T 1NES900T 8NES400T 8NES0T 8NES00T 8NEST 8NES700T 8NES800T Discount Symbol CB-

151 May Amperes N-Frame -11 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -47. Digitrip OPTIM 0 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac 800 ND800TW ND800T6W ND800T7W ND1TW ND1T6W ND1T7W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HND800TW HND800T6W HND800T7W HND1TW HND1T6W HND1T7W Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 800 NDC800TW NDC800T6W NDC800T7W NDC1TW NDC1T6W NDC1T7W ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Discount Symbol CB-

152 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Table -48. Digitrip OPTIM 100 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG LSIA -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere 800 ND800T106W ND800T107W ND1T106W ND1T107W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HND800T106W HND800T107W HND1T106W HND1T107W Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 800 NDC800T106W NDC800T107W NDC1T106W NDC1T107W Fixed Plug ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Discount Symbol CB-

153 May Amperes N-Frame -1 % Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Table -49. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 0 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 0 LSI LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above (refer to Page -07 and take list price Adder x 1.). Includes conductor extension kit which increases breaker length.7 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CND800TW CND800T6W CND800T7W CND1TW CND1T6W CND1T7W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CHND800TW CHND800T6W CHND800T7W CHND1TW CHND1T6W CHND1T7W Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 800 CNDC800TW CNDC800T6W CNDC800T7W CNDC1TW CNDC1T6W CNDC1T7W ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Discount Symbol CB-

154 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Table -0. % Rated Digitrip OPTIM 100 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 100 LSIG LSIA -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 0 kaic at 480 Vac Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. Factory sealed. Includes conductor extension kit which increases breaker length.7 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere 800 CND800T106W CND800T107W CND1T106W CND1T107W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CHND800T106W CHND800T107W CHND1T106W CHND1T107W Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 800 CNDC800T106W CNDC800T107W CNDC1T106W CNDC1T107W Fixed Plug ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 ORPN80A400 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A00 ORPN80A0 ORPN80A ORPN80A700 ORPN80A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A700 ORPN1A800 ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Discount Symbol CB-

155 May Amperes N-Frame -1 Type ND Molded Case Switches Table -1. Type ND Molded Case Switches Continuous Ampere at 40 C -Pole Type ND High Instantaneous (K) 800 ND800WK HND800WK Type ND High Instantaneous (K) 100 ND1WK HND1WK Neutral is in right pole. Note: Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. Note: For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton. Line and Load Terminals 4-Pole ND4800WK HND4800WK ND41WK HND41WK Ordering Information N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals Terminal rating is AL9CU. Terminal rating is AL7CU. Terminal Body Material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals Copper Copper Copper Wire Type Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu/AI Cu Cu Cu AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors () 1 00 kcmil () /0 400 kcmil (4) 4/0 00 kcmil () kcmil () /0 00 kcmil () /0 00 kcmil (4) /0 400 kcmil Metric Wire Range mm TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA100NB1 TA101NB1 T700NB1 T0NB1 T100NB Figure -. TA700NB1 Figure -4. TA0NB1 Figure -. TA100NB1 Figure -6. TA101NB1 Figure -7. T700NB1 Figure -8. T0NB1 Discount Symbol CB-

156 Amperes N-Frame May 008 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -. Accessories Description Reference Page Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -18 Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) and Alarm Switch Combination -188 Shunt Trip Standard -191 Shunt Trip Low Energy -196 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 0) -07 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -11 Interphase Barriers -14 Non-Padlockable Handle Block -16 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -17 Key Interlock Kit -18 Sliding Bar Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Walking Beam Interlock Requires Two Breakers -19 Electrical (Motor) Operator -0 Plug-in Adapters - Rear Connecting Studs - Panelboard Connecting Straps -6 Handle Mechanisms -7 Handle Extension - Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit - OPTIM System Components -Poles Ground Fault Alarm Unit - Potential Transformer Module - Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -4 Digitrip OPTIMizer -4 Auxiliary Power Module -4 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment -66 Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole Accessory available/modification available not both OPTIM 0 and 100 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories. -Pole 4-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

157 May 008 R-Frame Typical R-Frame Circuit Breaker Product Description Cutler-Hammer R-Frame Circuit Breakers by Eaton Corporation are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals. All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use Amperes R-Frame Technical Data and Specifications Table -4. UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type RD CRD of Poles, 4, 4 RDC CRDC, 4, 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. % rated breakers. Note: See Page -18 for Trip Unit Specifications. Table -. IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type RD I cu I cs RDC I cu I cs of Poles, 4, 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (0/60 Hz)

158 Amperes R-Frame May 008 R-Frame Digitrip Specifications Table -6. Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 10 Adjust by rating plug. Except 00 ampere frame is 00 %. Varies by frame. LS/LSG only. Not to exceed 100 amperes. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Optional. Add suffix R to. Digitrip RMS 10 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 100 rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame R R R R R R Ampere Range 800 A 00 A 800 A 00 A 800 A 00 A 800 A 00 A 800 A 00 A 800 A 00 A Interrupting at 480 Volts 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) 6, (ka) Protection Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSI(A), LISG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG Fixed Rated Plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable Plug (I n ) Yes Yes No No No No No Long Delay Pickup (I n ) (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long Delay Time I t 1 Seconds 1 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds 4 Seconds Long Delay Time I 4 t No No No No No No 1 Seconds Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes High Load Alarm No No No 0.8 x I r 0.8 x I r 0.8 x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short Delay Pickup % % 00 % 00 % 00 % 00 % % x (I r ) x (I n ) x (I n ) S1&S x (I r ) S1&S x (I r ) S1&S x (I r ) S1&S x (I r ) Short Delay Time I t ms No 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Flat No Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Short Delay Time Zone No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Selective Interlocking Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous Pickup No % 00 % 00 % 00 % 00 % % x (I n ) x (I n ) M1&M x (I n ) M1&M x (I n ) M1&M x (I n ) M1&M x (I n ) Discriminator No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground Fault Alarm No No No No No No % x (I n ) Ground Fault Pickup A A % x (I s ) -% x (I s ) % x (I s ) % x (I s ) % x (I n ) Ground Fault Delay I t No No 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst 00 ms Inst 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms 00 ms Ground Fault Zone No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Selective Interlocking Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Magnitude of Trip Information No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote Signal Contacts Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital Display No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Current No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Voltage No No No No No Yes No Power and Energy No No No No Yes Yes Yes Power Quality Harmonics No No No No No Yes Yes Power Factor No No No No Yes (Over Yes Yes Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Only) Communications Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No No Yes Yes Yes Testing Testing Method Test Set Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Legend: BIM= Breaker Interface Module (A)= GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting x I n

159 May Amperes R-Frame -19 Dimensions/Weights Table -7. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles 4 Width Height Depth 1.0 (9.7) 0.00 (08.0) (406.4) (406.4) 9.7 (47.7) 9.7 (47.7) Table -8. Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg) Breaker Complete Breaker Type of Poles 4 1 Amperes RD, CRD, RDC, CRDC 10 (46.) 1 (61.) 000 Amperes RD, RDC 10 (46.) 1 (61.) CRD, CRDC 10 (9.0) 17 (79.4) 00 Amperes RD, RDC 1 (61.) 18 (8.6) Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Table -9. Circuit Breaker/Frame ing System RD 16 T W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type RD RDC CRD CRDC of Poles = Poles 4 = 4 Poles Circuit Breaker/ Frame Ampere 16 = 1 Amperes 0 = 000 Amperes = 00 Amperes Trip Type T = Digitrip RMS 10 LSI T = Digitrip RMS 10 LS T6 = Digitrip RMS 610 LSG T86 = Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG T96 = Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG T106 = Digitrip OPTIM 100 LSIG T107 = Digitrip OPTIM 100 LSIA Suffix W = Without Terminals P = % Protected Neutral Pole R = Ground Fault Remote (10 Only) K = Molded Case Switch For complete list of available trip types refer to Pages

160 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Product Selection Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -60. Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Ampere 1 RD16TW RD16TW RD16TW RD16T6W RD0TW RD0TW RD0TW RD0T6W RDTW RDTW RDTW RDT6W Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 RD416TW RD416TW RD40TW RD40TW RD4TW RD4TW Fixed Plug 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T RES1T RES1T RES16T RES0T REST 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T RES1T RES1T RES16T RES0T REST See Table -61 on Page -161 for prices. Add R to for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e., RD16TRW. For SCR application use 000 ampere frame. Unprotected right pole neutral. Add P to for % protected right pole neutral, i.e., RD416TPW. Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere s Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 100, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 100, 1, 000 A0RES0T1 Adjustable Settings are: 100, 1, 000, 00 AREST1 Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 100, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 100, 1, 000 A0RES0T1 Adjustable Settings are: 100, 1, 000, 00 AREST1

161 May Amperes R-Frame -161 Table -61. Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s A16RES16T1 A0RES0T1 AREST1 RD16TW RD16TW RD16TW RD16T6W RD0TW RD0TW RD0TW RD0T6W RDTW RDTW RDTW RDT6W RD416TW RD416TW RD40TW RD40TW RD4TW RD4TW 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES19T 0RES0T RES1T RES1T RES16T RES0T REST Discount Symbol CB-

162 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -6. Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG -Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac See Table -6 below for prices. Add R to for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e., RDC16TRW. For SCR application use 000 ampere frame. Unprotected right pole neutral. Add P to for % protected right pole neutral, i.e., RDC416TPW. Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Ampere 1 RDC16TW RDC16TW RDC16TW RDC16T6W RDC0TW RDC0TW RDC0TW RDC0T6W RDCTW RDCTW RDCTW RDCT6W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 RDC416TW RDC416TW RDC40TW RDC40TW RDC4TW RDC4TW Fixed Plug 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T RES1T RES1T RES16T RES0T REST 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T RES1T RES1T RES16T RES0T REST Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere s Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 100, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 100, 1, 000 A0RES0T1 Adjustable Settings are: 100, 1, 000, 00 AREST1 Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 100, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 100, 1, 000 A0RES0T1 Adjustable Settings are: 100, 1, 000, 00 AREST1 Table -6. Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s A16RES16T1 A0RES0T1 AREST1 RDC16TW RDC16TW RDC16TW RDC16T6W RDC0TW RDC0TW RDC0TW RDC0T6W RDCTW RDCTW RDCTW RDCT6W RDC416TW RDC416TW RDC40TW RDC40TW RDC4TW RDC4TW 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T RES1T RES1T RES16T RES0T REST Discount Symbol CB-

163 May Amperes R-Frame -16 % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -64. % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Plug) S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) LS LSI LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac See Table -6 below for prices. Add R to for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e., CRD16TRW. For SCR application use 000 ampere frame. Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip RMS 10 Plug Only Ampere 1 CRD16TW CRD16TW CRD16TW CRD16T6W CRD0TW CRD0TW CRD0TW CRD0T6W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRDC16TW CRDC16TW CRDC16TW CRDC16T6W CRDC0TW CRDC0TW CRDC0TW CRDC0T6W Fixed Plug 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T Adjustable Plug Adjustable Ampere s Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 100, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 100, 1, 000 A0RES0T1 Adjustable Settings are: 800, 0, 100, 1 A16RES16T1 Adjustable Settings are: 0, 100, 1, 000 A0RES0T1 Table -6. % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers s A16RES16T1 A0RES0T1 CRDC16TW CRDC16TW CRDC16TW CRDC16T6W CRDC0TW CRDC0TW CRDC0TW CRDC0T6W CRD16TW CRD16TW CRD16TW CRD16T6W CRD0TW CRD0TW CRD0TW CRD0T6W 16RES08T 16RES10T 16RES1T 16RES1T 16RES14T 16RES1T 16RES16T 0RES10T 0RES1T 0RES1T 0RES14T 0RES16T 0RES0T Discount Symbol CB-

164 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -66. Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 RD16T1W RD16TW RD16TW RD16T4W RD16TW RD16T6W RD0T1W RD0TW RD0TW RD0T4W RD0TW RD0T6W RDT1W RDTW RDTW RDT4W RDTW RDT6W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 RDC16T1W RDC16TW RDC16TW RDC16T4W RDC16TW RDC16T6W RDC0T1W RDC0TW RDC0TW RDC0T4W RDC0TW RDC0T6W RDCT1W RDCTW RDCTW RDCT4W RDCTW RDCT6W See Table -67 below for prices. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Table -67. Digitrip RMS 10 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs s RDC16T1W RDC16TW RDC16TW RDC16T4W RDC16TW RDC16T6W RDC0T1W RDC0TW RDC0TW RDC0T4W RDC0TW RDC0T6W RDCT1W RDCTW RDCTW RDCT4W RDCTW RDCT6W RD16T1W RD16TW RD16TW RD16T4W RD16TW RD16T6W RD0T1W RD0TW RD0TW RD0T4W RD0TW RD0T6W RDT1W RDTW RDTW RDT4W RDTW RDT6W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Discount Symbol CB-

165 May Amperes R-Frame -16 % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -68. % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRD16T1W CRD16TW CRD16TW CRD16T4W CRD16TW CRD16T6W CRD0T1W CRD0TW CRD0TW CRD0T4W CRD0TW CRD0T6W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRDC16TW CRDC16TW CRDC16T4W CRDC16TW CRDC16T6W CRDC0T1W CRDC0TW CRDC0TW CRDC0T4W CRDC0TW CRDC0T6W See Table -69 below for prices. Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Table -69. % Rated Digitrip RMS 10 Circuit Breakers s Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 CRDC16TW CRDC16TW CRDC16T4W CRDC16TW CRDC16T6W CRDC0T1W CRDC0TW CRDC0TW CRDC0T4W CRDC0TW CRDC0T6W CRD16T1W CRD16TW CRD16TW CRD16T4W CRD16TW CRD16T6W CRD0T1W CRD0TW CRD0TW CRD0T4W CRD0TW CRD0T6W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 Discount Symbol CB-

166 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -70. Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac See Table -71 below for prices. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) 1 RD16T61W RD16T6W RD16T6W RD16T64W RD16T6W RD16T66W RD0T61W RD0T6W RD0T6W RD0T64W RD0T6W RD0T6W RDT61W RDT6W RDT6W RDT64W RDT64W RDT66W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 RDC16T61W RDC16T6W RDC16T6W RDC16T64W RDC16T6W RDC16T66W RDC0T61W RDC0T6W RDC0T6W RDC0T64W RDC0T6W RDC0T66W RDCT61W RDCT6W RDCT6W RDCT64W RDCT6W RDCT66W Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Table -71. Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug s RDC16T61W RDC16T6W RDC16T6W RDC16T64W RDC16T6W RDC16T66W RDC0T61W RDC0T6W RDC0T6W RDC0T64W RDC0T6W RDC0T66W RDCT61W RDCT6W RDCT6W RDCT64W RDCT6W RDCT66W RD16T61W RD16T6W RD16T6W RD16T64W RD16T6W RD16T66W RD0T61W RD0T6W RD0T6W RD0T64W RD0T6W RD0T6W RDT61W RDT6W RDT6W RDT64W RDT64W RDT66W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Discount Symbol CB-

167 May Amperes R-Frame -167 % Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -7. % Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I Ampere r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup at 40 C G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRD16T61W CRD16T6W CRD16T6W CRD16T64W CRD16T6W CRD16T66W CRD0T61W CRD0T6W CRD0T6W CRD0T64W CRD0T6W CRD0T66W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRDC16T61W CRDC16T6W CRDC16T6W CRDC16T64W CRDC16T6W CRDC16T66W CRDC0T61W CRDC0T6W CRDC0T6W CRDC0T64W CRDC0T6W CRDC0T66W See Table -7 below for prices. Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Table -7. % Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breaker s Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 CRDC16T61W CRDC16T6W CRDC16T6W CRDC16T64W CRDC16T6W CRDC16T66W CRDC0T61W CRDC0T6W CRDC0T6W CRDC0T64W CRDC0T6W CRDC0T66W CRD16T61W CRD16T6W CRD16T6W CRD16T64W CRD16T6W CRD16T66W CRD0T61W CRD0T6W CRD0T6W CRD0T64W CRD0T6W CRD0T66W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 Discount Symbol CB-

168 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -74. Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 RD16T81W RD16T8W RD16T8W RD16T84W RD16T8W RD16T86W RD0T81W RD0T8W RD0T8W RD0T84W RD0T8W RD0T86W RDT81W RDT8W RDT8W RDT84W RDT8W RDT86W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 RDC16T81W RDC16T8W RDC16T8W RDC16T84W RDC16T8W RDC16T86W RDC0T81W RDC0T8W RDC0T8W RDC0T84W RDC0T8W RDC0T86W RDCT81W RDCT8W RDCT8W RDCT84W RDCT8W RDCT86W See Table -7 below for prices. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Table -7. Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug s RDC16T81W RDC16T8W RDC16T8W RDC16T84W RDC16T8W RDC16T86W RDC0T81W RDC0T8W RDC0T8W RDC0T84W RDC0T8W RDC0T86W RDCT81W RDCT8W RDCT8W RDCT84W RDCT8W RDCT86W RD16T81W RD16T8W RD16T8W RD16T84W RD16T8W RD16T86W RD0T81W RD0T8W RD0T8W RD0T84W RD0T8W RD0T86W RDT81W RDT8W RDT8W RDT84W RDT8W RDT86W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Discount Symbol CB-

169 May Amperes R-Frame -169 % Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -76. % Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I Ampere r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup at 40 C G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRD16T81W CRD16T8W CRD16T8W CRD16T84W CRD16T8W CRD16T86W CRD0T81W CRD0T8W CRD0T8W CRD0T84W CRD0T8W CRD0T86W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRDC16T81W CRDC16T8W CRDC16T8W CRDC16T84W CRDC16T8W CRDC16T86W CRDC0T81W CRDC0T8W CRDC0T8W CRDC0T84W CRDC0T8W CRDC0T86W See Table -77 below for prices. Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Table -77. % Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breaker s Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 CRDC16T81W CRDC16T8W CRDC16T8W CRDC16T84W CRDC16T8W CRDC16T86W CRDC0T81W CRDC0T8W CRDC0T8W CRDC0T84W CRDC0T8W CRDC0T86W CRD16T81W CRD16T8W CRD16T8W CRD16T84W CRD16T8W CRD16T86W CRD0T81W CRD0T8W CRD0T8W CRD0T84W CRD0T8W CRD0T86W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 Discount Symbol CB-

170 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -78. Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 RD16T91W RD16T9W RD16T9W RD16T94W RD16T9W RD16T96W RD0T91W RD0T9W RD0T9W RD0T94W RD0T9W RD0T96W RDT91W RDT9W RDT9W RDT94W RDT9W RDT96W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 RDC16T91W RDC16T9W RDC16T9W RDC16T94W RDC16T9W RDC16T96W RDC0T91W RDC0T9W RDC0T9W RDC0T94W RDC0T9W RDC0T96W RDCT91W RDCT9W RDCT9W RDCT94W RDCT9W RDCT96W See Table -79 below for prices. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Table -79. Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug s RDC16T91W RDC16T9W RDC16T9W RDC16T94W RDC16T9W RDC16T96W RDC0T91W RDC0T9W RDC0T9W RDC0T94W RDC0T9W RDC0T96W RDCT91W RDCT9W RDCT9W RDCT94W RDCT9W RDCT96W RD16T91W RD16T9W RD16T9W RD16T94W RD16T9W RD16T96W RD0T91W RD0T9W RD0T9W RD0T94W RD0T9W RD0T96W RDT91W RDT9W RDT9W RDT94W RDT9W RDT96W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6RA160 RP6RA00 RP6RA0 Discount Symbol CB-

171 May Amperes R-Frame -171 % Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at % of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 7 C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -80. % Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRD16T91W CRD16T9W CRD16T9W CRD16T94W CRD16T9W CRD16T96W CRD0T91W CRD0T9W CRD0T9W CRD0T94W CRD0T9W CRD0T96W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRDC16T91W CRDC16T9W CRDC16T9W CRDC16T94W CRDC16T9W CRDC16T96W CRDC0T91W CRDC0T9W CRDC0T9W CRDC0T94W CRDC0T9W CRDC0T96W See Table -81 below for prices. Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Table -81. % Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breaker s Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 CRDC16T91W CRDC16T9W CRDC16T9W CRDC16T94W CRDC16T9W CRDC16T96W CRDC0T91W CRDC0T9W CRDC0T9W CRDC0T94W CRDC0T9W CRDC0T96W CRD16T91W CRD16T9W CRD16T9W CRD16T94W CRD16T9W CRD16T96W CRD0T91W CRD0T9W CRD0T9W CRD0T94W CRD0T9W CRD0T96W RP6R16A080 RP6R16A RP6R16A10 RP6R16A160 RP6R0A RP6R0A10 RP6R0A160 RP6R0A00 Discount Symbol CB-

172 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -8. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LSIA 100 LSIG 100 Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 RD16T107W RD16T106W RD0T107W RD0T106W RDT107W RDT106W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 RDC16T107W RDC16T106W RDC0T107W RDC0T106W RDCT107W RDCT106W Fixed Plug ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A10 ORPR16A160 ORPR0A ORPR0A10 ORPR0A160 ORPR0A00 ORPRA160 ORPRA00 ORPRA0 ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A10 ORPR16A160 ORPR0A ORPR0A10 ORPR0A160 ORPR0A00 ORPRA160 ORPRA00 ORPRA0 Discount Symbol CB-

173 May Amperes R-Frame -17 % Rated Volts ac Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Plug. Table -8. % Rated Volts ac Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LSIA 100 LSIG 100 -Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated 6 kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRD16T107W CRD16T106W CRD0T107W CRD0T106W Pole High Interrupting Capacity Vac Rated kaic at 480 Vac 1 CRDC16T107W CRDC16T106W CRDC0T107W CRDC0T106W Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Ampere Fixed Plug ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A10 ORPR16A160 ORPR0A ORPR0A10 ORPR0A160 ORPR0A00 ORPR16A080 ORPR16A ORPR16A10 ORPR16A160 ORPR0A ORPR0A10 ORPR0A160 ORPR0A00 Discount Symbol CB-

174 Amperes R-Frame May 008 Molded Case Switches Refer to Eaton for UL listed, series tested Molded Case Switch application data. Table -84. Molded Case Switches Cont. Amp at 40 C Complete without Terminals -Pole 4-Pole Note: Molded case switch may trip above 17,00 amperes. Line and Load Terminals Line and Load Terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA C. No. 6M. Unless otherwise specified, R-Frame circuit breaker line load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. Ordering Information Type RD High Instantaneous (K) 1 RD16WK RD416WK Type RD High Instantaneous (K) 000 RD0WK RD40WK R-Frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI terminals as standard and Cu only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. Table -8. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Terminals Rear Connectors Terminal Body Material Aluminum Copper Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Wire Type Cu/AI Cu Cu/AI Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of -pole breaker. For use with % rated 1 A and 000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when % rated device is ordered. For use with 00 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 00 A breaker is ordered. Breaker Line/Load Conductors English English English English English English 00 0 (4) 1 (4) (6) TA1RD T1RD TA000RD B016RD B016RDL B00RD TA000RD Figure -9. Mounting Hardware Rear Connector (Cu) B016RD B016RDL (For % Appl. (For 1 A & 000 A Frames) B00RD (For 00 A Frame) Figure -40. Mounting Hardware Discount Symbol CB-

175 May Amperes R-Frame -17 Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table -86. Accessories Description Reference Page -Pole 4-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -184 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) -184 Auxiliary Switch (A, B) -187 Auxiliary Switch (4A, 4B) -187 Shunt Trip Standard -191 Shunt Trip Low Energy -196 Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 Accessory Terminal Block -06 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -11 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp -17 Key Interlock Kit -18 Walking Beam Interlock -19 Electrical (Motor) Operator -0 Drawout Cassette -9 Handle Mechanisms -7 Handle Extension - Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit (10 Only) - OPTIM System Components Breaker Interface Module (BIM) -4 Digitrip OPTIMizer -4 Auxiliary Power Module -4 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration Moisture Fungus Treatment -66 Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers Marine Application All accessories mount in the RH cavity Applicable in indicated pole position Accessory available/modification available which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. Mounts outside breaker. Included with breaker.

176 -176 Earth Leakage Circuit Protectors Product Description May 008 Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Typical Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Product Description Eaton s Cutler-Hammer Series C earth leakage breakers offer superior Class 1 ground fault protection and improved ground fault coordination capability. Earth leakage ground fault protection differs from other types of systems in its level of sensitivity. The sensitivity of traditional devices is limited by the cumulative error of the residual current sensors and the placement of the phase and neutral conductors inside the current sensor. Leakage breakers are zero sequence sensing devices. They are factory supplied with a single sensor and ground fault relay built-in. This technique allows for protection sensitivities down to the 0 milliampere level. Leakage breakers are provided with a full complement of easy adjustments. The ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from 0.0 to 0 amperes in eight steps, and the ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to.0 seconds in six steps. When the pickup is set to 0 ma, the time delay setting defaults internally to instantaneous only. Increased selectivity provides for improved coordination with upstream and downstream ground fault devices as well as the flexibility to adjust for transient currents. Application Description Three-Phase, Four-Wire Loads For -phase applications with line-toneutral loads, select 4-pole earth leakage breakers and wire the neutral through the fourth (right) pole. Three-Phase, Three-Wire Loads For applications with only -phase, -wire, line-to-line connected loads, select -pole earth leakage breakers. Single-Phase Loads For single-phase, -wire applications, use a -pole earth leakage breaker and connect all conductors through the breaker. For single-phase load, -wire, wire to L1 L or L L. General Do not reverse feed. Do not apply on 400 Hz systems. Voltage range: Vac. Options and Accessories Optional Factory-Installed Internal Accessories Earth leakage breakers use the same internal accessories as standard F-, J- and K-Frame Series C Breakers. Internal accessories fit in the right-hand pole space and are available as factory modifications only. Bell alarm is included as standard. Optional External Accessories Series C Earth Leakage Breakers use the same external accessories as the standard F-, J- and K-Frame circuit breakers. R.H. only. It comes standard with a flux shunt and ground fault alarm switch in the LH pole. Leads for the alarm switch exit the rear of the breaker.

177 May 008 Earth Leakage Circuit Protectors Product Selection -177 Product Selection Table -87. Standard Line and Load Terminals Included with Breaker Frame Amperes Wire Type F-Frame F-Frame Cu/Al Cu/Al () Range of Conductors (1) 14 1/0 AWG (1) 4 4/0 AWG Terminal Material Steel Stainless Steel J-Frame 0 Cu/Al (1) 4 AWG 0 kcmil Aluminum K-Frame K-Frame Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) 0 00 kcmil () /0 0 kcmil Aluminum Aluminum Table -88. F-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 10 Amperes ka at 480 Vac 6 ka at 480 Vac ka at 480 Vac -Pole 4-Pole -Pole 4-Pole -Pole 4-Pole ELFD01L ELFD00L ELFD0L ELFD00L ELFD0L ELFD040L ELFD0L ELFD00L ELFD060L ELFD070L ELFD080L ELFD090L ELFDL ELFD110L ELFD1L ELFD10L N/A N/A N/A N/A ELFD40L ELFD4040L ELFD40L ELFD400L ELFD4060L ELFD4070L ELFD4080L ELFD4090L ELFD4L ELFD4110L ELFD41L ELFD410L ELHFD01L ELHFD00L ELHFD0L ELFHD00L ELHFD0L ELHFD040L ELHFD0L ELHFD00L ELHFD060L ELHFD070L ELHFD080L ELHFD090L ELHFDL ELHFD110L ELHFD1L ELHFD10L N/A = Not Available Also see EL4FD -pole breaker with 4-pole earth leakage module. N/A N/A N/A N/A ELHFD40L ELHFD4040L ELHFD40L ELHFD400L ELHFD4060L ELHFD4070L ELHFD4080L ELHFD4090L ELHFD4L ELHFD4110L ELHFD41L ELHFD410L ELFDC01L ELFDC00L ELFDC0L ELFDC00L ELFDC0L ELFDC040L ELFDC0L ELFDC00L ELFDC060L ELFDC070L ELFDC080L ELFDC090L ELFDCL ELFDC110L ELFDC1L ELFDC10L N/A N/A N/A N/A ELFDC40L ELFDC4040L ELFDC40L ELFDC400L ELFDC4060L ELFDC4070L ELFDC4080L ELFDC4090L ELFDC4L ELFDC4110L ELFDC41L ELFDC410L Table -89. J-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 10 Amperes ka at 480 Vac 6 ka at 480 Vac ka at 480 Vac -Pole 4-Pole -Pole 4-Pole -Pole 4-Pole ELJD ELJD1 ELJD10 ELJD17 ELJD00 ELJD ELJD0 ELJD4 ELJD41 ELJD410 ELJD417 ELJD400 ELJD4 ELJD40 ELHJD ELHJD1 ELHJD10 ELHJD17 ELHJD00 ELHJD ELHJD0 ELHJD4 ELHJD41 ELHJD410 ELHJD417 ELHJD400 ELHJD4 ELHJD40 ELJDC ELJDC1 ELJDC10 ELJDC17 ELJDC00 ELJDC ELJDC0 ELJDC4 ELJDC41 ELJDC410 ELJDC417 ELJDC400 ELJDC4 ELJDC40 Discount Symbol CB-

178 -178 Earth Leakage Circuit Protectors Product Selection May 008 Table -90. K-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 10 Amperes -Pole 4-Pole ka at 480 Vac ka at 480 Vac ka at 480 Vac ELKD00 ELKD ELKD0 ELKD00 ELKD0 ELKD400 ELHKD00 ELHKD ELHKD0 ELHKD00 ELHKD0 ELHKD400 ELKDC00 ELKDC ELKDC0 ELKDC00 ELKDC0 ELKDC400 Table -91. Optional K-Frame Line and Load Terminals Order Separately Wire Type Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu () Range of Conductors () 0 kcmil (1) 00 kcmil () 0 kcmil (1) 00 kcmil (1) 0 kcmil (1) 0 kcmil (1) 0 00 kcmil (1) 0 00 kcmil (1) /0 0 kcmil (1) /0 0 kcmil Package of terminals. Package of 4 terminals. Terminal Material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper ELKD400 ELKD4 ELKD40 ELKD400 ELKD40 ELKD4400 ELHKD400 ELHKD4 ELHKD40 ELHKD400 ELHKD40 ELHKD4400 ELKDC400 ELKDC4 ELKDC40 ELKDC400 ELKDC40 ELKDC4400 TA401K 4TA401K T00K T00K T0K T0K T400K 4T400K Leakage Ground Fault 480 Volts Continuous Amperes Pole ELHMCP00A0C ELHMCP007C0C ELHMCP01E0C ELHMCP0X0C ELHMCP00H1C ELHMCP00KC ELHMCP070MC ELHMCPRC ELHMCP10T4C ELHMCP10U4C ELHMCP00A0LC ELHMCP007C0LC ELHMCP01E0LC ELHMCP0D0C ELHMCP00H1LC ELHMCP070JC ELHMCPLC ELHMCP00GC ELHMCP070JC ELHMCPKC HMCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays ELHMCPS00A0C ELHMCPS007C0C ELHMCPS01E0C ELHMCPS00H1C ELHMCPS00KC ELHMCPSRC ELHMCPS10T4C ELHMCPS10U4C Special low mag suffix L. Table -9. J and K-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault 480 Volts Continuous Amperes -Pole 0 ELHMCP0A ELHMCP0C ELHMCP0D ELHMCP0F ELHMCP0G ELHMCP0J ELHMCP0K ELHMCP0L ELHMCP0W 400 ELHMCP400D ELHMCP400F ELHMCP400G ELHMCP400J ELHMCP400K Table -9. F-Frame HMCP with Earth Discount Symbol CB-

179 May 008 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Product Description -179 Type GFR GFR Relay Product Description Eaton s Cutler-Hammer GFR ground fault relays, current sensors, test panels and accessory devices are UL listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with their standard for Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment, UL 10, under File E4881. Note: Suitable for either surface or semiflush mounting. A Type GFR ground fault protection system, when properly installed on a grounded electrical system, will sense phase-to-ground fault currents. When the level of fault current is in excess of the pre-selected current pickup and time delay settings, the GFR relay will initiate a trip action of a disconnect device, which will open the faulted circuit and clear the fault. The GFR devices are UL Class I devices designed to protect electrical equipment against extensive damage from arcing ground faults. A basic Type GFR ground fault protection system consists of a ground fault relay, a ground fault current sensor and a disconnect device equipped with a shunt trip device. This disconnect device can be a molded case circuit breaker, a power circuit breaker, a bolted pressure switch or other fusible disconnect device, suitable for application with UL Class I Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying equipment. Note: Relays are also listed with CSA under their file number 47. Sensor Typical Current Sensor volt, 0/60 Hz maximum system voltage. Electrical s GFR Relay Ground fault detection ranges: 1 to 1, to 60 or to 100 amperes Output contacts: 40 volt, 0/60 Hz:.0 amperes 10 volt, 0/60 Hz: 6.0 amperes 8 Vdc:.0 amperes 1 Vdc:. amperes Control power requirements: 10 volt, 0/60 Hz or 1 Vdc (optional)

180 -180 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Accessories May 008 Options and Accessories Options Additional optional equipment can be added to the protection system to meet the requirements of the specifying engineer, including: Ground fault test panel. Ground fault warning indicator relay. Ground fault indicating ammeter. GFR relays are available with zone selective interlocking circuitry to interlock several relays within the same system. This allows the relay which detects a ground fault to instantly clear the fault by tripping the disconnect device. The relay simultaneously sends a signal to relay units upstream from the fault to time delay or to block their operation completely. Current sensors in various designs provide a range of window sizes to accommodate standard bus and cable arrangements. Shunt trip attachments may be ordered for field mounting in Eaton s Cutler- Hammer molded case circuit breakers, or may be ordered factory installed in the breaker. Accessories Test Panel (10 Vac) Used to test the ground fault system, to give an indication the relay has tripped the breaker, and to reset the relay after tripping. These functions may be separately mounted pilot devices. Note: When a mechanically reset relay is used with a test panel, both the relay and test panel must be reset following either a simulated ground fault test or actual ground fault. Not UL listed. Table -94. Optional Test Panel Control Test 10 Volt 0/60 Hz 10 Volt 0/60 Hz 1 Vdc 10 Volt 0/60 Hz GFRTP GFRTPD Ground Fault Warning Indicator This is an accessory item for use with GFR relays with interlocking circuitry. At approximately 0 0% of the relay pickup setting, the indicator switches separate 10 Vac control power to a lamp or relay, (not included) to give an indication of a ground fault. The indicator is rated 110/10 Vac 0/60 Hz for a maximum indicator load of. amperes. Indicating Ammeter The optional indicating ammeter connects to the sensor terminals through a momentary contact pushbutton, and will indicate (in amperes) any ground fault current flowing through the sensor. Kit includes the ammeter and pushbutton. Note: Not UL listed. Table -96. Ammeter Kit GFR System Used with 1 1 Ampere 60 Ampere 100 Ampere Shunt Trip Attachments Use 10 Vac shunt trips. Faceplate Recommended when these relays are semi-flush mounted, to close the door cutout opening. Table -97. Faceplate Description Faceplate Kit 7B80G01 7B80G0 7B80G0 7B410G01 Table -9. Ground Fault Warning Indicator Description Manual Reset Self-Resetting 14C67G01 14C67G0 Discount Symbol CB-

181 May 008 Add-On Ground Fault Protection Product Selection -181 Product Selection Each installation requires: One relay unit (select trip ampere as required). One current sensor (select configuration required). Table -98. GFR Relay GFR Relay Types For 10 Volt 0/60 Hz Control Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking For 10 Vdc Control Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting. One circuit breaker or disconnect device with shunt trip, or a shunt trip attachment for mounting in existing breaker. Test panel (optional). Ground Fault Pickup Amperes GFR1EI GFR1E GFR1MI GFR1M GFR60EI GFR60E GFR60MI GFR60M GFR100EI GFR100E GFR100MI GFR100M GFR100EID GFR100ED GFR100MID GFR100MD Table -99. Current Sensor Window Size in Inches (mm) Used with Relays Rated 1 1 Amperes.0 (19.7) I.D. 18CG01 Used with Relays Rated 60 Amperes.0 (6.) I.D. 179C768G01.0 (19.7) I.D. 16C1G x (198.4 x 79.4) Rect. 17C88G04.1 x 4.94 (84.1 x 760.) Rect. 17C9G0 Used with Relays Rated 100 Amperes.0 (6.) I.D. 179C768G0.0 (19.7) I.D. 16C1G0 8. (09.6). I.D. 179C767G x (198.4 x 79.4) Rect. 17C88G x (. x 40.) Rect. 17C90G x.94 (. x 608.1) Rect. 17C91G x (404.9 x 06.4) Rect. 17C89G0.1 x 4.94 (84.1 x 6.) Rect. 17C9G x 9.64 (171. x 7.9) Rect. 1C9G0 One end removable for installation. Discount Symbol CB-

182 -18 Internal Accessories Alarm Switch May 008 Alarm Switch For remote indication of Make automatic trip operation. Does not function with Break manual switching; however, it will operate when either a shunt trip or undervoltage release is operated. A make contact closes and a break contact opens when the alarm/lockout switch operates. The switch automatically resets when the circuit breaker is reset. Table -00. F-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage Frequency Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers 1 0 0/60 Hz dc dc Single-Pole Circuit Breakers 1/0 8 8 Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus 4,000 mechanical operations. Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus,000 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Inductive (L/R = 0.06). Table -01. J-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Table -0. K-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 0/60 Hz dc dc Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc 6 Maximum Current Amperes Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Table -0. L- and M-Frames Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Table -04. N-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Non-inductive load. Table -0. R-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus,00 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are red, black and blue. Non-inductive load. Table -06. G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) Electrical s Contact Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Factory Suffix Adder Alarm Switch 40 0/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break B 188C7G0 Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination 40 0/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B B1 188C76G09 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Includes 4-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a -pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of - or -pole breaker. Discount Symbol CB-

183 May 008 Internal Accessories Alarm Switch -18 Table -07. F-Frame Alarm Switch of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) 1 Left Right Left Right 1 (Make Only) F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard pigtail lead exit location. Standard mounting location. Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker. Table -08. F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch of Contacts (Make and Break) Single- Pole Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix B01 B0 B09 B1 Adder Suffix B0 B06 B10 B1 Adder Suffix B0 B07 Adder Suffix B04 B08 B11 B14 Adder A1L1LPK A1L1RPK AL1LPK AL1RPK B1 A1L1LTK A1L1RTK AL1LTK AL1RTK Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right B01 B0 B09 B1 B0 B06 B10 B1 B0 B07 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard pigtail lead exit location. Standard mounting location. B04 B08 B11 B14 MA1L1LPK MA1L1RPK MAL1LPK MAL1RPK MA1L1LTK MA1L1RTK MAL1LTK MAL1RTK Table -09. J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right B01 B0 B0 B06 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E6498. Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Standard pigtail lead exit location. B0 B07 B04 B08 A1LLPK A1LRPK A1LLTK A1LRTK Discount Symbol CB-

184 -184 Internal Accessories Alarm Switch May 008 Table -10. K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Terminal Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Leads Block Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right B01 B0 B09 B1 B0 B06 B10 B1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E6498. Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 0 can only accept accessories in left pole. B0 B07 B04 B08 B11 B14 A1LLPK A1LRPK ALLPK ALRPK A1LLTK A1LRTK ALLTK ALRTK Table -11. L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch of Sets of Contacts (1M and 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Terminal Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Leads Block Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right B01 B0 B09 B1 B0 B06 B10 B1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E6498. Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Table -1. N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch of Sets of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) B0 B07 B04 B08 B11 B14 A1L4LPK A1L4RPK AL4LPK AL4RPK A1L4LTK A1L4RTK AL4LTK AL4RTK Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Terminal Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Leads Block Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right B01 B0 B09 B1 B0 B06 B10 B1 B0 B07 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. B04 B08 B11 B14 A1LLPK A1LRPK ALLPK ALRPK A1LLTK A1LRTK ALLTK ALRTK Table -1. R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH only) of Factory Mounted Contacts Connection Type and Location (Make and Break) 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Suffix Adder Field Mounted Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads 1 B0 A1L6RPK B1 AL6RPK Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Discount Symbol CB-

185 May 008 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch -18 Auxiliary Switch The Auxiliary Switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position a of the molded cross bar which contains the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for b remote indication and interlock system verification, and consists of one or two SPDT switches housed in a plug-in module. Each SPDT switch has one a and one b contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the a contact is open and the b contact is closed. Table -14. F-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus 4,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). For use in electronic circuit of micro amperes and 1 Vdc minimum. Non-inductive load. Table -1. J-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Frequency 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz dc dc Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Maximum Current Amperes Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus 4,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Table -16. K-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Table -17. L- and M-Frames Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Table -18. N-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Table -19. R-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus,00 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are red, black and blue. Non-inductive load. Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Maximum Current Amperes Maximum Current Amperes Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Dielectric Withstand Voltage 00 Maximum Current Amperes Table -0. G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH only) Electrical s Volts Frequency Amperes Contact Arrangement Factory Suffix Adder /60 Hz 0/60 Hz 6 6 1a/1b a/b Includes 4-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a -pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of - or -pole breaker. A A6 188C74G0 188C7G0 Discount Symbol CB-

186 -186 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch May 008 Table -1. F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right or Neutral Left Right or Neutral A01 A1 A0 A18 A09 A1 A1 A Standard pigtail lead exit location. Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit. 1 volts (Max.), 0/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of micro amperes and 1 Vdc minimum. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. A0 A16 A06 A19 A10 A A1 A4 A0 A17 A07 A0 A04 A08 A11 A14 A1X1PK E1X1PK A1X1PK AX1LPK EX1LPK AX1RPK EX1RPK A1X1LTK A1X1RTK AX1LTK AX1RTK Table -. F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Right A0 A1 A A1X1RPKFDE Only for use on -pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Table -. J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch of Sets of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right A01 A0 A09 A1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. A0 A06 A10 A1 A0 A07 A04 A08 A11 A14 A1XPK A1XPK AXPK AXPK A1XLTK A1XRTK AXLTK AXRTK Table -4. K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch of Sets of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right Left Right A01 A0 A09 A1 A18 A17 A0 A06 A10 A1 A0 A07 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 0 can only accept accessories in left pole. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. A04 A08 A11 A14 A1 A16 A1XPK A1XPK AXPK AXPK AXLPK AXRPK A1XLTK A1XRTK AXLTK AXRTK AXLTK AXRTK Discount Symbol CB-

187 May 008 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch -187 Table -. L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch of Sets of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right Left Right A01 A0 A09 A1 A18 A17 A0 A06 A10 A1 A0 A07 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. A04 A08 A11 A14 A1 A16 A1X4PK A1X4PK AX4PK AX4PK AX4PK AX4PK A1X4LTK A1X4RTK AX4LTK AX4RTK AX4LTK AX4RTK Table -6. N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch of Sets of Contacts A and B Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right Left Right Left Right A01 A0 A09 A1 A18 A17 A0 A06 A10 A1 A0 A07 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. A04 A08 A11 A14 A1 A16 A1XPK A1XPK AXPK AXPK AXLPK AXRPK A1XLTK A1XRTK AXLTK AXRTK AXLTK AXRTK Table -7. R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH only) of Contacts Factory Mounted A and B Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Suffix Adder Field Mounted Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads U.S. A1 AX6RPK 4 A19 A4X6RPK Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of a/b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Discount Symbol CB-

188 -188 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination May 008 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Each listed in Tables -6 a -6 includes one Auxiliary Switch and one Alarm Switch. In an auxiliary switch ASL switch b combination, the auxiliary switch is always mounted on the side of the plug-in module next to the center pole of the circuit breaker. Table -8. F-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Table -1. L- and M-Frames Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus 4,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Table -9. J-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 0/60 Hz dc dc Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Table -. N-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage 1 0 Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. Frequency 0/60 Hz dc dc Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. 0/60 Hz dc dc Table -0. K-Frame Electrical Data Maximum Voltage Frequency Maximum Current Amperes Dielectric Withstand Voltage 1 0 Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Non-inductive load. 0/60 Hz dc dc

189 May 008 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination -189 Table -. F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Left Right C01 C04 C0 C0 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation. Standard mounting location. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers C0 C06 AAL1LPK AAL1RPK AAL1LTK AAL1RTK Table -4. F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Mounting Factory Mounted Field Mounted Location Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits (Pole) 18-Inch (7 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Left Right C01 C04 C0 C0 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation. Standard mounting location. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers C0 C06 MAAL1LPK MAAL1RPK MAAL1LTK MAAL1RPK Table -. J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right C01 C04 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. C0 C0 C0 C06 AALLPK AALRPK AALLTK AALRTK Table -6. K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts (1A and 1B) (1M 1B) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1 Left Right C01 C04 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 0 can only accept accessories in left pole. Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH). C0 C0 C0 C06 AALLPK AALRPK AALLTK AALRTK Discount Symbol CB-

190 -190 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination May 008 Table -7. L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break A, B and 1 Make/1 Break A, B and 1 Make/1 Break Left Right Left Right Left Right C01 C04 C07 C10 C14 C1 C0 C0 C08 C11 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. C0 C06 C1 C1 AA114LPK AA114RPK AA14LPK AA14RPK AA14LPK AA14RPK AA114LTK AA114RTK AA14LTK AA14RTK Table -8. N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination of Sets of Contacts Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break A, B and 1 Make/1 Break Left Right Left Right C01 C04 C07 C10 C0 C0 C08 C11 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. C0 C06 C1 C1 AA11LPK AA11RPK AA1LPK AA1RPK AA11LTK AA11RTK AA1LTK AA1RTK Discount Symbol CB-

191 May 008 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip -191 Shunt Trip The Shunt Trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip ST consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain ac rated shunt trips, as noted in the Electrical Table, are suitable for operation at percent of rated voltage. Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific ac or dc voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Table -9. F-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Table -41. K-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus 4,000 mechanical operations. Table -40. J-Frame Electrical Data Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus,000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits /60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds. Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. Table -4. L- and M-Frame Electrical Data Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits /60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA

192 -19 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip May 008 Table -4. N-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits Table -44. R-Frame Electrical Data Suffix Application s Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Electrical Operating s Supply Voltage (V) Minimum Operating Voltage (V) I p (A) I rms at 0.0s (A) I rms at 0.0s (A) VA One Minute Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 0/0K 4 0/ dc /0K / /11K / /14K / dc /18K 480 0/ /K dc /6K dc Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 6 milliseconds, at rated voltage. Endurance: 00 electrical operations and,00 mechanical operations. Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute. Maximum operating voltage 110% of maximum voltage range rating. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are yellow and white

193 May 008 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip -19 Table -. G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH -Pole only) Electrical s Volts Frequency Amperes Suffix Adder /60 Hz 0/60 Hz dc dc 60 Hz S1 S S S4 S7 17D6G01 17D6G0 17D6G1 17D6G16 17D6G0 Note: G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Note: Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Note: Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Table -46. F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip Voltage Factory Mounted Field Mounted (ac Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Left-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc S Vac or Vdc S Vac or Vdc S09 41 Vac or 0 0 Vdc S1 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc Vac or Vdc Vac or Vdc 41 Vac or 0 0 Vdc S17 S1 S S9 Suffix S0 S06 S10 S14 S18 S S6 S0 Adder Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Standard pigtail lead exit location. 10 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices. Standard mounting location. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers Suffix S0 S07 S11 S1 S19 S S7 S1 Adder Suffix S04 S08 S1 S16 S0 S4 S8 S Adder SNT1LP0K SNT1LP08K SNT1LP1K SNT1LP18K SNT1RP0K SNT1RP08K SNT1RP1K SNT1RP18K SNT1LT0K SNT1LT08K SNT1LT1K SNT1LT18K SNT1RT0K SNT1RT08K SNT1RT1K SNT1RT18K Discount Symbol CB-

194 -194 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip May 008 Table -47. J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Voltage Factory Mounted Field Mounted (ac Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Left-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc S41 S4 S4 S44 SNTP04K SNTT04K Vac or dc S49 S0 S1 S SNTP06K SNTT06K Vac or Vdc S09 S10 S11 S1 SNTP11K SNTT11K Vac or 0 0 Vdc S1 S14 S1 S16 SNTP14K SNTT14K 480 Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNTP18K SNTT18K Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc Vac or dc Vac or Vdc Vac or 0 0 Vdc 480 Vac S S S9 S S7 S46 S4 S0 S4 S8 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers. S47 S S1 S S9 S48 S6 S S6 S40 SNTP04K SNTP06K SNTP11K SNTP14K SNTP18K SNTT04K SNTT06K SNTT11K SNTT14K SNTT18K Table -48. K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip Voltage (ac Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc S Vac or dc S Vac or Vdc S Vac or 0 0 Vdc S1 480 Vac S17 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc Vac or dc Vac or Vdc Vac or 0 0 Vdc 480 Vac S S S9 S S7 Adder Suffix S4 S0 S10 S14 S18 S46 S4 S0 S4 S8 Adder Suffix S4 S1 S11 S1 S19 S47 S S1 S S9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 0 can only accept accessories in left pole. Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker. Adder Suffix S44 S S1 S16 S0 S48 S6 S S6 S40 Adder SNTP04K SNTP06K SNTP11K SNTP14K SNTP18K SNTP04K SNTP06K SNTP11K SNTP14K SNTP18K SNTT04K SNTT06K SNTT11K SNTT14K SNTT18K SNTT04K SNTT06K SNTT11K SNTT14K SNTT18K Discount Symbol CB-

195 May 008 Internal Accessories Shunt Trip -19 Table -49. L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip Voltage (ac Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc Vdc Vdc Vac Vdc Vac or 0 0 Vdc 480 Vac Right-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 1 4 Vac or dc Vdc Vdc Vac Vdc Vac or 0 0 Vdc 480 Vac Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side S01 S0 S8 S09 S41 S1 S17 S1 S S88 S9 S S S7 Adder Suffix S0 S06 S86 S10 S4 S14 S18 S S6 S89 S0 S46 S4 S8 Adder Suffix S0 S07 S87 S11 S4 S1 S19 S S7 S90 S1 S47 S S9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) -pole trip units only. Adder Suffix S04 S08 S1 S44 S16 S0 S4 S8 S S48 S6 S40 Adder SNT4LP0K SNT4LP0K SNT4LPK SNT4LP11K SNT4LP6K SNT4LP14K SNT4LP18K SNT4RP0K SNT4RP0K SNT4RPK SNT4RP11K SNT4RP6K SNT4RP14K SNT4RP18K SNT4LT0K SNT4LT0K SNT4LTK SNT4LT11K SNT4LT6K SNT4LT14K SNT4LT18K SNT4RT0K SNT4RT0K SNT4RTK SNT4RT11K SNT4RT6K SNT4RT14K SNT4RT18K Table -0. N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Voltage Factory Mounted Field Mounted (ac Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac/dc s 9 4 Vac or dc Vac Vac Vdc Vac or 0 0 Vdc 480 Vac Vdc S01 S0 S09 S41 S1 S17 S1 Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. S0 S06 S10 S4 S14 S18 S S0 S07 S11 S4 S1 S19 S S04 S08 S1 S44 S16 S0 S4 Adder SNTLP0K SNTLP0K SNTLP11K SNTLP6K SNTLP14K SNTLP18K SNTLPK SNTLT0K SNTLT0K SNTLT11K SNTLT6K SNTLT14K SNTLT18K SNTLTK Table -1. R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only) Voltage Factory Mounted Field Mounted (ac Frequency = 0/60 Hz) Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads 4 Vac or dc Vac Vac Vac or 0 0 Vdc 480 Vac Vdc Vdc Suffix S1 S S9 S S7 S88 S Adder SNT6P0K SNT6P0K SNT6P11K SNT6P14K SNT6P18K SNT6PK SNT6P6K Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Discount Symbol CB-

196 -196 Internal Accessories Low Energy Shunt Trip May 008 Low Energy Shunt Trip Low Energy Shunt Trip devices are designed to UV operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism. When a microfarad capacitor charged to 8 Vdc is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the permanent magnet flux field, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the shunt trip reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Ordering Information Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific ac or dc voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Table -. F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip Mounting Positions (Pole) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For F-Frame HMCP, add an M to beginning of catalog number. For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only. Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 0 can only accept accessories in left pole. Adder Suffix Adder F-Frame Left Right NO1 NO NO NO6 NO NO7 NO4 NO8 LST1LPK LST1RPK LST1LTK LST1RTK J-Frame Left Right NO1 NO NO NO6 NO NO7 LSTLPK LSTRPK K-Frame Left Right NO1 NO NO NO6 NO NO7 LSTLPK LSTRPK L- and M-Frames Left Right NO1 NO NO NO6 NO NO7 LST4LPK LST4RPK N-Frame Left NO1 NO NO LSTLPK R-Frame Right NO1 LST6RPK Discount Symbol CB-

197 May 008 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -197 Undervoltage Release Mechanism The Undervoltage Release Mechanism monitors a UV voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and percent of the solenoid coil rating. The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever mounted in a plug-in module. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (or OFF) position. With less than pickup voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted. Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. Ordering Information Select handle reset undervoltage release mechanism catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Undervoltage release mechanism coils are designed to be applied at specific ac or dc voltages within the voltage range shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Table -. F-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus 4,000 mechanical operations. Table -4. J-Frame Electrical Data Endurance: 6,000 electrical operations plus,000 mechanical operations. For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum /60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage VA Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum VA

198 -198 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism May 008 Table -. K-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations Table -6. L- and M-Frames Electrical Data 0/60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations Table -7. N-Frame Electrical Data 0/60 Hz dc Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage VA Supply Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Endurance:,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations

199 May 008 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -199 Table -8. R-Frame ac Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) s Suffix Application s Voltage (V) Electrical Operating s Supply Voltage (V) Dropout Voltage (V) Minimum Maximum Pickup Voltage (V) Max. Approximate Operating Time (ms) VA Minimum UVR Response Initiation Circuit Breaker Contact Separation Maximum Circuit Breaker Contact Opening Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 0/0K /0K /0K /08K /11K /9K Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 00 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are orange and brown. UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. For 1 minute Table -9. R-Frame dc Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) s Suffix Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 00 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are orange and brown. UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. For 1 minute. Application s Voltage (V) Electrical Operating s Approximate Operating Time (ms) Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup VA Minimum Initiation Maximum Circuit Voltage Minimum Maximum Voltage UVR Circuit Breaker Breaker (V) (V) Max. Response Contact Separation Contact Opening 0/0K /1K /K /6K /8K Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) Table -60. G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH -Pole Only) Electrical s Volts (ac Only) Frequency Amperes 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz 0/60 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz Style s 17D6G0 17D6G04 17D6G0 17D6G06 17D6G07 17D6G08 17D6G09 17D6G10 17D6G11 17D6G1 17D6G1 17D6G14 Factory Suffix T1 T T T4 T T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T1 Adder Includes 4-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a -pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in left pole only of -pole breaker. Note: G-frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Note: Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Note: Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Discount Symbol CB-

200 -00 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism May 008 Table -61. F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Connection Type and Location (ac Freq. = 0/60 Hz) 18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac U01 U0 U0 U04 4 Vac U0 U06 U07 U08 48 Vac U7 U8 U9 U40 60 Vac U97 U98 U99 U Vac U1 U14 U1 U Vac U17 U18 U19 U Vac U1 U U U4 Vac U U6 U7 U8 Right-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac 48 Vac 60 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Left-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc 48 Vdc 60 Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc Right-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc 48 Vdc 60 Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc U49 U U8 U101 U61 U6 U69 U7 U9 U U7 U97 U41 U U77 U81 U8 U101 U89 U9 U0 U4 U86 U10 U6 U66 U70 U74 U0 U4 U8 U98 U4 U46 U78 U8 U86 U10 U90 U94 Standard pigtail lead exit location. Standard mounting location. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. Note: F-frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories, requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Note: Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Note: Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. U1 U U87 U10 U6 U67 U71 U7 U1 U U9 U99 U4 U47 U79 U8 U87 U10 U91 U9 U U6 U88 U104 U64 U68 U7 U76 U U6 U40 U U44 U48 U80 U84 U88 U104 U9 U96 Adder Discount Symbol CB-

201 May 008 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -01 Table -6. F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker HMCP (ac Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Left-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac UVH1LP0K UVH1LT0K MUVH1LP0K MUVH1LT0K 4 Vac UVH1LP0K UVH1LT0K MUVH1LP0K MUVH1LT0K 48 Vac UVH1LPK UVH1LTK MUVH1LPK MUVH1LTK 60 Vac UVH1LP4K UVH1LT4K MUVH1LP4K MUVH1LT4K Vac UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K Vac UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K Vac UVH1LP1K UVH1LT1K MUVH1LP1K MUVH1LT1K Vac UVH1LP18K UVH1LT18K MUVH1LP18K MUVH1LT18K Right-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac 48 Vac 60 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Left-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc 48 Vdc 60 Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc Right-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc 48 Vdc 60 Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc UVH1RP0K UVH1RP0K UVH1RPK UVH1RP4K UVH1RP08K UVH1RP11K UVH1RP1K UVH1RP18K UVH1LP0K UVH1LP1K UVH1LPK UVH1LP4K UVH1LP6K UVH1LP8K UVH1RP0K UVH1RP1K UVH1RPK UVH1RPK UVH1RP6K UVH1RP8K Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard mounting location. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. UVH1RT0K UVH1RT0K UVH1RTK UVH1RT4K UVH1RT08K UVH1RT11K UVH1RT1K UVH1RT18K UVH1LT0K UVH1LT1K UVH1LTK UVH1LT4K UVH1LT6K UVH1LT8K UVH1RT0K UVH1RT1K UVH1RTK UVH1RTK UVH1RT6K UVH1RT8K MUVH1RP0K MUVH1RP0K MUVH1RPK MUVH1RP4K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RP11K MUVH1RP1K MUVH1RP18K MUVH1LP0K MUVH1LP1K MUVH1LPK MUVH1LP4K MUVH1LP6K MUVH1LP8K MUVH1RP0K MUVH1RP1K MUVH1RPK MUVH1RPK MUVH1RP6K MUVH1RP8K MUVH1RT0K MUVH1RT0K MUVH1RTK MUVH1RT4K MUVH1RT08K MUVH1RT11K MUVH1RT1K MUVH1RT18K MUVH1LT0K MUVH1LT1K MUVH1LTK MUVH1LT4K MUVH1LT6K MUVH1LT8K MUVH1RT0K MUVH1RT1K MUVH1RTK MUVH1RTK MUVH1RT6K MUVH1RT8K Discount Symbol CB-

202 -0 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism May 008 Table -6. J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage (ac Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac U0 U09 U1 U17 U1 U Right-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac U7 U41 U U49 U U7 Left-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc T01 T0 T09 T1 T17 Right-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc T1 T T9 T T7 Adder Suffix U06 U10 U14 U18 U U6 U8 U4 U46 U0 U4 U8 T0 T06 T10 T14 T18 T T6 T0 T4 T8 Adder Suffix Adder Suffix Adder For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breakers. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. U07 U11 U1 U19 U U7 U9 U4 U47 U1 U U9 T0 T07 T11 T1 T19 T T7 T1 T T9 U08 U1 U16 U0 U4 U8 U40 U44 U48 U U6 U60 T04 T08 T1 T16 T0 T4 T8 T T6 T40 UVHLP0K UVHLP0K UVHLP0K UVHLP08K UVHLP11K UVHLP1K UVHRP0K UVHRP0K UVHRP0K UVHRP08K UVHRP11K UVHRP1K UVHLP0K UVHLP1K UVHLPK UVHLP6K UVHLP8K UVHRP0K UVHRP1K UVHRPK UVHRP6K UVHRP8K UVHLT0K UVHLT0K UVHLT0K UVHLT08K UVHLT11K UVHLT1K UVHRT0K UVHRT0K UVHRT0K UVHRT08K UVHRT11K UVHRT1K UVHLT0K UVHLT1K UVHLTK UVHLT6K UVHLT8K UVHRT0K UVHRT1K UVHRTK UVHRT6K UVHRT8K Discount Symbol CB-

203 May 008 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -0 Table -64. K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage (ac Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 0 can only accept accessories in left pole. Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac U0 U09 U1 U17 U1 U Adder Right-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac U7 U41 U U49 U U7 Left-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc T01 T0 T09 T1 T17 Right-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc T1 T T9 T T7 Suffix U06 U10 U14 U18 U U6 U8 U4 U46 U0 U4 U8 T0 T06 T10 T14 T18 T T6 T0 T4 T8 Adder Suffix U07 U11 U1 U19 U U7 U9 U4 U47 U1 U U9 T0 T07 T11 T1 T19 T T7 T1 T T9 Adder Suffix U08 U1 U16 U0 U4 U8 U40 U44 U48 U U6 U60 T04 T08 T1 T16 T0 T4 T8 T T6 T40 Adder UVHLP0K UVHLP0K UVHLP0K UVHLP08K UVHLP11K UVHLP1K UVHRP0K UVHRP0K UVHRP0K UVHRP08K UVHRP11K UVHRP1K UVHLP0K UVHLP1K UVHLPK UVHLP6K UVHLP8K UVHRP0K UVHRP1K UVHRPK UVHRP6K UVHRP8K UVHLT0K UVHLT0K UVHLT0K UVHLT08K UVHLT11K UVHLT1K UVHRT0K UVHRT0K UVHRT0K UVHRT08K UVHRT11K UVHRT1K UVHLT0K UVHLT1K UVHLTK UVHLT6K UVHLT8K UVHRT0K UVHRT1K UVHRTK UVHRT6K UVHRT8K Discount Symbol CB-

204 -04 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism May 008 Table -6. L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage (ac Freq. = 0/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker. Field Mounted Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac U0 U09 U1 U17 U1 U Adder Right-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac U7 U41 U U49 U U7 Left-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc T01 T0 T09 T1 T17 Right-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc T1 T T9 T T7 Suffix U06 U10 U14 U18 U U6 U8 U4 U46 U0 U4 U8 T0 T06 T10 T14 T18 T T6 T0 T4 T8 Adder Suffix U07 U11 U1 U19 U U7 U9 U4 U47 U1 U U9 T0 T07 T11 T1 T19 T T7 T1 T T9 Adder Suffix U08 U1 U16 U0 U4 U8 U40 U44 U48 U U6 U60 T04 T08 T1 T16 T0 T4 T8 T T6 T40 Adder UVH4LP0K UVH4LP0K UVH4LP0K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP11K UVH4LP1K UVH4RP0K UVH4RP0K UVH4RP0K UVH4RP08K UVH4RP11K UVH4RP1K UVH4LP0K UVH4LP1K UVH4LPK UVH4LP6K UVH4LP8K UVH4RP0K UVH4RP1K UVH4RPK UVH4RP6K UVH4RP8K UVH4LT0K UVH4LT0K UVH4LT0K UVH4LT08K UVH4LT11K UVH4LT1K UVH4RT0K UVH4RT0K UVH4RT0K UVH4RT08K UVH4RT11K UVH4RT1K UVH4LT0K UVH4LT1K UVH4LTK UVH4LT6K UVH4LT8K UVH4RT0K UVH4RT1K UVH4RTK UVH4RT6K UVH4RT8K Table -66. N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Voltage Factory Mounted Field Mounted (ac Freq. = Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 0/60 Hz) 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Suffix Left-Pole Mounting ac s 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac U0 U09 U1 U17 U1 U Left-Pole Mounting dc s 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc T01 T0 T09 T1 T17 Adder Suffix U06 U10 U14 U18 U U6 T0 T06 T10 T14 T18 Adder Suffix U07 U11 U1 U19 U U7 T0 T07 T11 T1 T19 Adder Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E6498. Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Suffix U08 U1 U16 U0 U4 U8 T04 T08 T1 T16 T0 Adder UVHLP0K UVHLP0K UVHLP0K UVHLP08K UVHLP11K UVHLP9K UVHLP0K UVHLP1K UVHLPK UVHLP6K UVHLP8K UVHLT0K UVHLT0K UVHLT0K UVHLT08K UVHLT11K UVHLT9K UVHLT0K UVHLT1K UVHLTK UVHLT6K UVHLT8K Discount Symbol CB-

205 May 008 Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism -0 Table -67. R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only) Voltage (ac Frequency = 0/60 Hz) 1 Vac 4 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac 1 Vdc 4 Vdc Vdc Vdc 0 0 Vdc Factory Mounted Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Leads Suffix U7 U41 U U49 U U7 T1 T T9 T T7 Adder Endurance: 00 electrical operations plus 00 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are orange and brown. Field Mounted Field Installation Kits Pigtail Leads UVH6RP0K UVH6RP0K UVH6RP0K UVH6RP08K UVH6RP11K UVH6RP9K UVH6RP0K UVH6RP1K UVH6RPK UVH6RP6K UVH6RP8K Discount Symbol CB-

206 -06 Internal Accessories Accessory Terminal Block May 008 Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) (For Fixed Mounted Configuration) Table -68. of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory Type of Accessory Auxiliary Switch Alarm (Signal)/ Lockout Switch of Contacts per Single Accessory a/b 4a/4b 1m/1b m/b Shunt Trip N/A Low Energy Shunt N/A Undervoltage Release Mechanism N/A Required of Wires Table -69. R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block Factory Installed Suffix Adder Field Mounted Accessory Terminal Block Internal accessory wiring leads are normally supplied with pigtail leads (18 AWG) that exit from the right side of the circuit breaker. Where specified, fixed mounted Accessory Terminal Blocks are available. A maximum of one 4-point terminal block can be installed on the right side of the circuit breaker for the internal accessories. For convenience in determining the appropriate number of terminal block points required, refer to Table -68. Q01 TBRDK One 4-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram (IL 9C714). Discount Symbol CB-

207 May 008 Internal Accessories PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits -07 Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 0 only) K-, L- and N-Frames Table -70. PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits Circuit Breaker PowerNet Factory Install Suffix Zone Interlocking/ Ground Factory Install Suffix PowerNet & Zone Interlocking/Ground Factory Install Suffix K-Frame L-Frame N-Frame PN PN PN ICK0K ICK0L ICK0N ZG ZG ZG ZGK0K ZGK0L ZGK0N ZGP ZGP ZGP ZGPK0K ZGPK0L ZGPK0N Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole. Includes a ground fault alarm signal which can drive the Ground Fault Alarm unit ( GFAU). Figure -41. PowerNet Communication Kit Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit can be ordered to add PowerNet communications to an existing OPTIM 0 breaker in the field. An 18-inch (7. mm) wiring pigtail is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for PowerNet and two wires for 4 Vdc ( ma load). It is recommended that the power supply be an isolated high quality unit. Discount Symbol CB-

208 -08 External Accessories Termination Hardware May 008 Termination Hardware End Cap Kit Figure -4. End Cap Kit The End Cap Kit slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The end cap kit is available with English and metric thread sizes. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. Table -71. End Cap Kit Thread Type Thread Size -Pole F-Frame ( A) Imperial Metric 10- M- -Pole F-Frame ( A) Imperial Metric 10- M- 4-Pole F-Frame ( A) Imperial Metric -Pole J-Frame Imperial Metric 4-Pole J-Frame Imperial Metric -Pole K-Frame Imperial Metric 4-Pole K-Frame Imperial Metric -Pole L-Frame Imperial Metric 4-Pole L-Frame Imperial Metric 10- M M M M M M M-8 KPEK1 KPEKM1 KPEK1 KPEKM1 KPEK14 KPEKM14 KPEK KPEKM KPEK4 KPEKM4 KPEK KPEKM KPEK4 KPEKM4 KPEK4 KPEKM4 KPEK44 KPEKM44 Keeper Nut The Keeper Nut slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The keeper nut is available with English and metric thread sizes. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. Table -7. F-Frame Keeper Nut Thread Type Imperial Metric Figure -4. F-Frame Keeper Nut Table -7. K-Frame Keeper Thread Type Thread Size 10- M- Thread Size Package of 1 (d Individually) KPR1A KPR1AM Line/ Load End Package of Imperial.7-16 Line Load Metric M-8 Line Load KPRA KPRB KPRAM KPRBM Figure -44. K-Frame Keeper Nut L-, M-, N-Frames Not required. Terminals are threaded. Discount Symbol CB-

209 May 008 External Accessories Termination Hardware -09 Plug Nut Control Wire Terminal Kit Table -76. G-Frame Control Wire Terminal Description Control Wire Terminal (Kit of 1) 6B8G01 GCWTK Figure -. J-Frame Plug Nut The Plug Nut is used in applications where screw-connected ring-type terminals are preferred to connect cables to circuit breaker conductors. The plug nut is press-fit into the opening in the circuit breaker terminal conductor. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. Table -74. J-Frame Plug Nut Thread Type Imperial Metric Thread Size.0-0 M-6 Terminal Adapter Package of 6 PLN PLNM Table -7. K-Frame Terminal Adapter Line/Load End Line & Load TAD K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers. The Control Wire Terminal Kit provides a means to tap off control power from a main disconnect, using the provided male end of a quick disconnect. For use with steel or stainless steel terminals only. Note: Terminal Kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. F-Frame Ordering Information Package of 1 control wire terminal tangs. Terminals must be ordered separately. d individually. Table -77. F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Maximum Amperes 10 FCWTK FCWTK Figure -47. F-Frame Kit Not for use with T0KB terminals. J- and K-Frame Ordering Information Package of 1 control wire terminal tangs. Terminals must be ordered separately. d individually. Table -78. J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit Ordering Information KCWTK Figure -48. J- and K-Frame Kit Table -79. L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit AWG Wire Range/ Conductors Metric Wire Range mm Figure -46. K-Frame Terminal Adapter Al/Cu TA60LDCW () 0 0 kcmil Cu T60LDCW () /0 0 kcmil Al/Cu TA60LDKCW -Pole Kit () kcmil Al/Cu TA60LDKCW -Pole Kit () kcmil Al/Cu TA60LDKCW 4-Pole Kit () kcmil Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Discount Symbol CB-

210 -10 External Accessories Multiwire Connectors May 008 Multiwire Connectors Eaton s Cutler-Hammer field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals, are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed for copper only as used on the load side (OFF) end. Table -80. Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of ) Maximum Amperes G-Frame F-Frame J-Frame 0 0 K-Frame Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu /0 14 Kit TAGK TAG6K TA10FK TA10F6K TA0JK TA0J6K TA400KK TA400K6K GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL. Special terminals are required as well. Figure -49. Multiwire Connectors Discount Symbol CB-

211 May 008 External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware -11 Base Mounting Hardware Ordering Information Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required. Table -81. Mounting Hardware Screw Length in Inches (mm) G-Frame.18- x.6 (. x 66.7 mm) Std..18- x.00 (. x 76. mm) 64B7G 870C80G0 Table -8. Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware Description of Poles F-Frame x.188-inch Pan-Head Steel Screws, Lockwashers, and Clamps Type of Mounting Individual Group.164- x 1.-inch Pan-Head Individual Steel Screws and Lockwashers, x 1.-inch Pan-Head Individual Steel Screws and Lockwashers J-Frame,, x.7 inch Pan-Head Individual Steel Screws and Lockwashers K-Frame,, x 1. inch Pan-Head Individual Steel Screws and Lockwashers L-Frame,, x 1. inch Filister-Head Individual Steel Screws and Lockwashers and Flat Washers M-Frame,.1-18 x 1. inch Filister-Head Individual Steel Screws and Lockwashers and Flat Washers N-Frame,, x 1. inch Pan-Head Individual Steel Screws and Lockwashers R-Frame Supplied by customer One set of hardware for two circuit breakers. 64B7G01 64B7G0 418B80G01 BMH1 BMH BMH BMH4 BMH BMH Table -8. Metric Thread Mounting Hardware Description of Poles F-Frame 1 M4 0.7 x 80 mm Pan-Head Steel Screws, Lockwashers, and Clamps M4 0.7 x 8 mm Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers, 4 M4 0.7 x 8 mm Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers J-Frame,, 4 M6 0.7 x 70 mm Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers K-Frame,, 4 M6 0.7 x 8 mm Pan-Head Steel Screws and Lockwashers L-Frame Type of Mounting Individual Group (one set of hardware for two circuit breakers) Individual Individual Individual Individual 418B80G09 418B80G10 418B80G11 BMH1M BMHM BMHM, Individual BMH4M M-Frame, Individual BMHM N-Frame, Individual BMHM R-Frame Supplied by customer Discount Symbol CB-

212 -1 External Accessories Drawout Cassette May 008 Drawout Cassette R-Frame with Moveable Mechanism Product Description The Drawout Cassette is currently for use with the standard -pole 6 ka/ 480 Vac, 1 and 000 ampere RD circuit breakers only. It consists of two separate components: the movable mechanism which is factory mounted to the circuit breaker frame and the stationary mechanism which is housed in the cassette and shipped separately. The drawout mechanism has four positions. Connected: The breaker is fully connected to the primary stabs and secondary contacts. Test: The breaker is not connected to the primary stab but is connected to the secondary contacts. Disconnected: Both the primary stabs and the secondary contacts are disconnected. Withdraw: The breaker can be removed from the cassette. Product Selection Table -84. RD Drawout Cassette Description 6 ka/480 Vac Version Movable RD0DOM Mechanism Stationary Mechanism ka/480 Vac Version Movable Mechanism Stationary Mechanism RD0DOS RD0DOSS RDC0DOM RDC0DOS (without shutters) RDC0DOSS (with shutters) List price included in price of the stationary mechanism. Without shutters. With shutters. Movable mechanism must be ordered with RD or RDC circuit breaker and is shipped mounted to circuit breaker frame. Stationary mechanism is ordered separately. All internal accessories must be factory installed for use with drawout. Discount Symbol CB-

213 May 008 External Accessories Terminal Shields and End Covers -1 Terminal Shields Terminal Shields provide protection against accidental contact with live line side terminations. Terminal shields are fabricated from high dielectric insulating material and fasten over the front terminal access openings. Small openings in the shields provide limited access to the terminals for tightening connectors. (Field installation only.) Table -8. G-Frame Terminal Shield Units in Package 10 GTSK F-Frame Table -86. F-Frame Terminal Shield of Poles Location Standard (Package of 10) (d Individually) Special For use when electrical operator is mounted on circuit breaker 1 4 Line 6B9G06 6B9G07 6B9G08 6B9G09 410B9G01 410B9G0 J-Frame Table -87. J-Frame Terminal Shield of Poles Location (Package of 10) L-Frame Table -89. L-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) 14C40G0, 4, 4 Line End Load End 166C07G01 661C01G C16G C16G0 K-Frame Table -88. K-Frame Terminal Shield of Poles Location (Package of 10) M-Frame Table -90. M-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) 08B966G01 Table -91. N-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1), 4 Line Line Load TSLN TS4LN TSLD NTSK Discount Symbol CB-

214 -14 External Accessories Terminal Shields and End Covers May 008 Terminal End Covers Ordering Information The terminal end cover is available for -pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. Table -9. F-Frame Terminal End Covers Conductor Opening Diameter in Inches (mm) 0. (6. mm) 0.41 (10.41 mm) TEC1 TEC F-Frame Product Description The Terminal End Covers are designed for use in motor control center applications where, because of confined spaces, line side conductors are normally custom fitted. The molded end covers are made of high dielectric glass-polyester and slide over the line ends of the circuit breaker. Close fitting conductor openings are molded into the end covers. The end cover and circuit breaker case fit together to form terminal compartments that isolate discharged ionizing gases during circuit breaker tripping. Terminal end covers are available with two conductor opening diameters, 0.-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41-inch (10.4 mm), and are listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. The barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Two per package. Interphase Barrier Table -9. Interphase Barriers Frame F J, K L M N IPB1 IPB IPB4 IPB4 IPB Discount Symbol CB-

215 May 008 External Accessories Base Mounting Adapters -1 Base Mounting Plate DIN Rail Adapter Key Operated Attachment Table -96. Key Operated Attachment G-Frame GD/GHC Units in Package 10 GK0A Base Mounting Plate Suitable for mounting (6) single-pole circuit breakers. Table -94. Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC Units in Package 1 07B1G01 DIN Rail Adapter For use with standard mm DIN Rail such as, x 7. or x 1 mm per DIN EN00. Adapter mounting screws included are for use with - and -pole circuit breakers. Adapters for 1-pole circuit breakers (pictured above) clip into the base molding. Table -9. DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC Poles 1, -Pole -Pole Units in Package C79G01 1C79G0 For use on -pole breakers only. Figure -0. Key Operated Attachment Discount Symbol CB-

216 -16 External Accessories Handle Locking and Blocking Devices May 008 Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Padlockable Handle Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Padlockable Handle Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Table -97. Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP Units in Package 1 194C01H01 Non-Padlockable Handle Block Table -99. Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB Units in Package C77G0 1C77G0 1C77G06 Accepts.8 Lock Shank. Padlockable in the OFF position only. Padlockable Handle Lock Product Description The Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock allows the handle to be locked in the OFF or ON position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) This device was designed for use on the 1-pole circuit breaker, but may be used on 1-, -, - and 4-pole styles. The handle lock snaps onto the escutcheon area of the handle with an optional retaining screw for added secureness. The handle lock will accommodate one padlock with a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Table Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Frame Non-Padlockable Handle Block Padlockable Handle Lock F PHL1 Product Description The Non-Padlockable Handle Block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle block holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one /16-inch (8 mm) padlock. Table Padlockable Handle Lock Frame G J, K GPHBOFF PHB Table -98. Non-Padlockable Handle Block Frame F J, K L, M, N LKD1 LKD LKD4 Discount Symbol CB-

217 May 008 External Accessories Handle Locking and Blocking Devices -17 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Product Description The Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles, one per circuit breaker. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Table -40. Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Description F-Frame 1-Pole Breakers PHL1 -, -, 4-Pole Breakers PLK1 For Left Side Mounting PLK1LOFF For Right Side PLK1ROFF Mounting J, K-Frames -, -, 4-Pole Breakers PLK For Left Side Mounting PLKLOFF For Right Side PLKROFF Mounting L-Frame (Side Mounted) Side Mounted Lock ON or OFF HLK4 Lock OFF Only HLK4LOFF (Left-Hand Mount) L-Frame (Top Mounted) Lock ON or OFF HLK4S Lock OFF Only HLK4SOFF M-Frame Lock ON or OFF HLK4 Lock OFF Only HLK4LOFF (Left-Hand Mount) M-Frame (Vertical Mounting) Lock ON/OFF HLK4S Lock OFF Only HLK4SOFF N-Frame Side Mounted PLK Top Mounted (ON/OFF) PLKS Top Mounted PLKSOFF (OFF Only) R-Frame Lock ON/OFF HLK6 Lock OFF Only HLK6OFF For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF position only order either catalog number. Cylinder Lock Cylinder Lock Product Description The Cylinder Lock internally blocks the trip bar in the tripped position to prevent the circuit breaker from being switched to ON. The cylinder lock is factory installed in the left pole only of the circuit breaker cover. Other internally mounted accessories cannot be installed in the same pole as the cylinder lock. (Factory installation only.) Table -40. Cylinder Lock Frame F, J, K Order by Description Discount Symbol CB-

218 -18 External Accessories Mechanical Interlocking Devices May 008 Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included) Key Interlock Kit Product Description The Key Interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specific customer installation. The key interlock assembly is Underwriters Laboratories listed for field installation under UL File E7819 and consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position, key interlock mounting screws, and a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. Ordering Information Key interlock mounting kits are for field installation only. Select mounting kit catalog numbers to match type of lock used. Key interlocks are supplied by customer. Table Key Interlock Kit Lock Manufacturer Lock Type Bolt Projection in Withdrawn Position in Inches (mm) Kit F-Frame Superior B (9.) KYK1 Kirk Square D F SF.8 (9.) None Castell K or QK.8 (9.) CTK1 J, K-Frames Superior B (9.) KYK Kirk Square D F SF.8 (9.) None Castell K or QK.8 (9.) CTK L-, M-, N-Frames Superior Kirk Square D B F SF.8 (9.).8 (9.) None KYK4 Castell K or QK.8 (9.) CTK4 R-Frame Superior B (.4) KYK6 Kirk Square D F SF 1.0 (.4) 1.0 (.4) Castell K or QK 1.0 (.4) CTK6 JG-Frame Superior Kirk Square D B F SF.8 (9.).8 (9.) None KYKJG Castell K or QK.8 (9.) CTKJG LG-Frame Superior B (9.) KYKLG Kirk F.8 (9.) Square D SF None Castell K or QK.8 (9.) CTKLG When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be 10 mm in diameter. Discount Symbol CB-

219 May 008 External Accessories Mechanical Interlocking Devices -19 Sliding Bar Interlock Ordering Information The sliding bar interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent -pole circuit breakers with circuit breakers centerline spacing as indicated in table and enclosure front panel thickness of 1/8 or /16 inch (. or 4.8 mm). (For field installation only.) Table -40. Sliding Bar Interlock Frame F J K L, M N Centerline Spacing in Inches (mm) 4.19 (106.4) 4.8 (111.).7 (146.0) 8.0 (1.9) 8.0 (1.9) SBK1 SBK SBK SBK4 SBK Sliding Bar Interlock Product Description The Sliding Bar Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent -pole circuit breakers. It is installed on the enclosure cover between the circuit breakers. When the sliding bar interlock handle is moved from one side to the other, a bar extends to alternately block movement of the circuit breaker handles and prevents both circuit breakers from being switched to ON at the same time. Sliding bar interlocks are not UL listed. (Field installation only.) Walking Beam Interlock Walking Beam Interlock Product Description The Walking Beam Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent circuit breakers of the same pole configuration. The walking beam interlock mounts on a bracket behind and between the circuit breakers. A plunger on each end of the beam is inserted through an access hole in the back plate and base of each circuit breaker. The walking beam interlock prevents both circuit breakers from being switched ON at the same time. If a walking beam interlock is installed, the wiring troughs in the back of the circuit breaker case are blocked by the plungers and cannot be used for cross wiring. Factory modified circuit breakers are required for this application. UL File E816. Ordering Information The walking beam interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) apart and having the same pole configuration. The two circuit breakers must be factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock assembly (suitable for use with either -, - or 4-pole circuit breakers). With properly modified circuit breakers, the walking beam interlock is suitable for field installation. Order circuit breakers specifying modification for walking beam (0% price adder) and select walking beam interlock from table below. Circuit breakers and walking beam interlock are boxed and shipped separately. Table Walking Beam Interlock Frame F K L, M N R -pole only. WBL1 WBL WBL4A WBL WBL6 Discount Symbol CB-

220 -0 External Accessories Electrical Operator May 008 Electrical Operator Table F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Data Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Amperes Maximum Operating Time Fuse Amperes EO Electrical Operator Product Description The Electrical (Solenoid) Operator is a single solenoid mechanism that enables local and remote circuit breaker ON, OFF, and reset switching. The electrical operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline of the circuit breaker. The electrical operator uses a unique bi-stable latch that allows the device to operate using one solenoid. The accessory provides high-speed switching with a maximum operating time of cycles (80 ms), making it suitable for generator synchronizing applications. Means are provided for remote electrical operation and for local manual operation. A special slide includes provisions for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. The slide will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each. An interlock electrically disconnects the solenoid when the electrical operator cover is removed. The Data Tables provide electrical rating data for the electrical (solenoid) operator. The Electrical (Motor) Operator allows the circuit s breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely. It also has a lock-off capability and provisions for manual operation. The Electrical (Motor) Operator contains a reversible motor connected to a ball screw. The ball screw drives the circuit breaker handle. Limit switches and relays are used to control the motor /60 Hz ac 10 UL listed under UL File E6498. The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8,000 electrical operations. Tolerance: +10%, 1% of nominal voltage. Use current-limiting type fuse where required. Table F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Table F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Amperes UL listed under UL File E6414. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 8,000 electrical operations. Maximum operating time: seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. Tolerance: +10%, -1% of nominal voltage. Table F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator UL listed under UL File E6498. The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. Maximum operating time: cycles (80 ms). Tolerance: +10%, -1% of nominal voltage. Table -41. J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator cycles (80 ms) Voltage Frequency Terminal Block 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Lead ac EOP1T07 EOP1T11 10 ac dc Voltage Frequency 18-Inch (7. mm) Pigtail Lead 10 0/60 Hz ac MOP1P dc MOP1P0DC MOP1P0DC MOP1P07DC EOP1P07 EOP1P11 Table J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Data Voltage Inrush Current Fuse Amperes Amperes Operating Voltage Frequency 0 16 Terminal Block 0/60 Hz ac EOPT07 EOPT Discount Symbol CB-

221 May 008 External Accessories Electrical Operator -1 Table -41. K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Data Operating Voltage Inrush Current Amperes UL listed under UL File E6498. The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. Maximum operating time: cycles (80 ms). Tolerance: +10%, -1% of nominal voltage. Table K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Operating Voltage Frequency Fuse Amperes Table L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data UL listed under UL File E6498. The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. Maximum operating time: 1 cycles. Tolerance: +10%, 1% of nominal voltage. Table L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 10 and OPTIM) 6 4 Terminal Block 0/60 Hz ac EOPMT07 EOPMT11 Table -41. K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit Frame K Operating Voltage 10 ac dc 4 Operating Voltage Frequency BBMK Inrush Current Amperes Terminal Block 0/60 Hz EOP4MT07 EOP4MT11 EOP4MT11A EOP4MT1 dc EOP4MT6 EOP4MT1 Table N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data Operating Frequency Inrush Current Voltage Amperes UL listed under UL File E6498. Frequency: 0/60 Hz. The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for,00 electrical operations. Maximum operating time: 1 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. Tolerance: +10%, 1% of nominal voltage. Table N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Operating Voltage /60 Hz dc Note: For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required. Table -40. R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Data Operating Frequency Motor Inrush Current Voltage Amperes Frequency Pigtail Leads Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute. Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON 1/ second max. (b) To turn breaker OFF 1/ second max. Motor operating temperature; Class A temperature limits apply. A minimum 1 kva power source is recommended for motor operation. Applied voltage should be no less than 8% or no more than 110% of rated voltage. Table -41. R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Operating Voltage 0/60 Hz EOPT07 EOPT09 EOPT11 EOPT1 dc 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz Frequency EOPT1 EOPT EOPT dc 8 Fuse Amperes 6 4 Factory-Installed Terminal Block /60 Hz 0/60 Hz dc EOP6T08K EOP6T11K EOP6T1K EOP6T19K Discount Symbol CB-

222 - External Accessories Plug-in Adapters May 008 Plug-in Adapters Table -4. F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) -Pole -Pole 4-Pole 1480D1G D1G0 1480D1G07 Mounting Plate 176C11H01 07C047H01 ampere maximum. Table -4. J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) Terminal End -Pole -Pole 4-Pole Plug-in Adapter Product Description Plug-in Adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Individual line and load plug-in adapters are available for rear connection applications on -, - and 4-pole circuit breakers. Common mounting plates for line- and load-end adapters are available. One Plug-in Adapter Kit is required for line-end and one for load-end. Plug-in Adapters are UL approved unless otherwise noted. 0 Line Load 1 Line and 1 Load 160C86G0 160C86G07 06C144G7 Mounting Plate PMP Use -pole mounting plate for -pole circuit breaker. Table -44. K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Vac Maximum Continuous Current (Amperes) 400 PAD PAD Mounting Plate PMP Use -pole mounting plate for -pole circuit breaker. Table -4. L-Frame Ordering Information (Threaded Stud Type) Continuous Current (Amperes) Table -46. M-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Vac Maximum Table -47. N-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) 160C86G06 160C86G08 06C144G8 -Pole -Pole 4-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole 11C67G01 11C67G0 (Threaded Stud Type) 06C09G0 06C09G04 PAD44 (Flat Bar Type) 188C19G01 188C19G0 666CH01 Mounting Plate 04C84H01 04C84H01 Continuous Current (Amperes) -Pole -Pole DG0 614DG06 Mounting Plate 190C7H01 190C7H01 Continuous Current (Amperes) -Pole -Pole DG0 614DG04 Mounting Plate 190C7H01 190C7H01 Table -48. Plug-in Adapters Frame Poles Standard Certification FD IEC PADF FD 4 IEC PAD4F JD IEC PADJD KD IEC PADK LD IEC PADLD LD 4 IEC PAD4LD Discount Symbol CB-

223 May 008 Rear Connecting Studs External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs Product Description Rear Connecting Studs are available in several sizes to accommodate specific fixed-mounted circuit breaker applications. Each rear connecting stud assembly consists of one stud and one tube. To maintain proper clearances between poles, select alternate long and short stud assemblies for circuit breakers with more than one pole. One assembly is required for line-end and one for load-end of each pole. Tubes must be ordered separately. Connecting studs are available only with English thread sizes. Note: Not UL listed. - Mounting Panel B E Breaker Mounting Surface F Thread.7 (19.1).06 (1.) A C D Figure -1. F-Frame Table -49. F-Frame Ordering Information Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stud Ampere Not UL listed. Stud For 1 to Ampere Circuit Breakers A Short A Short A Short A Short A Long A Long A Long A Long 1D874G01 1D874G01 1D874G01 1D874G01 1D874G0 1D874G0 1D874G0 1D874G0 For 110 to Amperes Circuit Breakers A Short A Short A Short A Short A Long A Long A Long A Long 74D88G01 74D88G01 74D88G01 74D88G01 74D88G0 74D88G0 74D88G0 74D88G0 Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube Dimensions A B C D E F 1.00 (.4) (17. to.8).8.6 (9. to 1.9)..1 (6.4 to 7.9) 1.00 (.4) (17. to.8).8.6 (9. to 1.9)..1 (6.4 to 7.9) 1.00 (.4) (17. to.8).8.6 (9. to 1.9)..1 (6.4 to 7.9) 1.00 (.4) (17. to.8).8.6 (9. to 1.9)..1 (6.4 to 7.9) 1.06 (6.9) 1.8 (4.9) 1.69 (4.9).00 (0.8) 1.06 (6.9) 1.8 (4.9) 1.69 (4.9).00 (0.8).44 (87.).7 (9.) 4.06 (10.1) 4.8 (111.).44 (87.).7 (9.) 4.06 (10.1) 4.8 (111.) B9446H0 B9446H1 B9446H B9446H B9446H4 B9446H B9446H6 B9446H7 74D88H06 74D88H07 74D88H08 74D88H09 74D88H10 74D88H11 74D88H1 74D88H1 6.1 (1.6) 7.0 (190.).6 (9.1).1 (7.9) (108.0).44 (11.1) 14 Discount Symbol CB-

224 -4 External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs May 008 Table -40. J-Frame Ordering Information Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stud Ampere Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube A B C 0 A Short 0 A Short 0 A Short 0 A Long 0 A Long 0 A Long Not UL listed. 010DG01 010DG01 010DG01 010DG0 010DG0 010DG (19.1.4).0.7 ( )..0 ( ) (19.1.4).0.7 ( )..0 ( ).84 (1.4) 1.09 (7.7) 1.0 (6.).88 (98.6) 4.1 (104.9) 4.8 (111.) 6D98H0 6D98H06 6D98H07 010DH0 010DH06 010DH (40.4).9 (1.0).06 (1.) A.0 (.7) 6.66 (169.) C.1 (7.9) 18 Thread Do Not Use More Than 10 Ft. Lbs. Torque to Tighten Nuts.0 (1.7) 1 Thread Breaker Mounting Panel B 6.6 (9.) ) Figure -. J-Frame Table -41. K-Frame Ordering Information Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stud Ampere Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Standard Tube Dimensions A B C D E F 400 A Short 400 A Short 400 A Short 400 A Long 400 A Long 400 A Long Not UL listed. 664C14G0 664C14G04 664C14G06 664C14G0 664C14G0 664C14G (19.1.4).0.7 ( ).. (6. 1.7).7 1 (19.1.4).0.7 ( ).. (6. 1.7).84 (1.) 1.09 (7.69) 1.0 (6.16).78 (96.0) 4.0 (10.4) 4.8 (108.7) 1C909H17 1C909H18 1C909H19 1C909H0 1C909H1 1C909H 6.8 (167.1).66 (9.0).7 16 ( ) Mounting Panel B E Breaker Mounting Surface F Thread.06 (1.) A C (4.4) 4 D Figure -. K-Frame Discount Symbol CB-

225 May 008 External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs - Table -4. L-Frame Ordering Information Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stud Length (A).47 (18.9) 7.97 (0.4) (6.9).44 (11.) Circuit Breaker Insulating Panel Figure -4. L-Frame Stud 14C960G07 14C960G08 14C960G09 A Insulators Washer Nut Rear Connecting Stud Table -4. M-Frame Ordering Information Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stud Ampere Not UL listed. Table -44. N-Frame Ordering Information Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stud Ampere Not UL listed. Diameter and Thread.0 (1.7) 1.7 (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) (.4) (.4) (.4) (8.7) (8.7) (8.7) 1 Diameter and Thread 1.1 (8.7) (8.7) (8.7) 1 1. (1.8) 1 1. (1.8) 1 Extension Back of Breaker.66 (9.0).91 (10.1) 8.41 (1.6) (77.0).91 (10.1) 8.41 (1.6) (77.0).91 (10.1) 8.41 (1.6) (77.0) Extension Back of Breaker. (19.7) 8.0 (0.) 10. (66.7). (19.7) 10. (66.7) Stud 14C960G01 14C960G04 14C960G0 14C960G06 14C960G07 14C960G08 14C960G09 14C960G10 14C960G11 14C960G1 Stud 6BG01 6BG0 6BG0 7B7G04 7B7G0 Discount Symbol CB-

226 -6 External Accessories Panelboard Connecting Straps May 008 Panelboard Connecting Straps Table -49. K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current (Amperes) Pole Connector Type Center Outside.0 (88.9) B78G0 41B77G01 Table K-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles Product Description Panelboard Connecting Straps Panelboard Connecting Straps are used to connect the circuit breaker terminals to the panelboard bus. The panelboard connecting straps are available with various ratings for outside and center poles. (Field installation only.) Panelboard connecting straps are available to meet the needs of most standard panelboard applications. Style numbers for mounting brackets for CDP panelboard installations are also included. Note: Not UL listed. Refer to panelboard manufacturer for compatibility. Table -4. F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm).7 (69.9).7 (69.9).7 (69.9).0 (88.9).0 (88.9).0 (88.9) Continuous Current (Amperes) Pole Connector Type Center 67B14G0 67B14G0 67B14G04 1C7G01 1C7G0 1C7G01 Table -46. F-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles Outside Table -47. J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current (Amperes) Pole Connector Type Center 67B14G09 67B14G10 67B14G0 1C7G0 1C7G06 1C7G0 64BH0 64BH01 Outside.0 (88.9) 0 D6G01 D6G0, 08B64H01 Table L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Continuous Current (Amperes) Pole Connector Type Center Table -44. L-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles Table -44. M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Table M-Frame Mounting Bracket Outside 64B609G01 06C0G01, 08B97H01 Bus Spacing in Inches (mm).0 (88.9) 1C70H01 Table -4. N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm).0 (88.9) Table N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four [4] Required) 1C70H01 Continuous Current (Amperes) Connector Type 800 Short Medium Long Continuous Current (Amperes) Connector Type 100 Short Medium Long Pole Connector Type 14C996G01 14C996G0 14C996G0 Pole Connector Type 0C606G04 0C606G0 0C606G06 Table -48. J-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles, Discount Symbol CB-

227 May 008 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms -7 Handle Mechanisms Overview Handle Mechanisms are used to operate molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and motor circuit protectors. They are available in three basic configurations Flange Mounted, Through-the-Door and Direct (Close-Coupled) providing safe, dependable operation and ease of installation. Flange Mounted: Flex Shaft C71 Through-the-Door: Series C Rotary Universal Rotary Direct (Close-Coupled): Universal Direct Euro IEC G Direct Handle mechanisms are typically used on enclosed circuit breakers, control panels and motor control centers in many different applications. Eaton has a handle mechanism for virtually any need. Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms Product Description Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms mount on the flange of an enclosure door. The Flex Shaft is an extra heavy-duty mechanism that includes a flexible shaft in various lengths, feet (.9 m) through 10 feet ( m) for use with various size enclosures. The Flex Shaft Handle will accept up to three padlock shackles, each with a maximum diameter of /8-inch (9. mm). Can be used with NEMA 1, R and 1 fabricated enclosures. An optional handle is available for Flex Shaft that is suitable for use with NEMA 4 and 4X environments. Flex Shaft comes preset from the factory, requiring only minor field adjustments on installation, which takes about 10 minutes a significant time savings compared to installation of other types of flange handle mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism also takes up less interior enclosure space than competitive designs and the handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex Shaft Handle can be remotely mounted from breaker, where an operator can use it by funneling the cable through conduit. Flex Shaft is UL listed under File E6498 and meets CSA requirements. The Type C71 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms are designed for installation in control enclosures where main or branch circuit protective devices are required. All circuit breaker mechanisms are suitable for right-hand mounting. Auxiliary contacts are not available for mounting on operating mechanisms. Where required, have them installed in circuit breaker. Type C71 is UL listed under File E66. Table Flex Shaft Ordering Information Breaker Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) Frame (.9) 4 (1.) (1.) 6 (1.8) G F F (Dual) J K L and MDL N R MD, MDS (Old) F0S0C F1S0C F1S0CD FS0C FS0C N/A N/A N/A N/A F0S04C F1S04C F1S04CD FS04C FS04C F4S04C FS04C F6S04 F7S04 F0S0C F1S0C F1S0CD FS0C FS0C F4S0C FS0C F6S0 F7S0 F0S06C F1S06C F1S06CD FS06C FS06C F4S06C FS06C F6S06 F7S06 Table Flex Shaft Ordering Information (Continued) Breaker Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m) Frame 7 (.1) 8 (.4) 9 (.7) 10 (.0) Flex Shaft G F F (Dual) J K L and MDL N R MD LG N/A F1S07C F1S07CD FS07C FS07C N/A N/A N/A N/A LHMFS07 N/A F1S08C F1S08CD FS08C FS08C N/A N/A N/A N/A LHMFS08 N/A F1S09C F1S09CD FS09C FS09C N/A N/A N/A N/A LHMFS08 N/A F1S10C F1S10CD FS10C FS10C F4S10C FS10C N/A F7S10C LHMFS10 Note: Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to complete catalog number. Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for IEC handle. Original narrow handle design (No C Suffix) is available. Remove C from catalog number. Note: When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) ( inches, 1.7 mm for L, N, R Frames) is maintained to operate properly. The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required. Note: Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame only. Only the F, J & K can mount LH & RH all other RH only. Discount Symbol CB-

228 -8 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms May 008 Table Type C71 Ordering Information Dimensions in Inches (mm) Circuit Breaker Frame Operating Operating Mechanism w/ 4-inch Handle or Motor Circuit Size Mechanism Protector Only For NEMA 1 1 For NEMA 4/4X Enclosure Enclosure HMCP & Series C EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED HMCP & Series C HJD, JD, JDB, JDC HMCP & Series C DK, HKD, KD, KDB Series C HLD, LD, LDC Series C MD, MDS (No MDL) Series C HND, ND, NDC Variable Depth Mounting Range Min/Max ( ) ( ) ( ) 8. ( ) (. 8.8) For increased maximum allowable depth, see connecting rods right. Dimensions shown are from panel flange surface. Does not include handle. Table Handle Only Dimensions in Inches (mm) Circuit Breaker Frame Size (Amperes) ( ) NEMA Enclosure Type 10 1-R--1 4/4X 1-R--1 4/4X R--1 4/4X 1-R--1 4/4X C71E C71E1 C71E C71F C71F C71F6 C71F C71F C71F6 C71G C71G C71G6 C71K C71K C71K6 C71K C71K C71K6 Operating Handle Length 4 (101.6) C71H1 C71H 6 (1.4) C71H C71H4 4 (101.6) C71H C71H6 6 (1.4) C71H7 C71H8 Table -0. Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied) For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure. Included in 100 A. C71CS6 Table -1. Connecting Rods Application Disconnect Switches (0, 60,, 00 A Sizes) Circuit Breakers (10, 0, 400 A Sizes) Circuit Breakers (, 800, 100 A Sizes) Increase maximum allowable depth by inches (17 mm). Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) Table -. NEMA 1 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C71 Handle Length in Inches (mm) 4 (101.6) 6 (1.4) Roller Latch C71CS1 C71CS1 C71CS C61KJ4 C61KJ6 C61KR Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters required for assembly. The 1/4-inch x 1/-inch (6. x 1.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits. Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 1.4 mm) handle when point latching is required. Discount Symbol CB-

229 May 008 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms -9 Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms Eaton s Cutler-Hammer through-thedoor handle mechanisms mount on the front of an enclosure or cabinet door and externally operate the circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft or a linear operator (Type MC). Each rotary type handle mechanism includes a handle, base operating mechanism and shaft that can be cut to various lengths. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary handle mechanisms are for use with Molded Case Circuit Breakers (G, F, J, K, L, MDL), Molded Case Switches and Motor Circuit Protectors. Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary, are UL listed and meet CSA requirements. Universal Rotary also meets IEC947-1/ for international compliance. Rotary UL File is E6498. Series C Rotary Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard handles except they include an internal neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X handle style number is 6648CG0. Due to gasketing effect between the handle and the housing, the handle may not indicate a tripped position. Series C Rotary Accessories As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker. This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and comes with 4-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads. Table -. Series C Auxiliary Switch 108A61G01 Table -4. Series C Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Length Inches (mm) F-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 16 (406.4) 4 (609.6) J-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 16 (406.4) 4 (609.6) K-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 16 (406.4) 4 (609.6) L- and MDL-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 16 (406.4) 4 (609.6) MD/MDS 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 16 (406.4) 4 (609.6) N-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 16 (406.4) 4 (609.6) Complete HM1R06 HM1R1 HM1R16 HM1R4 HMR06 HMR1 HMR16 HMR4 HMR06 HMR1 HMR16 HMR4 HM4R06 HM4R1 HM4R16 HM4R4 HM7R06 HM7R1 HM7R16 HM7R4 HMR06 HMR1 HMR16 HMR4 Separate Standard Handle 6648CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 Breaker Mechanism 6648CG CG CG CG CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 6648CG1 6648CG 6648CG 6648CG 6648CG 6648CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG08 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, R and 1 enclosures. Use style number 6648CG0 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number. Handle is cast aluminum. Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.0-inch (1.7 mm). Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 4-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension. IEC Handle Mechanism supplied with Metric thread mounting hardware. Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft. Shaft 417B7G04 417B7G01 417B7G0 417B7G0 417B7G04 417B7G01 417B7G0 417B7G0 417B7G04 417B7G01 417B7G0 417B7G0 417B7G04 417B7G01 417B7G0 417B7G0 417B7G04 417B7G01 417B7G0 417B7G0 417B7G04 417B7G01 417B7G0 417B7G0 IEC IP6 WHM1R06 WHM1R1 WHM1R16 WHM1R4 WHMR06 WHMR1 WHMR16 WHMR4 WHMR06 WHMR1 WHMR16 WHMR4 WHM4R06 WHM4R1 WHM4R16 WHM4R4 WHMR06 WHMR1 WHMR16 WHMR4 IEC IP66 WHM1R06X WHM1R1X WHM1R16X WHM1R4X WHMR06X WHMR1X WHMR16X WHMR4X WHMR06X WHMR1X WHMR16X WHMR4X WHM4R06X WHM4R1X WHM4R16X WHM4R4X WHMR06X WHMR1X WHMR16X WHMR4X Discount Symbol CB-

230 -0 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms May 008 Universal Rotary F-Frame Table -6. Series C G-Frame Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism (Not Shown) For Use With: Handle Color Complete Enclosure Breaker Black Table -. Series C Universal Rotary Ordering Information Shaft Length in Inches (mm) F-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) G-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) J-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) K-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) L-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) MDL-Frame 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) 6 (1.4) 1 (04.8) Handle Color Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Red Red Complete FHMVD06B FHMVD1B FHMVD06R FHMVD1R GHMVD06B GHMVD1B GHMVD06R GHMVD1R JHMVD06B JHMVD1B JHMVD06R JHMVD1R KHMVD06B KHMVD1B KHMVD06R KHMVD1R LHMVD06B LHMVD1B LHMVD06R LHMVD1R MHMVD06B MHMVD1B MHMVD06R MHMVD1R Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately. NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA R/1/4X NEMA R/1/4X NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA R/1/4X NEMA R/1/4X GC/GHC/GD GC/GHC/GD GC/GHC/GD GC/GHC/GD GMCP GMCP GMCP GMCP Yellow Black Yellow Black Yellow Black Yellow Black HRGCV11L HRGCV1L HRGCV14L HRGCV4L HRGMV11L HRGMV1L HRGMV14L HRGMV4L Table -7. Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism Rotary of Poles NEMA Enclosure Type 1 R 1 4/4X Handle Lock-Off Handle Indication: ON/OFF TRIPPED/ RESET International Markings ON (I) OFF (O) Handle Material Available Handle Colors Handle Rotation Shaft Lengths (Inches) Series C Rotary X X X X X X X Metal Black deg. 6, 1, 16, 4 Universal Rotary X X X X X Molded Plastic Yellow/Red 90 deg. 6, 1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See Ordering Information. All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle Lock Off to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position. Series C Rotary handle was ergonomically designed with extra clearance for a gloved hand to operate. Handle has a -degree rotation. Universal Rotary has a 90-degree rotation ( pipe valve operation) where ON is vertical and OFF is horizontal. Shafts include a support brace to ensure proper alignment. Discount Symbol CB-

231 May 008 External Accessories Handle Mechanisms -1 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms Product Description Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms mount directly to the circuit breaker. They are used in shallow enclosures where the standard variable depth Through-the-Door type mechanism is not practical or cannot be used. They are typically for applications where high volume, standardized enclosures are being fabricated. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism can be used on F- through R-Frames. The G Direct is available with a black or the yellow handle, and with or without a shroud. It is suitable for use with NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for use only with the G-Frame (GD, GC, GHC, GMCP). An escutcheon ring and interlock clip are provided as standard. The standard design includes a lock-off feature. The Universal Direct handle mechanism is UL 489 listed, IEC947-1/ and meets CSA requirements. The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is IEC G Direct is UL listed and meets CSA requirements. Table -8. Euro IEC Direct Ordering Information Frame Black Handle Red Handle F J K L and M N R G Direct Table -9. G Direct Ordering Information Frame Black Handle Yellow Handle with Shroud without Shroud with Shroud without Shroud Suitable for use on - or -Pole G-Frame. HMCC1B HMCCB HMCCB HMCC4B HMVDB HMVD6B HMCC1R HMCCR HMCCR HMCC4R GD/ HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCCS HRGCC0 GHC GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMCS HRGMC0 Discount Symbol CB-

232 - External Accessories Handle Mechanisms May 008 Handle Extension Handle Extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame breakers. It must be purchased separately. Table Handle Extension Frame J, K L, M Style HEX HEX4 Handle Extension is included with breaker with R-Frame breakers. Table Handle Extension Frame N R Style HEX HEX6 Handle Extension Discount Symbol CB-

233 May 008 External Accessories Current Limiters, Alarms and Test Kits - Type LFD Current Limiter Table -46. GF Alarm Unit Description Potential Transformer Module Ground Fault Alarm Unit Face Mounting Bracket GFAU 164C67G01 IQ Energy Sentinel The LFD Current Limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, providing 00,000 A interrupting capacity at up to Vac. LFD current limiters for thermalmagnetic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E479. Table -46. Type LFD Current Limiter Circuit Breaker Amperes LFD070R LFD10R Ground Fault Alarm Unit The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C F-Frame (10 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on -phase, 4-wire systems, or single-phase, -wire systems with voltage connected through phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin The Potential Transformer Module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 100 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The Potential Transformer Module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to volt line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Table Potential Transformer Module Description Potential Transformer Module DOPTMLN Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The Ground Fault Alarm Unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The Ground Fault Alarm Unit requires a separate 10 Vac power source to power the light and the internal relay which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The Ground Fault Alarm Unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 10 only, K- through N-Frame. The Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit provides verification of performance of all ratings of Digitrip 10 electronic trip units installed in circuit breakers while in service under varying load and/or phase imbalance. The test kit operates on 10-volt, 0/60 Hz power; it includes complete instructions and test times for testing long time, short time/instantaneous operation and optional ground fault operation of the circuit breaker. Table -46. Portable Test Kit Description Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit STK Discount Symbol CB-

234 -4 External Accessories OPTIM System Components May 008 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Digitrip OPTIMizer Auxiliary Power Module The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 4 Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software. Table Breaker Interface Module (BIM) BIMII The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the Copy and Download commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include the programmer, the eight-pin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The Auxiliary Power Module is optional. Table Digitrip OPTIMizer OPTIMizer Standard Package Note: 4 Vdc Power Supply A 4 Vdc power supply is required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip units that are required to communicate either on the main Eaton s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet network or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The breaker s load is ma of current. Typically one power supply is required per switchboard and can provide control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 4 Vdc power supply should be an isolated high quality power supply with a CE label, and is normally provided by the switchboard manufacturer to Eaton s recommendations. The Auxiliary Power Module is a power supply requiring 10 Vac input at 0 or 60 Hz that provides a Vdc output. The Auxiliary Power Module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The Auxiliary Power Module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the Auxiliary Power Module would be for the testing of a stand-alone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. Note: The OPTIMizer can work off of Vdc control power, although 4 Vdc is the standard on OPTIM breakers. Table Auxiliary Power Module PRTAAPM Discount Symbol CB-

235 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Size GD and GDB - Dimensions Front View Side View Off 4.88 (1.8).00 (76.).6 (66.7) Figure -. GD-Frame, -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm) Front View Side View 4.00 (101.6).00 (76.) Max..6 (66.7) Figure -6. GDB-Frame, -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm)

236 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Size GC and GHB May 008 Front View Side View 0.97 (4.6). (81.7) OFF 4.88 (1.8).00 (76.).81 (71.4) Figure -7. GC-Frame, -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm) Front View Side View 4.00 (101.6).00 (76.).6 (66.7) Figure -8. GHB-Frame, -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm)

237 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Size FD and JD -7 Front View Side View On Off 6.00 (1.4) 4.1 (104.9).8 (8.7) Figure -9. FD-Frame, -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm) Front View 0.4 R (8.7 R) Front View Cutout 1.6 (9.7) 0.78 (19.8) 4.1 (104.8) Side View.94 (.0) 0.7 (18.) 0.0 (1.7) Diameter Megger Holes if Required C L Handle C L Breaker 0.19 R (4.8) R.7 (69.9).0 (88.9).9 (74.) 0.88 (.). (84.) 1.8 (4.9) 1.7 (44.) (4.0) ON OFF 4.06 (10.) Figure -60. JD-Frame, -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm)

238 Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Size KD and LD May R (8.7 R) Front Cover Cutout Front View.49 (19.4) Side View 4.1 (109.6) 0.19 R (4.8 R) C L Handle 1.1 (.).6 (66.7).9.7 (9.) 0.8 (1.0) 1.64 (41.7) 1. (1.8) ON OFF 10.1 (7.) 4.78 (11.) (60.7) Figure -61. KD-Frame, - and -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm) Side View Front Cover Cutout.44 (87.) 1.7 (4.7) Front View.81 (96.8) CL Handle.64 (9.) Breaker CL 0. (6.4) R 7.8 (184.9).8 (8.) 1. (.7).9 (8.) 1.0 (8.1) 0.19 R (4.8) R 10.7 (7.1) 8.1 (08.6) 8. (09.6) Figure -6. LD-Frame, - and -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm)

239 May Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Size MDL and ND -9 Front Cover Cutout Front View Side View.44 (87.) 1.91 (48.4) 1.7 (4.6) C L Handle 0. R (6.4 R) C L Handle (406.4) ON/I.68 (9.) 0.19 R (4.8 R) OFF/O 1.0 (8.1).19 (80.9) 6.8 (161.9) 8. (09.6).0 (19.7) Figure -6. ND-Frame, - and -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm) Drilling Plan Front View Side View 1.7 (4.7).44 (87.) C L Breaker R 0. (6.4) R 0.19 (4.8) C L Handle 1. (.7).8 (8.) (406.4) 1.0 (8.1) 0.97 (4.6).64 (9.) 7.8 (184.9) 8. (09.6) 4.06 (10.) Figure -64. MDL-Frame, - and -Pole Dimensions in Inches (mm)

240 Push To Trip Amperes for UL, CSA & IEC Applications Frame Size RD May 008 Front View 7. (184.) 14.0 (68.) 11.1 (0.4) Dia. (4 Holes) Use 4, 0.8 (Mil) Dia. Bolts for Mounting Breaker 1.0 (9.7) Side View 9.00 (8.6) CL Breaker 9.69 (46.1).09 (19.4) CL Handle 7.7 (196.9) 1.00 (81.0) (406.4) 6.6 (166.7) 1.91 (7.8) 0.16 (4.0) R Typ. Figure -6. RD-Frame, -Pole, 1 and 000 Amperes Dimensions in Inches (mm)

241 May 008 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Description -41 Motor Circuit Protectors Motor Circuit Protectors Product Description Designated as Eaton s Cutler-Hammer Types GMCP and HMCP, the instantaneous-only Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) is available in ratings from A to 100 A for motor starter sizes 0 through 8. The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C. No..1, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings. The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C. No..1, International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 17-1, and nameplates bear the CE marking. Note: Interrupting ratings are dependent on starter it is used with.

242 -4 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection May 008 Product Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Table Motor Circuit Protector ing System HMCP 00 A0 C Motor Circuit Protective Type HMCP = Poles HMP = Poles HMCPS = Poles Continuous Ampere Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size A0 = 9 0/0 C0 = 1 70/0 E0 = 10/0 D0 = 40 60/0 H1 = 90 00/1 G = 80 10/ K = 10 00/ J = / M = / L = / R = 00 0/ T4 = 0 100/4 U4 = 70 00/4 A = 0 700/ C = 0 900/ D = 00 0/ F = 6 10/ G = / J = / K = 0 000/ L = 11 0/ W = 10 00/ N = / R = / X = / Y = 0 00/ L6 = /6 (Electronic) X6 = 00 00/6 (Electronic) Y6 = /6 (Electronic) X7 = /7 (Electronic) Y8 = 400 9/8 (Electronic) Suffix C = Non-aluminum Terminals W = Without Terminals X = Load Terminals Only Y = Line Terminals Only S = Stainless Steel Terminals (10 A Frame Only) No Suffix: Standard Terminals on Line and Load On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only. Table Motor Circuit Protector ing System GMCP 00 A0 C Motor Circuit Protective Device GMCP = Poles Continuous Ampere GMCP Magnetic Trip Range/NEMA Starter Size A0 = 1 0/0 C0 = 70/0 E0 = 7 10/0 H1 = 10 00/1 K = 0 00/ J = 00 / M = 0 60/ Suffix C = Non-aluminum Terminals

243 May 008 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection -4 Product Selection G-Frame Table Vac Maximum, Y/47 Vac NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 A B C D E F 0 7 A B C D E F 0 1 A B C D E F 1 0 A B C D E F 0 A B C D E F 60 A B C D E F 6 A B C D E F Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. Note: All GMCP 6 A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Table -10 on Page -70 under Optional Terminal Types. Note: UL recognized and CSA approved GMCP00A0C GMCP007C0C GMCP01E0C GMCP00H1C GMCP00KC GMCP060JC GMCP06MC Discount Symbol CB-

244 -44 Motor Circuit Protectors Accessories May 008 Modifications for GMCP Internal accessories must be factory installed. Table -47. Internal Accessories Type Accessory Electrical s Volts Frequency Amperes Contact Arrangement Factory Suffix Style Adder Shunt Trip 10 Shunt Trip 40 Auxiliary Switch 40 Auxiliary Switch 40 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz Alarm Switch 40 0/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break B 188C7G0 Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Switch Combination 40 0/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B Make/Break B1 188C76G09 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP. LH only. RH only. Note: No UVR available on GMCP A/1B A/B S S6 A A6 17D6G18 17D6G19 188C74G0 188C7G0 Table -47. External Mounted Accessories Description Units in Package Style Table Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism Description Lock Dog (Non-padlockable) Mounting Hardware DIN Rail Adapter For use with standard mm DIN rail such as, x 7. or 1 mm per DIN EN00. Modifications for HMCP 194C01H01 64B7G 1C79G0 See Internal Accessories starting on Page -18. For Type 1 use For Type R, 4X, 1 use Close Coupled Black with Gray Handle Close Coupled Red with Yellow Handle For use with GMCP only. HRGMV11L HRGMV14L HRGMC10 HRGMC0 Discount Symbol CB-

245 May 008 Motor Circuit Protectors F-Frame - F-Frame Table -47. Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP Table -47. Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 A B C D E F G H 0 7 A B C D E F G H 0 1 A B C D E F G H 1 0 A B C D E F G H 0 A B C D E F G H HMCP00A0C HMCP007C0C HMCP01E0C HMCP00H1C HMCP00KC 70 A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H HMCP070MC HMCPRC HMCP10T4C HMCP10U4C Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 10 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 11% of the motor full load ampere rating. Note: HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, TFB. HMCP 10 A come with line and load steel body terminals, T10FB. Discount Symbol CB-

246 -46 Motor Circuit Protectors Low Magnetic Protection F-Frame May 008 Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP Table Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum Cont. Amps A B C D E F G H 0 A B C D E F G H 70 A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H Cam Setting MCP Trip Setting MCP HMCP0D0C HMCP00GC HMCP070JC HMCPLC For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Note: HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, TFB. MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays Table Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps 0 A B C D E F G H 0 7 A B C D E F G H Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP HMCPS00A0C HMCPS007C0C Table Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps 0 1 A B C D E F G H 1 0 A B C D E F G H 0 A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H 4 10 A B C D E F G H Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP HMCPS01E0C HMCPS00H1C HMCPS00KC HMCPSRC HMCPS10T4C HMCPS10U4C Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 10 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 11% of the motor full load ampere rating. Note: HMCPS A come with line and load steel body terminals, TFB. HMCPS 10 A come with line and load steel body terminals, T10FB. Discount Symbol CB-

247 May 008 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Description -47 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Product Description Eaton s Cutler-Hammer Type ELC current limiter attachment for the MCP is designed to provide increased interrupting capacity. The combination may be used for the application up to 00,000 A symmetrical at Vac, making the MCP suitable for use in network distribution systems or other applications where unusually high fault currents are available. The current limiter connects to the load end of the MCP and is provided with terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. (See Table -478.) Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal fault currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP without any damage to the limiter. Only the rare very high fault is opened by the limiter. Faults that are interrupted by the limiter also magnetically trip the MCP, opening all three poles, preventing single-phase operation. Each of the three poles of the type ELC limiter is equipped with an indicator that extends when a fault is interrupted by the limiter. Table Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes Type ELC Current Limiter Maximum Amperes Standard Aluminum Terminals 0 10 Wire Range AWG /0 1 4/0 Non-standard Terminals (Steel) Metric (mm ) Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in UL 486A or UL 486B. Optional on special order for copper cable only. Table ELC Current Limiter Attachment MCP (Amperes) ELC00R ELC007R ELC01R ELC00R ELC00R ELCR ELC10R Discount Symbol CB-

248 -48 Motor Circuit Protectors J-Frame May 008 J-Frame Table Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP Table Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP A B C D E F G H I 0 A B C D E F G H I 0 A B C D E F G H I 0 A B C D E F G H I 0 A B C D E F G H I HMCP0AC HMCP0CC HMCP0DC HMCP0FC HMCP0GC 0 A B C D E F G H I 0 A B C D E F G H I 0 A B C D E F G H I 0 A B C D E F G H I HMCP0JC HMCP0KC HMCP0LC HMCP0WC Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HMP in place of HMCP. Note: All HMCP and HMP 0 A come with line and load steel body terminals, T0KB. (With suffix C, without C comes with TA0KB.) Discount Symbol CB-

249 May 008 Motor Circuit Protectors K-Frame -49 K-Frame Table Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP Table Vac Maximum, 0 Vdc Maximum (Continued) NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I HMCP400AC HMCP400DC HMCP400FC HMCP400GC HMCP400JC HMCP400KC HMCP400LC 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I 400 A B C D E F G H I HMCP400WC HMCP400NC HMCP400RC HMCP400XC HMCP400YC Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Three-pole s shown. Two-pole s begin with HMP in place of HMCP. Note: All HMCP and HMP 400A come with aluminum body terminals, TA400K. numbers with suffix C as shown above come with copper body terminals T400K. Discount Symbol CB-

250 -0 Motor Circuit Protectors L-Frame May 008 L-Frame Table -48. Vac Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H HMCPL6W HMCPX6W HMCPY6W Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1X the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. Note: All HMCP A come without terminals. For Terminals, see Table -6 on Page -1. Discount Symbol CB-

251 May 008 Motor Circuit Protectors N-Frame -1 N-Frame Table -48. Vac Maximum NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP A B C D E F G 100 A B C D E F G HMCP800X7W HMCP1Y8W Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 1X the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 1X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/ or MCP ratings should be used. Note: All HMCP 800 A and 100 A come without terminals. For Terminals, see Table -47 on Page -. Table F-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault 480 Volts Continuous Amperes Pole ELHMCP00A0C ELHMCP007C0C ELHMCP01E0C ELHMCP0X0C ELHMCP00H1C ELHMCP00KC ELHMCP070MC ELHMCPRC ELHMCP10T4C ELHMCP10U4C ELHMCP00A0LC ELHMCP007C0LC ELHMCP01E0LC ELHMCP0D0C ELHMCP00H1LC ELHMCP070JC ELHMCPLC ELHMCP00GC ELHMCP070JC ELHMCPKC HMCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays ELHMCPS00A0C ELHMCPS007C0C ELHMCPS01E0C ELHMCPS00H1C ELHMCPS00KC ELHMCPSRC ELHMCPS10T4C ELHMCPS10U4C Table -48. J and K-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault 480 Volts Continuous Amperes -Pole 0 ELHMCP0A ELHMCP0C ELHMCP0D ELHMCP0F ELHMCP0G ELHMCP0J ELHMCP0K ELHMCP0L ELHMCP0W 400 ELHMCP400D ELHMCP400F ELHMCP400G ELHMCP400J ELHMCP400K Discount Symbol CB-

252 - Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Non-Fused May 008 Type FCL Current-Limit-R Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Non-Fused Technical Data and Specifications Table Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) Product Selection Table Type FCL Circuit Breakers Max. Cont. Amp at 40 C -Pole -Pole Type FCL Breaker Product Description 1 to amperes, 480 Vac. Non-interchangeable trip, line and load terminals included. Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted. Type FCL breakers are not defined in Federal Specification W-C-7-b. FCL On all -phase Delta, Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton s Customer Support Center. Line and Load Terminals Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Suffix Z to breaker catalog number listed. Table Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Type Dimensions/Weights AWG Wire Range Standard Pressure Terminals Al/Cu 14 1/0 Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 0 Al/Cu Al/Cu /0 Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth FCL01L FCL00L FCL0L FCL00L FCL0L FCL040L FCL0L FCL00L FCL060L FCL070L FCL080L FCL090L FCLL FCL01L FCL00L FCL0L FCL00L FCL0L FCL040L FCL0L FCL00L FCL060L FCL070L FCL080L FCL090L FCLL -pole breakers are supplied in -pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. 4.1 (104.8) 8.8 (.).4 (8.7) Table Approximate Shipping Weight of Poles Lbs. (kg) 9 (4.1) Discount Symbol CB-

253 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Non-Fused - Type LCL Current-Limit-R Electronic Circuit Breakers Non-Fused Dimensions/Weights Table -49. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 16 (406.4) 8. (09.6) 4.06 (10.) Table -49. Approximate Shipping Weight of Poles Standard Lbs. (kg) (14.) With Ground Fault 6 (16.) Type LCL Breaker Product Description 1 to 400 amperes, Vac with solid-state trip units. Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted. Type LCL breakers are not defined in Federal Specification W-C-7-b. Technical Data and Specifications Table Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Type LCL Volts ac (0/60 Hz) Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (ka) On all -phase Delta, Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton s Customer Support Center. Product Selection Standard Breakers Vac, 0/60 Hz Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals. Table Standard Breakers Vac, 0/60 Hz Frame Only Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time Trip and Current Limiting) Short Time Only and Current Limiting Types LCL and LCLA 0 Ampere Frame (1 0 Amperes) LCL0F LCL0F LCL0FM LCL0FM Type LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frame ( Amperes) LCL400F LCL400F LCL400FM LCL400FM -pole breakers are supplied in -pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. UL listed recognized component. Breakers with Built-in Ground Fault Protection Long Delay, Short Time Trip and Adjustable Short Delay Time ( seconds) and Current Limiting LCLA0F LCLA0F LCLA400F LCLA400F Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals extra current transformer included for neutral. Table -49. Breakers with Built-in Ground Fault Protection Frame Only Poles Standard (Long Delay, Short Time Trip, Current Limiting and Ground Fault Trip) Long Delay, Short Time Trip and Adjustable Short Delay Time (.06-. seconds), Ground Fault Trip and Current Limiting Types LCLG and LCLGA 0 Ampere Frame (1 0 Amperes) LCLG0F LCLGA0F Types LCLG and LCLGA 400 Ampere Frame ( Amperes) LCLG400F LCLGA400F -pole breakers are supplied in -pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. Discount Symbol CB-

254 -4 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Non-Fused May 008 Terminals (Order Separately) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. Table Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Range, Type, of Cables Standard Copper Pressure Terminals 400 (1) 6 AWG 0 kcmil Cu (1) 4 AWG 0 kcmil Cu, plus (1) /0 kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals (1) 6 AWG 0 kcmil Cu, or (1) 4 AWG 0 kcmil Al 400 (1) 4 AWG 0 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) /0 kcmil Al/Cu Note: Terminals shipped separately from breaker. Terminal TLA T401LA TALA1 TA400LA1 Plug Selection Data plugs listed below are for both standard breakers and breakers with built-in ground fault protection. Table Plugs Only (For - or -Pole Frames) Cont. Ampere Magnetic Trip Setting, Amps Fixed Plugs Low High Types LCL and LCLA 0 Ampere Frames LCL1 LCL10 LCL17 LCL00 LCL LCL0 Types LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frames LCL00 4LCL 4LCL0 4LCL7 4LCL00 4LCL0 4LCL400 Adjustable 70 to % except as noted. Adjustable 7 to %. Adjustable 0 to %. Adjustable Plugs ALCL17 ALCL00 ALCL ALCL0 A4LCL00 A4LCL0 A4LCL400 Discount Symbol CB-

255 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused - Type FB TRI-PAC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Dimensions/Weights Table Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 4.1 (104.8) 8.7 (.).0 (88.9) Table -00. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Complete Breaker -Pole -Pole Type TRI-PAC FB Breaker Product Description 1 to amperes, Vac, 0 Vdc, replaceable current limiters. Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted. TRI-PAC FB breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 6a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-7b. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s UL listed. Vac maximum: 00,000 amperes symmetrical. 0 Vdc: 10,000 amperes. Based on NEMA Test Procedures On all -phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Eaton s Customer Support Center. Line and Load Terminals Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are UL listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Suffix Z to breaker catalog number listed. Table Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amps Wire Type AWG Wire Range Standard Pressure Terminals Al/Cu 14 1/0 Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 0 Al/Cu Al/Cu /0 TRI-PAC FB 10. (4.8) 11. (.) Product Selection Table -01. Type FB Circuit Breakers Maximum Continuous Ampere at 40 C Pole ➀ (Current Limiters Included) FB01PL FB00PL FB00PL FB040PL FB00PL FB060PL FB070PL FB090PL FBPL -Pole -pole breakers are supplied in -pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. Replacement Current Limiters and Housing Assembly Current Limiters: One required per pole. Table -0. Replacement Current Limiters and Housing Assembly Application Note: Refer to CAT T.E for complete application information. (Current Limiters Included) FB01PL FB00PL FB00PL FB040PL FB00PL FB060PL FB070PL FB090PL FBPL Supplied as Standard in Type FB TRI-PAC breakers rated 1 amperes. Replaces 00FBP0 formerly supplied on 1 40 ampere ratings, and 00FBP07 formerly supplied on 0 ampere ratings. Table -0. Current Limiter Housing Assembly Complete with Current Limiter Ampere 1 1 Poles 176C9G09 176C9G10 FBP06 Discount Symbol CB-

256 -6 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused May 008 Type LA TRI-PAC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Dimensions/Weights Table -04. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 8. (09.6) (406.4) 4.7 (10.7) Type TRI-PAC LA Breaker Product Description 70 to 400 amperes, Vac, 0 Vdc. -, -pole, interchangeable trip, replaceable current limiters. Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, except as noted. TRI-PAC LA breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 6a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-7b. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s UL listed. Vac maximum: 00,000 amperes symmetrical. 0 Vdc: 10,000 amperes. Based on NEMA Test Procedures On all -phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Eaton s Customer Support Center. Table -0. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole TRI-PAC LA 9.7 (1.) 4 (1.4). (10.7) (11.4). (1.0) (1.4) Product Selection Table -06. Type LA Circuit Breakers Cont. Magnetic Complete Breaker Amp Trip Includes Pressure Setting at Amps Type Copper Terminals 40 C Low High Poles, Vac, 0 Vdc Poles, Vac, 0 Vdc LA070PR LA090PR LAPR LA1PR LA10PR LA17PR LA00PR LAPR LA0PR LA00PR LA0PR LA400PR LA070PR LA090PR LAPR LA1PR LA10PR LA17PR LA00PR LAPR LA0PR LA00PR LA0PR LA400PR Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter 1 Required per Pole LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA400PRF LA070PT LA090PT LAPT LA1PT LA10PT LA17PT LA00PT LAPT LA0PT LA00PT LA0PT LA400PT LA070PT LA090PT LAPT LA1PT LA10PT LA17PT LA00PT LAPT LA0PT LA00PT LA0PT LA400PT 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 00LAP08 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 400LAP10 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits. Terminals shipped separately from breakers. -pole breakers or trips are supplied in -pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. Discount Symbol CB-

257 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused -7 Current Limiters Included with breaker, one required per pole. Table -07. Current Limiters Application Supplied as standard on ratings through 00 amperes. Supplied as standard on through 400 ampere ratings, optional on lower ratings when a higher cross-over point is desired. (Above two limiters replace 800LAP1 formerly supplied as standard on all ratings, LAP09 optional on all ratings through 00 amperes, 00LAP0 optional on ratings through 10 amperes, and special rating limiter 0LAP14.) Special rating where a higher cross-over point is desired on 00 ampere and higher ratings (Replaces limiter 100LAP0) 00LAP08 400LAP10 00LAP1 Not UL listed. Protection based on,000 ampere maximum fault, 480 volts maximum. Note: New limiters suitable for replacement in existing breakers by using plug-in conductor from old limiter (instructions included with limiter). Terminals (Order Separately) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Suffix Z to complete breaker catalog number. Note: Terminals shipped separately from breakers. Table -08. Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Optional terminal. Wire Range, Type, of Cables Standard Copper Pressure Terminals 400 (1) 6 AWG 0 kcmil Cu (1) 6 AWG 0 kcmil Cu (1) 4 AWG 0 kcmil Cu, plus (1) /0 kcmil Cu Terminal TLA TLBF T401LA Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals (1) 6 AWG 0 kcmil Cu, or TALA1 (1) 4 AWG 0 kcmil Cu/Al 400 (1) 4 AWG 0 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) /0 kcmil Al/Cu TA400LA1 Discount Symbol CB-

258 -8 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused May 008 Type NB TRI-PAC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Dimensions/Weights Table -09. Dimensions in Inches (mm) of Poles Width Height Depth 8. (09.6).00 (8.8).0 (19.7) Type TRI-PAC NB Breaker Product Description 00 to 800 amperes, Vac, 0 Vdc. Note: dc rating applies to 0 amperes maximum thermal or to magnetic only breakers. -, -pole, interchangeable trip, replaceable current limiters. Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted. TRI-PAC NB breakers meet the requirements for Class 16b, 17a and 6a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-7b. Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s UL listed. Vac maximum: 00,000 amperes symmetrical. 0 Vdc: 10,000 amperes. Based on NEMA Test Procedures On all -phase Delta, grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton s Customer Support Center. Table -10. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole TRI-PAC NB 6 (8.1) 7 (4.1) 8 (6.) 6 (9.). (1.6) 4 (1.8) Product Selection Table -11. Type NB Circuit Breakers Cont. Magnetic Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals Amp Trip Includes Pressure Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter Setting at Amperes Type Copper 1 Required Terminals per Pole 40 C Low High Poles, Vac, 0 Vdc NB00P NB0P NB400P NB00P NBP NB700P NB800P Poles, Vac Only NB00P NB0P NB400P NB00P NBP NB700P NB800P NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB800PF NB00PT NB0PT NB400PT NB00PT NBPT NB700PT NB800PT NB00PT NB0PT NB400PT NB00PT NBPT NB700PT NB800PT 00NBP1 00NBP1 00NBP1 00NBP1 800NBP0 800NBP0 800NBP0 00NBP1 00NBP1 00NBP1 00NBP1 800NBP0 800NBP0 800NBP0 60 Hz ac only. dc rating applies to 0 amperes maximum thermal or to magnetic only breakers. -pole breakers or trips are supplied in -pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the center pole. Discount Symbol CB-

259 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused -9 Current Limiters Included with breaker, one required per pole. Table -1. Current Limiters Application Supplied as standard on ratings through 00 amperes. Supplied as standard on 800 ampere ratings, optional on lower ratings when a higher cross-over point is desired. Above two limiters replace 0NBP14 formerly supplied on ratings up to amperes, 100NBP0 supplied on 700 amperes, and 00NBP supplied on 800 amperes. 00NBP1 800NBP0 Terminals (Order Separately) Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add Suffix Z to complete breaker catalog number. Note: Shipped separately from breaker. Table -1. Terminals Maximum Ampere Wire Range, Type, of Cables Standard Copper Pressure Terminals (1) 1 AWG kcmil Cu () /0 00 kcmil Cu () /0 00 kcmil Cu Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals () 1 AWG 00 kcmil Al/Cu () /0 400 kcmil Al/Cu () kcmil Al/Cu Terminal T0NB T700NB1 T0NB1 TA700NB1 TA0NB1 TA101NB1 Discount Symbol CB-

260 -60 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused May 008 Type PB TRI-PAC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Fused Type TRI-PAC PB Breaker Product Description to 1 amperes, Vac, 60 Hz ac, 0 Vdc. Note: Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 0 Hz calibration available on special order. Note: 0 Vdc rating applies only to magnetic only breakers. -, -pole interchangeable trip, replaceable current limiters. Standards and Certifications Listed with Underwriters Laboratories except as noted. TRI-PAC PB breakers meet the requirements for Class 17a and 6a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-7b. Dimensions/Weights Table -1. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Technical Data and Specifications Interrupting Capacity s UL listed. Vac maximum: 00,000 amperes symmetrical. 0 Vdc: 10,000 amperes. Based on NEMA Test Procedures On all -phase Delta, grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton s Customer Support Center. of Poles Width Height Depth 1.06 (06.4).1 (6.1) 9.06 (0.) Product Selection Table -14. Type PB Circuit Breakers Cont. Amp at 40 C ac Magnetic Trip Setting (Set on High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits) Complete Breaker Low High Poles, Vac Poles, Vac Only Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit Current Limiters and Connectors Includes Rear Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter T Connectors 1 Required per Pole PBPR PB700PR PB800PR PB900PR PB0PR PB100PR PB1400PR PB1PR PBPR PB700PR PB800PR PB900PR PB0PR PB100PR PB1400PR PB1PR Table -16. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (kg) Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole -Pole TRI-PAC PB 148 (67.) 179 (81.) 106 (48.1) 10 (4.) 18 (8.) (10.4) PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PB1PRF PBPRT PB700PRT PB800PRT PB900PRT PB0PRT PB100PRT PB1400PRT PB1PRT PBPRT PB700PRT PB800PRT PB900PRT PB0PRT PB100PRT PB1400PRT PB1PRT -pole breakers are supplied in -pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Change the third digit to 8 for adjustable 0 60% neutral protection, 9 for 0 % neutral protection. 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 1PBPR0 1PBPR0 1PBPR0 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 0PBPR0 1PBPR0 1PBPR0 1PBPR0 Discount Symbol CB-

261 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Fused -61 Current Limiters Included with breaker, one required per pole. Table -17. Current Limiters Application Supplied as standard on ratings through 0 amperes. (Replaces limiter 100PBPR0 formerly supplied on and 700 ampere ratings, and 000 PBPR7 supplied on ampere ratings.) Supplied as standard on 100 through 1 ampere ratings. Optional on lower ratings where a higher cross-over point is desired. (Replaces limiter 4000PBR0 formerly supplied on 100 through 1400 ampere ratings, and 000PBPR4 supplied on 1 ampere ratings.) Bus Bar Connectors T Connector for Cu/Al Bus Two required per pole. For rear bus connection. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90. Table -18. Bus Bar Connectors 0PBPR0 1PBPR0 Cable Connector (Optional) For T connector. Accepts four kcmil copper cables. Table -19. Cable Connector (Optional) 0C706G04 Special Breakers Magnetic Only Type TRI-PACs available on request. Note: Not UL listed. BA000PB Note: Not UL listed. Discount Symbol CB-

262 -6 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Accessories May 008 Options and Accessories Alarm Switch For light or alarm indication when breaker trips. Does not function with manual operation. Automatically resets when breaker is relatched. Standard leads extend 18 inches (7. mm) outside of breaker. Not field mountable and no alarm switch available for FB TRI-PAC. Table -0. Alarm Switch Breaker Frame FCL LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC LCL Normal Pole Meeting Center Left Left Left Left Contact Operation (Specific Type Desired) Make or Break Make or Break Make or Break Make or Break Make or Break When alarm switch is used in conjunction with auxiliary switch, the auxiliary switch is rated 0 volts max., amperes maximum. Alarm Switch Contact (Non Inductive) LA TRI-PAC: 10 amperes, 10 Vac; Amperes, 40 Vac. Auxiliary Switch For auxiliary control circuits. Miniature switches mount within breaker. Commonly used for remote indication of open or closed breaker and electrically interlocking component control circuits. A contacts are closed when breaker is closed. B contacts are open when breaker is closed. Standard leads extend 18 inches (7. mm) outside of breaker. Note: Left-hand mounting is standard unless otherwise specified. Table -1. Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting Breaker Type Maximum ac Voltage For Right-Hand Mounting FCL NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC LCL For Left-Hand Mounting FCL NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC LCL Maximum Non-Inductive Amperes (10 at 40) (10 at 40) All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with a common electrical connection (see Figure -41). Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on NB TRI-PAC and PB TRI-PAC breakers. For dc applications refer to factory. Factory Mounted Auxiliary Switches Note: Left-hand mounting is standard unless otherwise specified. 1A-1B 169D79G0 4980D16G0 60DG14 169D79G0 4980D16G1 60DG11 17D49G0 Auxiliary Switch A-B 4980D16G06 60DG1 4980D16G1 60DG1 17D49G06 All of the above auxiliary switches can be specified for factory mounting at the same price as listed for the kit. These attachments have the leads out the side of the breaker and are UL listed when factory mounted unless other non-ul-listed modifications are used (except as noted). Factory mounted switches only can be supplied for the following breakers: FB TRI-PAC, LA TRI-PAC. Order by description. Note: Right-hand mounting for FB TRI-PAC only. Red Lead Black Lead Blue Lead Figure -66. Auxiliary Switches Discount Symbol CB-

263 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Accessories -6 Shunt Trip Shunt Trip Product Description For tripping breaker from a remote point. A solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Breaker trips when coil is energized. Shunt trips should not be used as circuit interlocks using maintained contact pilot devices. A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to the momentary rated coil when breaker opens. Available for control voltages up to 0 Vdc or Vac. Voltage and frequency must be specified. Standard leads extend 18 inches (7. mm) outside of breaker. Table -. Shunt Trip for Field Mounting Voltage/Hz Breaker Type FCL NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC Right-Hand Mounting /0 60 Hz 480/0 60 Hz 40/0 60 Hz 08/0 60 Hz 10/0 60 Hz 60/0 60 Hz 48/0 60 Hz 4/0 60 Hz 0 dc 1 dc 60 dc 48 dc 4 dc 1 dc Left-Hand Mounting /0 60 Hz 480/0 60 Hz 40/0 60 Hz 08/0 60 Hz 10/0 60 Hz 60/0 60 Hz 48/0 60 Hz 4/0 60 Hz 0 dc 1 dc 60 dc 48 dc 4 dc 1 dc 169D80G1 169D80G16 169D80G17 169D80G18 169D80G19 169D80G0 169D80G1 169D80G 169D80G 169D80G4 169D80G 169D80G6 169D80G7 169D80G8 169D80G01 169D80G0 169D80G0 169D80G04 169D80G0 169D80G06 169D80G07 169D80G08 169D80G09 169D80G10 169D80G11 169D80G1 169D80G1 169D80G14 606D8G1 606D8G16 606D8G17 606D8G18 606D8G19 606D8G0 606D8G1 606D8G 606D8G 606D8G4 606D8G 606D8G6 606D8G7 606D8G8 606D8G01 606D8G0 606D8G0 606D8G04 606D8G0 606D8G06 606D8G07 606D8G08 606D8G09 606D8G10 606D8G11 606D8G1 606D8G1 606D8G14 10 Vac ratings suitable for % pickup for ground fault applications. Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (MCS). Field mounting voids breakers UL listing except on NB TRI-PAC and PB TRI-PAC. Factory-mounted shunt trips only can be supplied for FB TRI-PAC and LA TRI-PAC breakers. Order by description. Note: Right-hand mounting for FB TRI-PAC only. FB TRI-PAC not UL listed. 606D9G1 606D9G16 606D9G17 606D9G18 606D9G19 606D9G0 606D9G1 606D9G 606D9G 606D9G4 606D9G 606D9G6 606D9G7 606D9G8 606D9G01 606D9G0 606D9G0 606D9G04 606D9G0 606D9G06 606D9G07 606D9G08 606D9G09 606D9G10 606D9G11 606D9G1 606D9G1 606D9G14 Table -. Left-Hand Mounting Kits for Type LCL Current Limiting Breakers Description Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external to 10 volts (dc to 60 Hz) source. Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 40 to volts (0/60 Hz) source. 17D49G 17D49G Rated 48 Volts minimum for ground fault applications. Also available factory mounted for 4 Vdc. Order by description. Not for ground fault. Table -4. Shunt Trip Coil Data for Type LCL Current Limiting Breakers Shunt Trip Coil Inrush Voltage Amperes Volt-Amperes 10 ac.1 18 Discount Symbol CB-

264 -64 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Accessories May 008 Standard Undervoltage Release Table -. Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting Attachment Voltage/ Hz Breaker Type For Right-Hand Mounting For Left-Hand Mounting NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC Standard Undervoltage Release Product Description For undervoltage protection, a solenoid device mounts within breaker case. Coil must be energized before closing breaker. Trips breaker when voltage drops below 40 to 60% of coil rating. Picks up and seals in at 80% of coil rating. For line voltages up to 0 Vdc or Vac. Externally mounted resistors are supplied for certain ratings. Standard leads extend 18 inches (7. mm) outside of breaker. Note: UVR attachments are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. For further information, refer to Eaton. Factory Mounted Undervoltage Releases NB TRI-PAC and PB TRI-PAC undervoltage releases can be specified for factory mounting at the same price as the kit. These attachments have the leads out the side and are UL listed when factory mounted unless other non-ul listed modifications are used. Note: Right-hand mounting considered standard unless specified otherwise. Factory-mounted undervoltage releases only can be supplied for the following breakers: FB TRI-PAC, LA TRI-PAC and FCL; LCL 10 Vac only. Order by description. Note: Right-hand mounting for FB TRI-PAC only. UL listing pending for LCL. 4/60 48/60 10/60 08/60 40/60 480/60 /60 1 dc 4 dc 48 dc 60 dc 1 dc 0 dc 7D6G01 7D6G19 7D6G0 7D6G0 7D6G04 7D0G01 7D0G0 7D0G0 7D0G04 7D0G0 674D9G16 674D9G09 674D9G10 674D9G11 674D9G1 674D9G D8G D8G0 4976D8G0 4976D8G D8G D8G08 Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on NB TRI-PAC and PB TRI-PAC. Table -6. Undervoltage Release Coil Data Voltage Breaker Type (ac) FB TRI-PAC Table -7. Undervoltage Release Coil Data Voltage (ac) Coil Amperes Series Resistance (Ohms),000,000 6,000 6, , Breaker Type LA TRI-PAC, PB TRI-PAC Coil Amperes External Series Resistance (Ohms) 0,000,000 1,00 Total VA D6G0 7D6G0 7D6G06 7D6G07 7D6G08 7D0G06 7D0G07 7D0G08 7D0G09 7D0G10 Total VA NB TRI-PAC Coil Amperes LCL Coil Amperes.0 External Series Resistance (Ohms),000 0,000 16,00 6,00 674D9G08 674D9G01 674D9G0 674D9G0 674D9G0 674D9G D8G D8G1 4976D8G1 4976D8G D8G D8G18 Total VA 6 Total VA Discount Symbol CB-

265 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Accessories -6 Rear Connected Studs Rear Connected Studs For complete stud assembly, order a stud and appropriate tube based on thickness of customer s mounting panel. A short stud must be assembled adjacent to a long stud to maintain clearances required by Underwriters Laboratories. Two studs are required per pole. Note: Not UL listed. Note: Two 400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud. Panelboard Connecting Straps Panelboard Connecting Strap For connecting line end of breakers to panelboard bus. Note: Not UL listed. Table -8. Panelboard Connecting Straps Ampere Connector Type Power Panelboards (Convertible) for TRI-PAC FB and FCL Breakers Bus Spacing.-Inch (88.9 mm) Center Outside Center Outside Center Outside -Pole Mtg. Bracket -Pole Mtg. Bracket 1C7G01 1C7G0 1C7G0 1C7G04 1C7G01 1C7G0 64BH01 64BH0 For LCL Breakers Bus Spacing.-Inch (88.9 mm) Short Medium Long Mtg. Bracket Kit (1 Required) 17C8G01 17C8G0 17C8G0 71B044G01 Table -9. Studs for FCL and FB TRI-PAC Mounting Panel Stud Thickness Length Inches (mm) FCL and FB TRI-PAC Breakers 1.00 (.4) Short Long (17..8) Short Long.8.6 (9. 1.9) Short Long..1 ( ) Short Long Included at no charge when ordered with stud. Table -0. Studs for LCL, LA TRI-PAC and NB TRI-PAC Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stud Ampere LCL, LA TRI-PAC Breakers NB TRI-PAC Breakers , 0, 00 and 400 ampere frames only. Plug-in Adapter Kits Diameter and Thread.7 (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) 16.7 (19.1) 16 Plug-in Adapter Kit 1.1 (8.7) (8.7) (8.7) 1 1. (1.7) 1 1. (1.7) 1 1D874G01 1D874G0 1D874G01 1D874G0 1D874G01 1D874G0 1D874G01 1D874G0 For rear connected applications such as switchboards. Facilitates ease of installation and front removal of breaker. Includes conductor for mounting on breaker, plug-in mounting blocks with matching conductor, rear studs and mounting hardware. Order two mounting block style numbers when line and load are required; order one mounting block style number when either line or load is required. Table -1. FB TRI-PAC and FCL Breakers (Flat Bar Type) Description 1 Mounting Block, Line or Load -Pole, Ampere 1480D1G06 -Pole, 10 Ampere -Pole, Ampere -Pole, 10 Ampere These plug-in adapter kits are UL listed as recognized components. Extension Back of Breaker.47 (18.9) 7.97 (0.4) (6.9).0 (19.7) 8.00 (0.) 10.0 (66.7).0 (19.7) 10.0 (66.7) Tube Length Inches (mm) 1.06 (6.9).44 (87.) 1.8 (.1).7 (9.) 1.69 (4.9) 4.06 (10.1).00 (0.8) 4.8 (110.7) Table -. LCL Breakers (Threaded Stud Type) Table -. NB TRI-PAC Breakers (Flat Bar Type) Not UL listed. Table -4. TRI-PAC LA Breakers (Threaded Stud Type) Description Mounting Blocks, Line and Load Not UL listed. B9446H0 B9446H4 B9446H1 B9446H B9446H B9446H6 B9446H B9446H7 Stud 0B78G1 0B78G16 0B78G17 6BG01 6BG0 6BG0 7B7G04 7B7G0 Description Mounting Blocks, Line and Load -Pole -Pole 1C644G 1C644G6 1 Mounting Block, Line and Load -Pole -Pole 0D010G1 0D010G16 Description 1 Mounting Block, Line or Load NB TRI-PAC, Poles NB TRI-PAC, Poles 614DG0 614DG04 -Pole 1C644G41 -Pole 1C644G4 1 Mounting Block, Line Only -Pole 0D010G17 -Pole 0D010G19 1 Mounting Block, Load Only -Pole -Pole 0D010G18 0D010G0 Discount Symbol CB-

266 -66 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Accessories May 008 Mounting Block for NB TRI-PAC Breakers Table -. Mounting Block Ampere NB TRI-PAC Not UL listed. Insulated base with front removable bolted connection. Extended Line Terminal Shields Extended Line Terminal Shield For shielding line side terminal connections. One shield required per breaker. Order separately when needed. Sold only in lots of 10, including hardware. Table -6. Extended Line Terminal Shields Breaker Frame of Poles FB TRI-PAC, FCL LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC Not UL listed. Insulated base with front removable bolted connection. Base Mounting Hardware Order separately when needed. Table -7. Base Mounting Hardware Breaker Frame 4990D16G D16G0 6B9G01 14C40G0 08B996G0 Handle Locks Handle Lock Non-Padlockable For prevention of unintentional operation of breaker. Fits over breaker handle and may be removed. Padlockable For prevention of unauthorized operation of breaker. Is non-removable once installed on breaker. Meets Underwriters Laboratories and California Code requirements. Note: All breakers are trip free and will trip with handle locks attached. Cannot be used when handle extension is used. Table -8. Handle Locks Breaker Frame Not UL listed. Insulated base with front removable bolted connection. Handle Extension Table -9. Handle Extension Non-padlockable (No FCL, LCL, NB TRI-PAC) FB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC 9B71H01 8B96G01 8B96G01 Padlockable (No FCL, LCL, NB TRI-PAC) FB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC Breaker Frame 76A74G01 7B91G0 Kirk Key Interlock Availability: FB, LA, NB, PB TRI-PACs. Permits interlocking of two breakers or one breaker with other devices. Before breaker can be closed, key must be inserted and turned in breaker interlock. Breaker must be opened before key can be removed. It can then be inserted in interlock or other devices to permit their closure. Requests and orders should completely outline interlocking scheme, ultimate user and his address. Note: Not available for FCL or LCL breakers. Mechanical Interlocks For mechanically interlocking a pair of breakers so that only one may be closed at one time, but both may be open simultaneously. Note: Included with frame. Walking Beam Type Mounts on panel (not included) at rear of breaker. Standard breaker spacing: LA TRI-PAC, NB TRI-PAC: 8-1/ inches (1.9 mm) center to center; FB TRI- PAC: 4-/8 inches (111.1 mm) center to center; PB TRI-PAC: 1-1/4 inches (11. mm) center to center. Order as a set of two special factory drilled breakers and one walking beam interlock. Specify breaker type, panel thickness and center-to-center dimension of breakers. Note: Included with frame. Not UL listed. Not available on drawout breakers. FB TRI-PAC, FCL LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC 1C678G18 1C678G B7G Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion Treatment Treatment can be provided to meet customer s specific atmospheric conditions. Moisture-fungus treating material used meets JAN-T-1; treatment meets MIL-V-17a. Requests and orders should specify government specifications or conditions to be met. LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC Included with frame. 7B99G01 11C6G01 66C78G0 Sliding Bar Type (Field Mountable) Mounts on panel (not included) fitting over front of breakers. Standard breaker spacing: LA TRI-PAC, NB TRI-PAC: 8-1/ inches (1.9 mm); FB TRI-PAC: 4-/16 inches (106.4 mm) center to center. Note: Included with frame. Not available for FCL or LCL breakers. Note: Included with frame. Discount Symbol CB-

267 May 008 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Accessories -67 Motor Operators Motor operators provide complete remote control by means of a pushbutton or similar pilot device. Positive switching action is accomplished by use of an operating arm engaging the breaker handle. The unit is energized momentarily to actuate the lever arm moving it to either the ON or OFF position. The control is broken by an internal cutoff switch. Means for emergency manual operation is provided. Note: The pilot device must be maintained contact type for FB TRI-PAC, FCL mechanisms; momentary contact type for all others. Motor operators are available with motors rated 10 Vac, 08 Vac and 40 Vac. Note: ac voltage rated operators are UL listed as recognized components. The 480 volt operators utilize a 10 Vac motor in conjunction with a 480/40 to 10 volt dual voltage transformer. (On LA and larger operators, the transformer is supplied for separate mounting by the customer.) For FB TRI-PAC/FCL Breakers For NB TRI-PAC Breakers For LA TRI-PAC Breakers For PB TRI-PAC Breakers Note: The motor operator is intended only for infrequent operation in line with Underwriters Laboratories endurance standard for AB molded case breakers. Table -40. Motor Operator Selection Type Breaker ac Voltage dc Voltage FCL LCL FB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC 66D148G1 664D4G8 66D148G11 607D97G 664D4G6 661DG01 66D148G10 664D4G86 66D148G04 607D97G 664D4G68 661DG04 66D148G17 664D4G84 66D148G1 607D97G 664D4G66 661DG0 66D148G17 664D4G8 66D148G1 607D97G4 664D4G67 661DG0 664D4G77 607D97G44 664D4G8 661DG17 664D4G88 Table -41. Back Mounting Plates Type Breaker 10, 08, 40, 480 Vac FB-P/FCL 18C01G01 Table -4. Motor Data Type Breaker Motor Inrush Current, Ampere (Peak) Continuous Current (rms) Operating Time, Open or Close Type Hp 10 Volts 08 Volts 40 Volts 10 Volts 08 Volts 40 Volts FB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC Split Phase Reversing Reversing Reversing 1/ Seconds 1 Cycles 1 Cycles 10 Cycles Discount Symbol CB-

268 -68 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Accessories May 008 Drawout Frame Drawout Frame Product Description These drawout frames are for use with standard -pole Eaton s Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers. They consist of two separate parts; stationary mounting frame and movable carrier frame. Slide rails are drawer-type, and a screw mechanism is used to engage or withdraw the movable carrier frame. The drawout frames have three positions: connected, test and disconnected. The frames do not include a safety tripping interlock, or secondary contacts. These are optional items and may be ordered at additional cost. Breakers mounted in the drawout frames can be equipped with standard breaker accessories including shunt trip, undervoltage release, auxiliary switch, alarm switch and motor operator. Table -4. Selection Data Breaker Stationary Mounting Frame Movable Carrier Frame Type NB TRI-PAC 60D8G09 608D4G1 Drawout for FB and LA TRI-PAC, FCL and LCL Circuit Breakers are not available. PB TRI-PAC movable is available factory-installed only. Order by description. Secondary Contacts These are used to disconnect auxiliary circuits when attachments such as shunt trip or motor operator are used. Available in multiples of four contacts with a maximum of contacts for the NB TRI-PAC. They must be factory mounted. Order by description as similar to stationary or moving frame and specify number of contacts required. Standard Installation Order one stationary mounting frame and one movable carrier frame. Order breakers without terminals or rear connectors. Order any attachments desired (shunt trip, undervoltage release, etc.). Order secondary contacts as required: A shunt trip, undervoltage release or alarm switch requires two contacts A 1A-1B auxiliary switch requires three contacts A motor operator requires a maximum of four contacts Others as required Racking Crank A special crank to engage or withdraw the moving portion of the drawout. A standard 1/ inch (1.7 mm) hex socket with extension can be used for this purpose. Table -44. Racking Crank 76A767G01 Cell Switches Mounted on Drawout Frames, All s Up to four switches can be provided. Order by description. Each switch provides NO and NC contact that transfers before reaching the test position when being withdrawn, and after the test position when being racked in. Note: Handle mechanisms for current limiting breaker, see Electrical Aftermarket Products and Services CA E. Discount Symbol CB-

269 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Supplementary Protectors SPHM -69 SPHM Supplementary Protector Single-Pole -Pole -Pole Product Description IEC breaker recognized by UL under UL Used to provide overcurrent protection where branch protection (for example UL 489 MCCB) is already provided or not required. Installed as a component within or part of an appliance or a piece of electrical equipment. Ideal replacement for fuses that are applied as a supplementary protector i.e., in addition to branch protection (if required). mm DIN-rail mountable, utilizing the molded spring clip. Light Gray case with Off White handle, that is marked O for OFF and I for ON. UL File E69. Application Description Cutler-Hammer Supplementary Protectors by Eaton Corporation are ideal for providing protection in a multitude of applications, including: Motor control circuits. Control power transformers. Relays. Contactor coils. PLC I/O points. Lighting circuits. Fluctuating ambients. High vibration. Shock resistant. Features, Benefits and Functions Environmental, Vibration and Shock Resistant: Mil-spec qualification for fungus resistance, humidity, salt spray resistance and shock vibration resistance. Heat Induced Nuisance Tripping Eliminated: The protector is designed to hold in at % continuous rated current, regardless of ambient temperatures from -40º to +8ºC. Immediate Reset After Trip: The protector can be reset (closed) immediately after an overcurrent trip without a cooling off period. 1/ Cycle High Inrush Tolerance 8X (standard), 18X and X: The protector is available with different levels of tolerance to 1/ cycle current spikes standard tolerance is 8X the continuous current rating; in addition 18X and X are also available. Overcurrent Curves, Long, Medium or Short Delay: Time characteristic curves are available as Short, Medium and Long Delay. Integral Auxiliary Switch (optional selection): One auxiliary switch (a or b) can be factory installed per pole a separate pole for auxiliary is NOT required. Contact Eaton for price adder. Precise Overcurrent Calibration: The protector can be precisely calibrated to a wide variety of current ratings, from 0.1 to 0 continuous amperes. DIN-Rail Mountable: The protector can be easily mounted, utilizing its quick release spring clip to attach it to a mm DIN-rail. Standards and Certifications UL recognized under UL CSA. No.. VDE IEC CE marked.

270 -70 Hydraulic-Magnetic Supplementary Protectors SPHM May 008 Product Specifications The SPHM Supplementary Protector is a dual rated product for both ac and dc supplies, in accordance with UL 1077, CSA., VDE 0660 and IEC standards. It is to be applied in conjunction with a branch protector (if branch protection is required) and can be a replacement for similarly applied fuses. Its advantages over fuses are that it is resettable and the device s status is easily and clearly identified by the position of the handle. In addition to this, the user is able to select a device that precisely fits the application (of which there are many) due to the availability of a wide range of current ratings, three levels of inrush tolerance (8X, 18X or X) and flexible time characteristic curves (Short, Medium and Long Delay). In addition to this, the SPHM s protection performance is not adversely affected and is resistant to abnormal or changing ambient temperatures or even excessive environmental factors. The design allows it to be utilized in environments that can expose it to fungus, shock or out of the ordinary vibration. Technical Data and Specifications Table -. Short Circuit Capacity Standards and Approvals Ampere Volts ac 0/60 Hz Volts dc Interruption Capacity (I cu = I cs ) UL 1077 CSA. VDE 0660 IEC / / Approximate Dimensions.74 (18.8) 1.48 (7.6). (6.4).96 (7.). (8.9) 4.14 (10.) 1.77 (.0) Figure -67. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Not for Construction Purposes Table -46. SPHM Shipping Data Pole Configuration Pack Quantity Pack Dimensions in Inches (mm) Pack Weight Lbs oz. (kg) x.94 x.1 (.1 x.1 x 10.0).0 x.94 x.1 (.1 x.1 x 10.0).4 x.94 x.1 (89.9 x.1 x 10.0).4 x.94 x.1 (89.9 x.1 x 10.0) 7 oz. (.0) 1 oz. (.4) 1 lb. oz. (.1) 1 lb. 7 oz. (.6)

271 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Supplementary Protectors SPHM -71 Trip Curves Trip Time Seconds 10, Table -47. Percent of Rated Current vs. Trip Delay at ºC; Breakers Not Preloaded Percent Overload Delay Maximum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Delay Minimum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Current Percent of Ampere Figure X Continuous Current Curve, Medium Delay, Option M Trip Time Seconds 10, Table -48. Percent of Rated Current vs. Trip Delay at ºC; Breakers Not Preloaded Percent Overload Delay Maximum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Delay Minimum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Current Percent of Ampere Figure X Continuous Current Curve, Short Delay, Option S

272 -7 Hydraulic-Magnetic Supplementary Protectors SPHM May 008 Trip Time Seconds 10, Table -49. Percent of Rated Current vs. Trip Delay at ºC; Breakers Not Preloaded Percent Overload Delay Maximum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Delay Minimum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Current Percent of Ampere Figure X Continuous Current Curve 10, Long Delay, Option L Trip Time Seconds 10, Table -0. Percent of Rated Current vs. Trip Delay at ºC; Breakers Not Preloaded Percent Overload Delay Maximum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Delay Minimum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Current Percent of Ampere Figure X Continuous Current Curve 0, Medium Delay, Option M Trip Time Seconds 10, Table -1. Percent of Rated Current vs. Trip Delay at ºC; Breakers Not Preloaded Percent Overload Delay Maximum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Delay Minimum (Seconds) No Trip May Trip Current Percent of Ampere Figure X Continuous Current Curve 0, Short Delay, Option S

273 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Supplementary Protectors SPHM -7 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere 100 Figure -7. X Continuous Current Curve 1, Long Delay, Option L 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere 100 Figure -74. X Continuous Current Curve, Medium Delay, Option M 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere 100 Figure -7. X Continuous Current Curve, Short Delay, Option S

274 -74 Hydraulic-Magnetic Supplementary Protectors SPHM May 008 Product Selection Table -. SPHM ing System SPHM H M Type Supplementary Protector Hydraulic-Magnetic Poles Code Poles Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole Maximum of 40 amperes available at x inrush. UL recognized to 0 Vac, ka above 0 amperes. One A or B contact maximum per pole. Contacts will be arranged left to right (e.g., BAB suffix on -pole breaker). Contact Eaton for availability and price. Inrush Time Delay Code Delay Voltage Code Delay Curve H 8X 0/60 Hz ac/dc R 18X 0/60 Hz ac/dc Y X 0/60 Hz ac/dc S Switch 0/60 Hz ac/dc M S L M S L M S Medium Short Long Medium Short Long Medium Short W Switch Current Code Current (Amperes) 00R1 0R 0R0 0R R R Auxiliary Switch Code Current A B Normally Open Normally Closed Table -. SPHM Product Selection Continuous Current Ampere 18X (Standard Inrush Tolerance) Medium Delay Curve 0 1-Pole 77 Vac -Pole 77/480 Vac -Pole 77/480 Vac 4-Pole 77/480 Vac SPHM1RM00R1 SPHM1RM0R SPHM1RM0R0 SPHM1RM0R7 SPHM1RM0001 SPHM1RM0R SPHM1RM000 SPHM1RM07R SPHM1RM0010 SPHM1RM001 SPHM1RM000 SPHM1RM00 SPHM1RM000 SPHMRM00R1 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM0R0 SPHMRM0R7 SPHMRM0001 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM000 SPHMRM07R SPHMRM0010 SPHMRM001 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00R1 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM0R0 SPHMRM0R7 SPHMRM0001 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM000 SPHMRM07R SPHMRM0010 SPHMRM001 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00 SPHMRM000 SPHM4RM00R1 SPHM4RM0R SPHM4RM0R0 SPHM4RM0R7 SPHM4RM0001 SPHM4RM0R SPHM4RM000 SPHM4RM07R SPHM4RM0010 SPHM4RM001 SPHM4RM000 SPHM4RM00 SPHM4RM000 Continuous Current Ampere Pole 0 Vac SPHM1RM00 SPHM1RM0040 SPHM1RM000 -Pole 0 Vac SPHMRM00 SPHMRM0040 SPHMRM000 -Pole 0 Vac SPHMRM00 SPHMRM0040 SPHMRM000 4-Pole 0 Vac SPHM4RM00 SPHM4RM0040 SPHM4RM000 For stocking information: please contact Eaton for current stocking situation. To identify catalog number for other Inrush and Delay categories, replace underlined letters from Selection above. Contact Eaton for availability and price. Discount Symbol SP-1

275 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Heinemann -7 Heinemann Hydraulic- Magnetic Circuit Breakers Product Description Eaton has combined Heinemann and Cutler-Hammer technologies to give customers the best protective solutions available in the world from 1 to 8,000 volts. Heinemann offers product designers the broadest ranges of hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers from 0.1 to 100 amperes. Nuisance Tripping Eliminated Heinemann hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers offer three major advantages: Elimination of nuisance tripping caused by high ambient temperatures in or near the installation. The breaker responds only to current variations, not to temperature change. Continuous operation at % current. There is no such assurance with a thermal device, which may fail to carry rated current when subjected to above normal ambient temperatures. A Heinemann breaker rated at 0 amperes, for example, will sustain 0 amperes, even at elevated temperatures. Derating and other forms of temperature compensation are unnecessary. Immediate reset. Since there are no thermal elements, heat build-up is not a factor. Therefore, no cooling off period is required after a fault. Guaranteed Power Availability Using a controlled time delay, Heinemann circuit breakers can eliminate nuisance tripping caused by transient current surges. In any installation where a power supply or compressor motor is on the line, an inrush of current occurs when the equipment is first turned on. The bigger the equipment, the larger the surge. Although inrush surges are, in fact, transient overloads, they usually pose no threat of damage to the line or the equipment. So, it s simply not necessary or even desirable to interrupt the power when they occur. The hydraulically controlled timedelay mechanism of a Heinemann breaker eliminates nuisance tripping without reducing the overload protection. The delay is inversely proportional to the overload; response is quicker on large overloads where greater potential danger exists, and slower on small overloads. For sensitive electronic equipment, Heinemann breakers can be purchased with an instantaneous trip feature to prevent damage. Precision Protection The current rating of the hydraulicmagnetic circuit breaker is determined by the number of wire turns in the load sensing coil. By altering the number of turns and the wire size, Heinemann can provide a breaker of virtually any rating within the unit s overall current carrying range. Regardless of your needs, we can deliver custom equipment protection, even at fractional amperages. Shock and Vibration A precision, counterbalanced armature design prevents mechanical tripping due to shock and vibration. This makes the Heinemann family of products perfect anywhere shock and vibration are a concern. Some popular applications include railcars, mobile industrial equipment, generators and marine power distribution. Global Ready Heinemann breakers are tested to meet global certifications and standards including UL, CE, VDE, TUV and CSA. Mission Control With a variety of control and indicating options, the Heinemann line of circuit breakers allows you to take control of your complex operations. Available with integral remote trip coils and indicating contacts, Heinemann breakers can be integrated into your control logic. We also offer a lighted handle design that can allow operators to see breaker conditions at a distance. Self-Adjusting The time delay feature is self-adjusting to ambient temperature conditions. At high ambients where the overload tolerance of most circuits is lowered, the viscosity of the fluid in the breaker s dashpot is lessened, and the time delay is thereby shortened. At low temperatures, the response is correspondingly longer to allow for cold equipment startups. Features, Benefits and Functions Hydraulic-Magnetic Hydraulic-Magnetic Precision custom calibration. Requires no derating (% rated). Ambient compensating (-40ºC to +8ºC). Immediate reset after fault. Broad range of integral internal accessories. Provides equipment and wire protection. Fuse Protection Fuse Protection No-reset capability. Fuses degrade over time. Protection effected by ambient temperature. Requires more panel space. No accessories available. Provides equipment and wire protection. Thermal-Magnetic E1S Thermal-Magnetic Breaker Fixed calibration band, wide variation. Device must be derated to 80% load. Protection effected by ambient temperature. Requires cooling-off period. Accessories in multi-pole devices only. Provides basic wire protection.

276 -76 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Heinemann May 008. Self-Cleaning Contacts Sliding pivot point causes a wiping action across the contacts each time a breaker is switched. This cleaning motion helps keep surface resistance low, extending contact life. (Contacts are made of silver alloy for minimal wattage loss.) 1. Broad Selection of Terminal Styles Pressure connector, threaded stud, hook, bus, plug-in and quick-connect terminals (with holes for optional soldering) are available.. Efficient Blowout Grid U-shaped grid plates quickly draw out, fragment and extinguish contact arc. Charring and pitting are minimized. 4. Sturdy Toggle and Latch Strong, durable and highly efficient. Latch is shock-resistant, yet provides very fast operation. Trip-free construction makes it impossible to hold the breaker closed against a fault. (Even when handle is held in ON position, contacts trip free of fault condition.). Balanced Armature Counterbalanced armature design helps prevent mechanical tripping caused by shock and vibration. Meets MIL-STD-0 requirements. The Hydraulic Principal The hydraulic-magnetic technology used in the Heinemann line of circuit breakers delivers precision protection and a controlled response to changes in load current. Utilizing a coil of wire to measure the magnetic flux produced in the circuit, in combination with the dampening effect of an oilfilled tube, Heinemann circuit breakers provide reliable, consistent protection characteristics in all environments. The Heinemann hydraulic-magnetic circuit breaker operates on load-current produced magnetic flux variation in a solenoid. The coil is wound around a hermetically sealed, non-magnetic tube containing a spring-loaded, moveable iron core and a silicone liquid fill. With the load current either at or below the breaker s nominal rating, the magnetic flux is of insufficient strength to move the core, and it remains at the end of the tube opposite the armature. Inside a Heinemann Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breaker On an overload, the magnetic flux force increases, pulling the iron core into the coil toward the armature end of the tube. This core insertion reduces the reluctance of the magnetic circuit and further increases the strength of the magnetic field. The silicone liquid regulates the core s speed of travel, creating a controlled trip delay that is inversely proportional to the magnitude of the overload. If the overload subsides before the core reaches the pole piece, the core returns to its original position, and the breaker does not trip. (For non-delay applications, the breaker is modified to omit the intentional delay.) 6. Two-Position Switching Two handle positions, ON and OFF (no ambiguous reset position). After fault clearance, simply snap the handle back to ON. 7. Load-Sensing Coil Magnetic unit measures current, not temperature, making it unnecessary to derate for high-ambient service. Coil will carry % rated load as specified in the appropriate response curve. 8. Fungus-Resistant Case Circuit breakers are housed in special plastic casings that significantly reduce fungal growth and contamination. When the magnetic flux reaches a predetermined value, the armature is attracted to the pole piece and the breaker trips. (The breaker may trip before the core reaches the pole piece if the critical flux value is achieved first.) On very heavy overloads or short circuits, the flux produced by the coil above, regardless of core position, is sufficient to pull in the armature. This circuit interruption occurs with no intentional delay a highly desirable response characteristic. Armature Pulled In Overload Subsides Before Core Reaches Pole Piece Core at End of Tube Opposite Armature

277 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Time Delay Curves and Typical Applications -77 Technical Data Personalized Protection To Fit Your Application With advanced hydraulic-magnetic technology, we re able to match our breaker performance to meet your exact application requirements. Whether you choose a standard curve, or one of our special application curves, we re sure to have a device that meets your needs. In addition, if you have specific requirements that can t be met with one of our off-the-shelf products, we can custom configure a breaker to protect your equipment. To find out more about custom breaker solutions, or for application assistance, you can contact our Technical Resource Center at or via at trc@eaton.com. Time Delay Curves and Typical Applications The curves shown indicate the magnitude and duration of overloads, which will be tolerated before tripping occurs. By selecting the proper curve, breaker response can be closely matched to safe operating limits of the equipment or circuitry. The following are standard curves for typical applications on ac and dc circuits. Curve 1 Allows the largest and most prolonged overload needed to prevent nuisance tripping on motor circuits. Curve A medium delay accommodates mixed loads consisting of lights, motors and resistive heating, where the breaker is rated to the wiring instead of to any specific load. Curve Permits a very brief time delay period before tripping and is used for protection of transformers and electronic circuits. Trip Time Seconds 10, Current Percent of Ampere 10 Figure -76. Curves 1, and, dc 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current 10 Figure -77. Curves 1, and, 0/60 Hz 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Figure -78. Curves 1, and, 400 Hz

278 -78 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Time Delay Curves and Typical Applications May 008 Curve P Non-time-delay breakers have no deliberately imposed delay and will trip instantaneously at any load above 10% of rated current. Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere 10 Figure -79. Curve P, Non-delay Curve 10 High Inrush Time delays similar to Curves 1, and with high-inrush surge capabilities. 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere 10 Figure -80. Curve 10 Curve 0 High Inrush Time delays similar to Curves 1, and with high-inrush surge capabilities. 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere 10 Figure -81. Curve 0

279 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Time Delay Curves and Typical Applications -79 Curve 0 High Inrush Time delays similar to Curves 1, and with high-inrush surge capabilities. 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere 10 Curve High Inrush For ferroresonant power supplies, distribution transformers, data processing equipment, etc., which may draw starting surges as high as 000% normal load. To accommodate brief surges of this magnitude for approximately a half cycle of line current, or 8. milliseconds (long enough to get the equipment online without tripping), high inrush models are available. Figure -8. Curve 0 10,000 0 Trip Time Seconds Current Percent of Ampere Figure -8. Curve

280 -80 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Internal Circuits May 008 Product Specifications All time-delay curves shown are based on the fact that circuit breakers are not preloaded. (Breakers do not carry current prior to application of overload for calibration testing.) Curves are plotted at an ambient temperature of 77ºF (ºC), with breakers in the standard wall-mount position. Heinemann Breakers are % Rated All circuit breakers shall hold % rated load continuously. Time-delay circuit breakers may trip between 101% and 1% of rated load; must trip at 1% and above, as shown on the time-delay curve selected. Breakers rated for ac/dc operation may trip between 101% and 1%; must trip at 1% and above. Non-time-delay circuit breakers may trip instantaneously between 101% and 10% of rated load; must trip instantaneously at 10% and above. Ambient Compensating Time delay will decrease as ambient temperature is raised and increase as ambient is lowered. Note: These curves are presented for product selection purposes only. For detailed curve information by frame, please visit Heinemann circuit breakers are available in a variety of electrical configurations. When ordering a breaker, you must specify the internal circuit type. Each pole can be configured separately, making the design flexible around your application. The most common configuration is Series Trip which means that the magnetic coil is in series with the main power circuit of the breaker, providing overcurrent protection. By configuring poles separately, you can design equipment that will work in multiple environments. For instance, by configuring individual poles with different amperage ratings, you could design your equipment to work on different voltages. You could also use the relay trip function to shut down the power circuit while leaving the control circuit energized during a system fault. Table -4. Internal Circuits Circuit Diagram Description Switch Internal Circuits Represented: 0, 1 Switch only (without coil) with or without auxiliary contact. Series Trip Internal Circuits Represented:, 8 The contacts and the coil are in series. It is often used as the main switch. Series Trip With Auxiliary Contact C NO NC Internal Circuits Represented:, 9 C NO NC The contacts and the coil are in series. Auxiliary contacts are placed behind the circuit breaker and mechanically connected to the releasing system. Shunt Tap Internal Circuit Represented: Enables two loads to be checked by means of a single circuit breaker. However, it only releases if there is an overload in the main circuit. The sum of the two nominal currents must not exceed the peak current of the contacts. Shunt Terminal With this execution, it is also possible to adjust the tripping through a potentiometer between the load terminals.

281 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Internal Circuits -81 Table -4. Internal Circuits (Continued) Circuit Diagram Description Relay Trip Internal Circuit Represented: 6 Relay tripping can be used for releasing the circuit breaker by the intermediary of a monitor or a safety device installed at a distance. The contacts are electrically separated from the coil. Consequently, all the currents and voltages within the permissible limits can be used. Coils are either current or voltage sensitive. Relay Terminals Dual Control (DUCON) Internal Circuits Represented: 1, The version is used both for the protection of the load finding itself in series with the circuit breaker and for the release via a voltage. The main coil is in series with the contact and the DUCON coil is shunt trip. Shunt Terminal Dual Control DUCON (Series + Relay) Internal Circuits Represented: 16, 6 Dual Control DUCON allows separate control of the shunt trip coil when the load is not energized. Similar to a shunt trip coil in a molded case breaker. Relay Terminals Mid-Trip Internal Circuit Represented: 98 Series overload, mid-trip handle position.

282 -8 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Series May 008 Product Selection KD Series J Series KD Series Pushbutton A low-cost pushbutton supplementary protector for electrical equipment. Designed to fit a standard /8 round or D shaped panel cutout. With a variety of accessories, the KD Series is a perfect replacement for traditional panel-mounted fuse holders. Table -. KD Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Thermal 1 0 Vac Vdc 0 Vdc PROPAK Series 0. 0 A 0. 1 A A 1 ka 0. ka 0. ka J Series Circuit Breaker Small lightweight hydraulic-magnetic circuit breaker perfect for telecom and marine applications. Available in ratings from amperes, the J Series offers a variety of options including snap-in mounting and rocker style handles. The compact size of the J Series makes it well suited for applications where space comes at a premium. Table -7. J Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic 1 4 With series fuse. 1 Vac 0 Vac 41 Vac Vdc 7 Vdc 80 Vdc 0. 0 A A A A A A 1 ka ka 1. ka ka ka 1 ka SPHM Series PROPAK Series Circuit Breaker Miniature single- or -pole circuit breaker available with paddle or rocker handle. Available with or without illumination and a variety of internal accessories including auxiliary switches and remote tripping options. Carries UL 1077, CSA and VDE approvals. Table -6. PROPAK Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic 1 0 Vac 0 Vdc 7 Vdc A A A 1 ka 1 ka 1 ka SPHM Series Circuit Breaker The SPHM Series Circuit Breaker snaps easily onto a standard mm DIN rail. This saves valuable installation time. Available with a wide range of accessories, the SPHM Series is the perfect alternative to DIN-rail mounted fuse blocks. Table -8. SPHM Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic Vac 480/77 Vac 80 Vdc A A A ka ka ka

283 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Series -8 AMR Series GH Series AMR Series Circuit Breaker Ultra-high interrupting circuit breaker for single- or multi-pole applications. The AMR Series delivers significant performance advantages in a compact package. Available as a UL 489 listed device, suitable for branch circuit protection, the AMR can be used in a wide variety of applications, including lighting and power distribution equipment. Also carries UL 1077, CSA and TUV approvals. Table -9. AMR Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic ka with series fuse. With series fuse. C Series /40 Vac 0 Vac 77 Vac 480 Vac 80 Vdc 1 Vdc 0. 0 A 0.1 A 0. 0 A A 0.1 A 0.1 A 10 ka ka 10 ka ka ka ka GH Series Circuit Breaker The GH Series offers all of the advantages of a completely magnetic -pole breaker with a 14,000 ampere interrupting capacity. Perfect for applications in extreme environments where thermal-magnetic breakers would have otherwise been selected. The GH breaker is UL listed (489/08) for branch circuit applications. Table -61. GH Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic 1 AM1P Series 480 Vac 0 Vdc 0. A 0. A 14 ka 14 ka C Series Circuit Breaker High-current circuit breaker for single- or multi-pole applications, the C Series is one of Eaton s most versatile breakers. With a Vac rating and the ability to select from a variety of trip curves, the C Series is an alternative to thermalmagnetic breakers in harsh environments or when precision is essential. Table -60. C Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity AM1P Series Circuit Breaker The AM1P breaker is designed for telecommunication sites with high current demands and limited space. With a 0 ampere current carrying capacity and improved interrupting ratings up to 0 ka, the AM1P breaker gives unparalleled performance in site applications. The AM1P series is UL 489A listed. Table -6. AM1P Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic Multiple 80 Vdc 0 A up to 0 ka Hydraulic- Magnetic 1 4 With series fuse. 40 Vac 480 Vac Vac 1 Vdc 1 A 0.1 A A 0.1 A ka Up to 10 ka Up to 10 ka ka

284 -84 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Series May 008 GJ Series GJ1P Series GJ Series Circuit Breakers High-current circuit breakers in a compact package, the GJ Series offers protection up to 0 amperes. Add the precision of hydraulic-magnetic protection on your critical loads over amperes. Table -6. GJ Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic 1 0 Vac 0 Vdc 0. 0 A 0. 0 A 10 ka 10 ka GJ1P Series Circuit Breaker Similar to the GJ, the GJ1P Series has increased capacity and is available in current ratings up to 100 amperes. The GJ1P is a UL 489 listed device delivering superior performance. Table -64. GJ1P Series s Technology Poles Voltage Current Int. Capacity Hydraulic- Magnetic 1 6 Vac 160 Vdc 100 A 100 A ka 10 ka

285 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers KD Series -8 KD Series Standards and Certifications Accessories The KD Series has been tested to meet the requirements of UL 1077, and is recognized as a supplemental protector by UL. We also carry CSA approval for applications in Canada. KD Series Pushbutton Circuit Protector Technical Data and Specifications 0.06 (1.) 0.9 (4.1) Dia. Product Description Dimensions in Inches and (mm) Figure -86. # Retaining Ring The KD Pushbutton Circuit Protector provides circuit protection similar to a fuse but does not require replacement after a fault. This resettable design allows your customer to stay online and eliminate downtime. Features, Benefits and Functions Easy installation The KD Series is easily installed in a /8 round or D-Shaped panel cutout similar to that used on conventional panelmounted fuse holders. It can be mounted from either the front or rear and is held in place by special hardware. Its 1/4 quick-connect terminals are solderable. Resettable pushbutton circuit protector: Provides basic thermal protection s from 0. 0 amperes UL recognized Positive action The KD Pushbutton Circuit Protector trips without delay on short circuit, and with a controlled delay upon sustained overloads upon tripping, the contacts open with a positive snap action, thereby suppressing the arc. Protective covers For applications where equipment may be exposed to dust or moisture, protective boots are available. Two styles are available, one which protects the breaker from splashing water and another which seals the panel opening. 0. (6.4) Dia. 0. (6.4) 0.8 (9.7) ÿ0.09 (.) 0. (6.4) (4.1) 0. Figure -84. Dimensions with Front Mount Clip Installed P E- C S White Button 1.41 (.8) Figure -8. Panel Mounting Hole K 0.7 (19.1) H T I R K- 0.4 Dia. (8.6) Panel Mtg. Hole For Panel Thickness 1/ Thru 1/8 0.8 (9.7) 0.6 (16.0) 0.9 (7.4) 0.0 (0.8) 0.6 (1.7) Figure -87. # Front Mount Clip Product Selection Table -6. KD Series Standard Product Offering Current Amperes (9.1) Max (0.) 0.67 (17.0) KD1-0R KD1-0R0 KD1-0R7 KD1-1 KD1-1R KD1-1R7 KD1- KD1-R KD1- KD1-4 KD1- KD1-6 KD1-7 KD1-8 KD1-9 KD1-10 KD1-1 KD1-0 10º 0.17 (4.) Max. 0.7 (19.1) To order the slip-on boot, choose or for a panel sealing version, purchase Discount Symbol SP-1

286 -86 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers PROPAK Series May 008 PROPAK Series Standards and Certifications The PROPAK series is UL recognized under UL 1077 and carries CSA approval. Each unit carries an interrupting capacity of 1 ka at maximum voltage of 0 Vac or 7 Vdc. Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions in Inches and (mm) PROPAK Hydraulic-Magnetic Breaker Product Description The PROPAK offers the performance of a hydraulic-magnetic breaker in a miniature package. Available in 1- or -pole versions, the PROPAK can be used in a variety of applications up to 0 Vac. All breakers ship with mounting hardware included and have quickconnect terminals for fast installation. Features, Benefits and Functions Time delay options Choose from instantaneous or standard time delay curves or. A high inrush version is also available. Hydraulic-magnetic circuit protector: 1- or -poles 0.1 to 0 amperes Auxiliary switch option Meets MIL-STD for shock, vibration, temperature and humidity Accessories Some popular accessories include optional internal auxiliary contacts and screw terminal adapters. 1. M1 x 1. Knurled Nut. Pressure Washer 4. Hexagon Nut. Auxiliary Contact Terminal 6. Main terminal: Fast-on 6. x 0.8 Figure -88. Type PBB 1-Pole Ø (.) Figure -89. Panel Cut-out 0.1 Ø (.0) 0º Ø1. (90.1) (1.0) 0.98 (.0) 1.0 (.0) 1.40 (.) 1.6 (4.0) I O 1.1 (8.7) 0.0 (.1) Indicator Plates (PBB-PBP Types) Vertical Mount Ordering Ref.: I/O 0160 ON/OFF 0161 Figure -91. Indicator Plates 0.0 (0.8) ON OFF (1.) 1.10 (7.8) 1.8 (.0) 0.0 (.1) Ø 0.48 (1.1) 0.41 (10.) 0.66 (16.8) Figure -90. Type PBB 1-Pole

287 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers PROPAK Series -87 Product Selection Table -66. PROPAK Series ing System PBB 1 A SXA 10 Model PBB = PROPAK Poles 1 = 1-Pole = -Pole Voltage Code A = 0 Vac B = 7 Vdc Function Code = Series Trip = Series Trip with Aux. 6 = Relay Trip Auxiliary Switch = Auxiliary Switch (Must also choose Function Code ) Handle Indication SXA = Vertical Mounting SEA = Horizontal Mounting 0R1 = 0.1 A 0R = 0. A 01 = 1 A 0 = A 0 = A 04 = 4 A Curve P = Instantaneous = Medium Delay = Short Delay Current 0 = A 7R = 7. A 10 = 10 A 1R = 1. A 1 = 1 A 0 = 0 A

288 -88 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers J Series May 008 J Series Standard Style JA Snap-in Mounting JB Rocker Style JC Product Description Eaton s J Series is one of the most versatile breakers offered in the Heinemann product line. The J Series can be used in a wide variety of applications including tele-com, rail, marine and mobile equipment. Multiple mounting and handle configurations allow you to customize your equipment. These include rocker handles, snap-in mounting, sealed toggle actuators and colorcoded handles. Features, Benefits and Functions Compact size The J Series breakers are small and lightweight, saving valuable space in crowded control panels or weight in portable equipment. Since the J Series is magnetically actuated, the breaker generates minimal heat, and breakers can be mounted in densely packed panels with no effect on performance. Easy installation The J Series is designed for fast, easy panel mounting. Its round bezel eliminates square cuts during panel fabrication, and shortens panel production time. Cutout preparation is as simple as punching or drilling three commoncenter holes per breaker. Terminals The J Series is ready to except either standard push-on or screw terminal connections. Accessories Available with integral auxiliary switches, shunt and relay trip options, as well as a variety of external accessories including protective shields and adapter plates. Harsh environments In areas where the breaker may be subjected to water spray or splashing, the J Series is available in a sealed mounting version. Utilizing a molded silicone rubber seal, the exposed handle is protected from the elements when used in conjunction with a sealed panel. For areas requiring a completely sealed breaker, the J Series is also available in a UL 100 Ignition-Protected Construction. Please refer to the Special Application section of this brochure. Standards and Certifications The J Series is ready for your global applications. In addition to UL 1077, the breaker also carries CSA and IEC 80 approvals. Sealed Toggle JE Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions in Inches and (mm) 6- Mtg. Clips ( Per Pole) 0.8 (9.) 0.7 (19.1) 0.1 (.) 0.70 (17.8) 0.0 (0.) 1.90 (48.) 1.6 (9.6) ÿ0.16 (4.1) 0.8 (9.7) ÿ.6 (16.0) (0.8) 1. (1.0) 1.66 (4.) 1.0 (6.7) 7 ± 7 ± 1. (4.) 1.6 (9.6) 1.66 (4.) 1.0 (6.7) Front View 1.9 (49.0) 0. (.6) 0.0 (0.8) TYP. 6 PLCS. 0.7 (19.1) Panel Cutout Figure -9. J Series Basic Dimensions

289 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers J Series -89 Product Selection Stock Availability Standard breaker configurations are available from our regional distribution centers or from one of our,00 distributor locations worldwide. Standard Breaker Configurations The J Series can be ordered in a number of standard configurations utilizing the table to the right. Once you create your catalog number, you can contact our Technical Resource Center for verification and quotations. Custom Applications The J Series is also available in a number of custom configurations to meet your specific application needs. To order a special application breaker, you can visit our Web site at heinemann for a list of custom modifications and information on how to obtain a proprietary catalog number. You may also contact the Technical Resource Center for application information and breaker selection assistance. Table -67. Standard Product Offering 0 Vac/6 Vdc Push-on Terminals Poles Current (Amperes) Curve JA1SDA00010E JA1SDA00010E JA1SDA0R0E JA1SDA0R0E JA1SDA0000E JA1SDA0000E JA1SDA07R0E JA1SDA07R0E JA1SDA00E JA1SDA00E JA1SDA0010E JA1SDA0010E JA1SDA0000E JA1SDA0000E JA1SDA000E JA1SDA000E JA1SDA0000E JA1SDA0000E JASDA00010E JASDA00010E JASDA0R0E JASDA0R0E JASDA0000E JASDA0000E JASDA07R0E JASDA07R0E JASDA00E Poles Current (Amperes) Curve JASDA00E JASDA0010E JASDA0010E JASDA0000E JASDA0000E JASDA000E JASDA000E JASDA0000E JASDA0000E JASDA00010E JASDA00010E JASDA0R0E JASDA0R0E JASDA0000E JASDA0000E JASDA07R0E JASDA07R0E JASDA00E JASDA00E JASDA0010E JASDA0010E JASDA0000E JASDA0000E JASDA000E JASDA000E JASDA0000E JASDA0000E Table -68. J Series ing System JA1S A A E Style JA_S JB_S JC_S JE_S Voltage, Terminal and Frequency Code Code Frequency Terminal Location A T K B V L D E R C W N of Poles 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz 0/60 Hz dc dc dc 60 Hz/dc 60 Hz/dc 60 Hz/dc 400 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz Description Toggle Handle Snap-in Mount Rocker Handle Sealed Toggle Push-on 8- Screw 10- Screw Push-on 8- Screw 10- Screw Push-on 8- Screw 10- Screw Push-on 8- Screw 10- Screw Handle Color White ON/OFF White ON/OFF White ON/OFF N/A Maximum Voltage 77 ac 77 ac 77 ac 6 dc 6 dc 6 dc 0 ac/6 dc 0 ac/6 dc 0 ac/6 dc 0 ac 0 ac 0 ac Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A STD 18X X Internal Circuit 0 Mounting 6- N/A 6- /8-6 Approval Code A = Up to 0 Vac UL 1077 Up to 6 Vdc UL 1077 L = 77 Vac UL Switch Only Series Trip Series Trip w/aux. Shunt/Tap Relay Trip Current Code Current (Amperes) 0R0 0R10 0R 0R0 0R R R Voltage E = 0 0 Vac F = 1 77 Vac G = 41 Vac N = 0 6 Vdc Time Delay Curve 0P = Instant 01 = Long Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Medium 0 = Short 10 = Long Delay 18X Inrush 0 = Medium Delay 18X Inrush 0 = Short Delay 18X Inrush 1 = Long Delay X Inrush = Medium Delay X Inrush = Short Delay X Inrush Choose style and select from 1 to 4 poles, and enter the number in position of the catalog number. For example, a JA1S would identify a 1-pole JA Series breaker. Enter the four digit current rating. For example, use code 001 for a 1 ampere current rating. For fractional amperages, use an R to designate the decimal point. For 0.10 ampere, enter the code 0R10. Non-standard. Consult technical support Discount Symbol SP-1

290 -90 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers SPHM Series May 008 SPHM Series SPHM Series Circuit Breaker Product Description The SPHM Series Circuit Breaker line is designed to provide supplementary protection on ac circuits up to 0 volts or stand-alone overcurrent and shortcircuit protection on dc circuits up to 80 volts. Recognized by UL and CSA, the SPHM Series has the features required by panel builders and meets the requirements of UL 08A when utilized in control circuits. Application Description SPHM Series Circuit Breakers are DINrail mountable for quick installation, and are perfect for a wide range of applications including: Motor control circuits. Control power transformers. Relays. Contactor coils. PLC I/O points. With proven hydraulic-magnetic protection, the SPHM Series Circuit Breaker can be used to provide precision protection regardless of ambient temperature. Features, Benefits and Functions Environmental, vibration and shock resistant Mil-spec qualification for fungus resistance, humidity, salt spray resistance and shock vibration resistance. Heat-induced nuisance tripping eliminated The protector is designed to hold in at % continuous rated current, regardless of ambient temperatures from -40 C to +8 C. Immediate reset after trip The protector can be reset (closed) immediately after an overcurrent trip without a cooling off period. 1/ cycle high inrush tolerance 8X (Standard), 18X and X The protector is available with different levels of tolerance to 1/ cycle current spikes. Standard tolerance is 8X the continuous current rating; in addition 18X and X are also available. Overcurrent curves, long, medium or short delay Time characteristic curves are available as Short, Medium and Long Delay. Integral auxiliary switch (optional selection) One auxiliary switch (a or b) can be factory installed per pole a separate pole for auxiliary is NOT required. Contact Eaton for price adder. Precise overcurrent calibration The protector can be precisely calibrated to a wide variety of current ratings, from 0.1 to 0 continuous amperes. DIN-rail mountable The protector can be easily mounted, utilizing its quick release spring clip to attach it to a mm DIN rail. Standards and Certifications UL recognized under UL 1077, CSA., VDE 0660, IEC Technical Data Dimensions in Inches and (mm).87 (7.0).66 (67.6) 1. (.) 0. (8.4) 0.4 (11.0) 1.14 (9.0) 0.7 (19.1) 1.80 (.7) Panel Cut-Out (Per Pole) 0.76 (19.) LINE NETZ 0. (14.0) Installation mm DIN Mounting Removal (10.0) 4 LAST Figure -9. SPHM Basic Dimensions SPST Auxiliary Switch Connections (Common and Normally Open)

291 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers SPHM Series -91 Product Selection Standard Breaker Configurations The SPHM Series can be ordered in a number of standard configurations utilizing the table to the right. Once you create your catalog number, you can contact our Technical Resource Center for verification and quotations. Custom Applications The SPHM Series is also available in a number of custom configurations to meet your specific application needs. To order a special application breaker, you can visit our Web site at for a list of custom modifications and information on how to obtain a proprietary catalog number. You may also contact the Technical Resource Center for application information and breaker selection assistance. Table -69. SPHM Standard Product Offering Poles Current (Amperes) Curve SPHM1RM00R1 SPHM1RM0R SPHM1RM0R0 SPHM1RM0R7 SPHM1RM0001 SPHM1RM0R SPHM1RM000 SPHM1RM07R SPHM1RM0010 SPHM1RM001 SPHM1RM000 SPHM1RM00 SPHM1RM000 SPHM1RM00 SPHM1RM0040 SPHM1RM000 SPHMRM00R1 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM0R0 SPHMRM0R7 SPHMRM0001 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM000 SPHMRM07R Poles Current Curve (Amperes) SPHMRM0010 SPHMRM001 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00 SPHMRM0040 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00R1 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM0R0 SPHMRM0R7 SPHMRM0001 SPHMRM0R SPHMRM000 SPHMRM07R SPHMRM0010 SPHMRM001 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00 SPHMRM000 SPHMRM00 SPHMRM0040 SPHMRM000 Table -70. SPHM Series ing System SPHM H M Type Poles Inrush Time Delay Current Auxiliary Switch Supplementary Protector Hydraulic Magnetic Code 1 4 Poles 1-Pole -Pole -Pole 4-Pole Code Delay H 8X R 18X Y X S Switch Code Delay Curve M S L M S L M S W Medium Short Long Medium Short Long Medium Short Switch Code 00R1 0R 0R0 0R R RS Current (Amperes) Code A B Current Normally Open Normally Closed Maximum of 40 amperes available at X inrush. UL recognized to 0 Vac, ka above 0 amperes. One A or B contact maximum per pole. Contacts will be arranged left to right (e.g. BAB suffix on -pole breaker). Contact Eaton for availability and price at Discount Symbol SP-1

292 -9 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AMR Series May 008 AMR Series Standard Style (AMR) Illuminated Style (AML) Rocker Style (ACR) Product Description The Heinemann AMR Series is the logical choice for applications requiring greater interrupting performance coupled with the sensitivity of hydraulicmagnetic protection. The precisely tailored time delays and ability to interrupt high currents make them ideal for critical applications. Application Description The AMR Series is designed for global applications, meeting a variety of international standards. It combines the proven high quality and reliability of the former AM Series with the spacing, dielectric and interrupt requirements of the IEC Standard The AMR Series carries the CE Mark, VDE and TUV approvals, and is available with metric hardware for OEMs exporting their equipment overseas. Features, Benefits and Functions Current range up to A 0/60 Hz ac/1 Vdc, 60 A 400 Hz ac. % rated. Plug-in, screw or stud terminals. Handles knurled for positive grip. Operating temperature -40 C to +8 C. Available with internal auxiliary or alarm switch, relay trip function and shunt tap. Shock-tested for shock in accordance with MIL-STD-0. Vibration-tested in accordance with MIL-STD-0. Dielectric strength tested in accordance with MIL-STD-0. Insulation resistance of megaohms minimum at 00 Vdc, per MIL-STD-0. Flammability specifications of UL 94-VO case, UL 94-HB handle. Available with UL 100 Ignition Protected for Marine Applications. Refer to the special applications section for more information. Direct replacement for discontinued AM and NAM/S models. Handle Configurations Standard Black Toggle For industrial and commercial applications, where economical design and construction is a concern. Order Prefix AMR. Illuminated Toggle Provides indication of breaker status via the integral multicolored LED. Can be custom configured for indication of ON, OFF, Tripped or Ready status. Order Prefix AML. Rocker Style Used where style and performance is required. The rocker style handle delivers the performance of the AMR Series with European styling. Order Prefix ACR. Standards and Certifications The AMR Series is UL 489 Listed and CSA certified for branch circuit applications. It is also UL 1077 recognized for use in panels where branch circuit protection is already provided. Available in a wide variety of configurations, the AMR Series is rated as high as amperes at 40 Vac or 80 Vdc. It is the solution for demanding applications requiring up to 0,000 amperes interrupting capacity. The 0,000 amperes interrupting capacity is at 6 Vdc UL 489A, telecom applications. All UL 489 listed configurations are suitable for normal and reverse feed connection, for easy installation. Table -71. UL 489 s Poles Current Voltage KA (Amperes) Vdc 0 1, /40 Vac Vac Vac 10 Approvals UL 1077 recognized. UL 489 listed. UL 489A listed for telecom applications. IEC VDE. TUV.

293 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AMR Series -9 Technical Data Dimensions in Inches and (mm) 0.6 (14.) 0.41 (10.4) ON I.00 (0.8) 0.14 (.6) 1 Dim. X Typical Multi-Pole Terminal Barrier 0.8 (7.1) 0.40 (10.) 1.1 (8.7) (.1) 1 ± 1 ± OFF O (16.8) 0.14 (.6).86 (7.6) Standard Handle Configuration 1.94 (49.).74 (69.6) A1 O OFF/ STD Handle Marking Typical All Configurations.0 (6.) 0.1 (.) x.18- UNC-B Internal THD x.08 Deep Metric THD M x 0. Available.06 (.) Panel Cutout (Optional) ON/I STD Handle Marking Typical All Configurations Figure -94. AMR Handle Configuration and Typical Dimensions 0.9 (7.4) 1.94 (49.) 1.96 (49.8) 0.0 (7.6) 0.4 (10.9) 0.88 (.4) 1.88 (47.8).0 (6.) 0.7 (19.1) ON I O OFF (.) Cut-out for Panel x Holes For (4.) 0.9 (7.4) 0.0 (7.6) 0.71 (18.0) 0.6 (16.0) 0.18 (4.6) 0.48 (1.) x 6- Screws 0.7 (19.1) Figure -9. ACR Typical Dimensions ON 1 1º±º 1º±º OFF (10.) 0. (1.1) 0.66 (16.7).04 (1.7) 0.18 (4.6) 0.14 (.) C NO NC 0.8 (7.1) Line 1.94 (49.) Connect Positive LED Voltage Here & Connect Negative LED Voltage to Black Wire 1.0 Max. Black Wire Load Two 0.16 Dia. Holes Length of Black Wire Specified by Customer Else Supplied 1 Inches (04.8 mm) Long 1. (6.8) 0.76 (19.) 0.91 (.0) 1-Pole Panel Cutout.06 (.4).0 (6.) 1.1 (8.6) 0.7 (19.0) 0.91 (.0).06 (.4) -Pole Panel Cutout Slot Positioned Left or Right, Per Pole Mounting Holes Spaced 0.70" Apart -Pole Panel Cutout Slot Positioned Left, Center or Right, Per Pole Mounting Holes Spaced 0.70" Apart Figure -96. AML Typical Dimensions

294 -94 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AMR Series May 008 Product Selection The following catalog numbers can be ordered from stock. Table -7. AMR Standard Black Toggle Current Current (Amperes) Curve 1-Pole -pole -pole AM1RAAC07DA1 AM1RAAC07DAR AM1RAAC07DA AM1RAAC07DA7R AM1RAAC07DA10 AM1RAAC07DA1 AM1RAAC07DA0 AM1RAAC07DA0 AM1RAAC07DA0 AM1RAAC97DA80 AMRAAC07DA1 AMRAAC07DAR AMRAAC07DA AMRAAC07DA7R AMRAAC07DA10 AMRAAC07DA1 AMRAAC07DA0 AMRAAC07DA0 AMRAAC07DA0 AMRAAC97DA80 AMRAAC07DA1 AMRAAC07DAR AMRAAC07DA AMRAAC07DA7R AMRAAC07DA10 AMRAAC07DA1 AMRAAC07DA0 AMRAAC07DA0 AMRAAC07DA0 AMRAAC97DA80 Table -7. AMR ing System AMR A 9 LC 1 DDU 1 1 Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A STD 18X X Internal Circuit 0 of Poles 1 = 1-Pole = -Pole = -Pole 4 = 4-Pole = -Pole 6 = 6-Pole 7 = 7-Pole 8 = 8-Pole Frequency A = 0/60 Hz B = dc C = 400 Hz D = 0/60 Hz/dc Switch Only Series Trip w/auxiliary Series Trip Shunt/Tap Relay Trip Dual DuCon DuCon Series+Relay Mid-Trip Mid-Trip w/alarm Switch Handle Location AC = Single-Pole Breakers LC = Multi-Pole Breakers Approval Code WNU = CE TA = TUV/UL 1077 DA = UL 1077 DDU = UL 489 (Up to 77 Vac) DNU = None Terminal/Mounting Code Imperial Metric Terminals Auxiliary Switch Options 07 = NO-NC 4.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on Threads (70 A) 1/4-0 Threads ( A) M Threads (70 A) M6 Threads (70 A) Plug-in 7.77 x 16.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.4 Fuse Clip Current Code Current (Amperes) R0 R R0 1 R 7R Curve P = Instant 1 = Long Delay 8X Inrush = Medium Delay 8X Inrush = Short Delay 8X Inrush 4 = Long Delay 18X Inrush = Medium Delay 18X Inrush 6 = Short Delay 18X Inrush 7 = Long Delay X Inrush 8 = Medium Delay X Inrush 9 = Short Delay X Inrush S = Switch Only Select from 1 to 8 poles, and enter the number in position of the catalog number. For example, an AML would identify a -pole AML breaker. On multi-pole breakers, Steps and can be repeated if subsequent poles are different than the first. Identification starts from left-hand side when viewing the front of the breaker. These will provide standard handle locations. For additional options, contact the Technical Resource Center. Specific data on trip curves can be found on the Web at Enter the whole number current rating. For example, use code 1 for a 1 A current rating. For fractional amperages, use an R to designate the decimal point. For 0.10 A, enter the code R10. Current range up to amperes 0/60 Hz, 60 amperes 400 Hz, Adc. Discount Symbol SP-1

295 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AMR Series -9 Table -74. ACR ing System ACR A 9 LC 1 DDU 1 4 Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A STD 18X X Internal Circuit 0 of Poles 1 = 1-Pole = -Pole = -Pole 4 = 4-Pole = -Pole 6 = 6-Pole 7 = 7-Pole 8 = 8-Pole Frequency A = 0/60 Hz B = dc C = 400 Hz D = 0/60 Hz/dc Switch Only Series Trip w/auxiliary Series Trip Shunt/Tap Relay Trip Dual DuCon DuCon Series+Relay Mid-Trip Mid-Trip w/alarm Switch Handle Location AC = Single-Pole Breakers LC = Multi-Pole Breakers Approval Code WNU = CE TA = TUV/UL 1077 DA = UL 1077 DDU = UL 489 (Up to 77 Vac) DNU = None Terminal/Mounting Code Imperial Metric Terminal Auxiliary Switch Options 07 = NO-NC 4.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on Threads (70 A) 1/4-0 Threads ( A) M Threads (70 A) M6 Threads (70 A) Plug-in 7.77 x 16.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.4 Fuse Clip Current Code Current (Amperes) R0 R R0 1 R 7R Time Delay Curve P = Instant 1 = Long Delay Std. Inrush = Medium Delay Std. Inrush = Short Delay Std. Inrush 4 = Long Delay 18X Inrush = Medium Delay 18X Inrush 6 = Short Delay 18X Inrush 7 = Long Delay X Inrush 8 = Medium Delay X Inrush 9 = Short Delay X Inrush S = Switch Only Select from 1 to 8 poles, and enter the number in position of the catalog number. For example, an AML would identify a -pole AML breaker. On multi-pole breakers, Steps and can be repeated if subsequent poles are different than the first. Identification starts from left-hand side when viewing the front of the breaker. These will provide standard handle locations. For additional options, contact the Technical Resource Center. Specific data on trip curves can be found on the Web at Enter the whole number current rating. For example, use code 1 for a 1 A current rating. For fractional amperages, use an R to designate the decimal point. For 0.10 A, enter the code R10. Current range up to amperes 0/60 Hz, 60 amperes 400 Hz, Adc.

296 -96 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AMR Series May 008 Table -7. AML ing System AML A AE DDU Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A 8X 18X X Internal Circuit 0 of Poles 1 = 1-Pole = -Pole = -Pole 4 = 4-Pole = -Pole 6 = 6-Pole 7 = 7-Pole 8 = 8-Pole Frequency A = 0/60 Hz B = dc C = 400 Hz D = 0/60 Hz/dc Switch Only Series Trip w/auxiliary Series Trip Shunt/Tap Relay Trip Dual DuCon DuCon Series+Relay Mid-Trip Mid-Trip w/alarm Switch Handle Location AE = Single-Pole Breakers DE = Multi-Pole Breakers Illumination Code One-Position Red Green Yellow Blue Position OFF ON Mid -Trip Approval Code WNU = CE TA = TUV/UL 1077 DA = UL 1077 DDU = UL 489 DNU = None Terminal/Mounting Code Imperial Metric Terminal Auxiliary Switch Options 07 = NO-NC 4.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on 10- Threads (70 A) 1/4-0 Threads ( A) M Threads (70 A) M6 Threads (70 A) Plug-in 7.77 x 16.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.4 Fuse Clip Current Code Current (Amperes) R0 R R0 1 R 7R Curve P = Instant 1 = Long Delay 8X Inrush = Medium Delay 8X Inrush = Short Delay 8X Inrush 4 = Long Delay 18X Inrush = Medium Delay 18X Inrush 6 = Short Delay 18X Inrush 7 = Long Delay X Inrush 8 = Medium Delay X Inrush 9 = Short Delay X Inrush S = Switch Only Two-Position Green/ Red Red/ Green Yellow/ Blue Blue/ Yellow Position ON/OFF Two-Position Yellow/ Green Green/ Yellow Red/ Yellow Yellow/ Red Position ON/OFF Select from 1 to 8 poles, and enter the number in position of the catalog number. For example, an AML would identify a -pole AML breaker. On multi-pole breakers, Steps and can be repeated if subsequent poles are different than the first. Identification starts from left-hand side when viewing the front of the breaker. These will provide standard handle locations. For additional options, contact the Technical Resource Center. Up to 77 Vac. Specific data on trip curves can be found on the Web at Enter the whole number current rating. For example, use code 1 for a 1 A current rating. For fractional amperages, use an R to designate the decimal point. For 0.10 A, enter the code R10.

297 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers C Series -97 C Series CD Rear Connection Front Mounting CF Front Connected Back Panel Mounting Product Description Eaton s Heinemann C Series breakers incorporate the benefits of hydraulicmagnetic technology in a familiar molded case design. The C Series is popular in outdoor locations, in either high temperature or low temperature environments where nuisance tripping might have been a problem in the past. Application Description The C Series is built for a wide range of applications, and is one of the most versatile designs. From heating and air conditioning to modern railcars, the C Series breaker is built for the most demanding industrial applications. With the precision overcurrent protection provided by the C Series, many manufacturers have been able to extend their warranties and deliver more reliability to their customers. Popular in the HVAC market, the C Series delivers true equipment protection, ensuring OEMs that their equipment will be safe in any environment. Available in a wide range of mounting options, the C Series breaker can be ordered as either a front or back connected device. Features, Benefits and Functions Environmental, vibration and shock resistant Mil-spec qualification for fungus resistance, humidity, salt spray resistance and shock vibration resistance. Heat-induced nuisance tripping eliminated The protector is designed to hold in at % continuous rated current, regardless of ambient temperatures from -40 C to +8 C. Immediate reset after trip The protector can be reset (closed) immediately after an overcurrent trip without a cooling off period. 1/ cycle high inrush tolerance 8X (Standard) and X The protector is available with different levels of tolerance to 1/ cycle current spikes. Standard tolerance is 8X the continuous current rating; in addition, X is also available. Overcurrent curves, long, medium or short delay Time characteristic curves are available as Short, Medium and Long Delay. Integral auxiliary switch (optional selection) One auxiliary switch (a or b) can be factory installed per pole. A separate pole for auxiliary is NOT required. Contact Eaton for price adder. Precise overcurrent calibration The protector can be precisely calibrated to a wide variety of current ratings, from 0.1 to continuous amperes. Standards and Certifications UL 1077/UL 489 and CSA.. Due to its rugged construction, the C Series is UL listed through 40 Vac or 1 Vdc. The breaker also carries ratings up to Vac as a UL Recognized Device under UL 08.

298 I I -98 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers C Series May 008 Technical Data Dimensions in Inches and (mm).48 (88.).61 (66.) Front Mounted Back Connected (CD) 0. (.6) 1.0 (6.1).07 (.6).1 (10.) 4.7 (10.7).16 (4.8) LINE Insulation Barrier 8 ± ± 0.66 (16.7) 1.1 (8.6). (7.) ( ) ON OFF I ON O OFF I O 1.8 (4.9).7 (69.9) #6- Thread Insert x 0.0 (7.6) Deep (Two per Pole) Back Mounted Front Connected (CF) 1.1 (8.6) 0.1 (.).80 (147.) 0.48 (1.).61 (66.) 0.1 (.18) for CD and CE 0. (.6) 8 ± ± 0.66 (16.7) 1.1 (8.6). (7.) ( ) 1.0 (6.1) 0.0 (.1) Mounting Holes 0. (6.) Mounting Holes 0. (.6) Mounting Holes.7 (60.) ON OFF.07 (.6) OFF 1.06 Ref. Mounting Holes O ON O 0. (.) 1.7 (4.9) Mounting Slot Clearance for #8- Thread (Two per Pole) 0.68 (17.4).7 (69.9) #6- Thread Insert x 0. (.6) Deep (Two per Pole) /8-4 Thread Pressure Connector (Two per Pole) 1.06 ± (6.06 ± 0.) Typ. Each Breaker Minimum Panel Opening Dimensions See Breaker Maximum Width Dimensions..9 (8.1) 0. (1.) 1.14 (9.0) 1.0 (6.6) 1 Pole Pole Pole 4 Pole Pole 6 Pole.11 (.7).16 (80.) 4.0 (106.8). (1.4) 6.0 (160.0) 1.7 (4.9).7 (69.8) Figure -97. C Series Typical Dimensions

299 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers C Series -99 Product Selection Standard s Standard C Series breakers are UL listed for applications at 40 volts or less, and are built with mechanical lugs for cable connection. All breakers are panel mount, cable in/out design. Standard Breaker Configurations The C Series can be ordered in a number of standard configurations utilizing the tables to the right. Once you create your catalog number, you can contact our Technical Resource Center for verification and quotations. Custom Applications The C Series is also available in a number of custom configurations to meet your specific application needs. To order a special application breaker, you can visit our Web site at for a list of custom modifications and information on how to obtain a proprietary catalog number. You may also contact the Technical Resource Center for application information and breaker selection assistance. Table -77. C Series ing System Table -76. Standard Product Offering CF Standard Breakers are configured for ac circuits, back panel mounting, and cable in/cable out. Standard breakers are configured for ac circuits, rear connection. Poles Current (Amperes) Curve CD1AU0010A CD1AU0010A CD1AU0000A CD1AU0000A CD1AU0000A CD1AU0000A CDAU0010A CDAU0010A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU0010A CDAU0010A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU0000A CDAU00A CDAU00A CDAU00A CDAU00A CD G DU A Poles Current (Amperes) Curve CF1GU0010A CF1GU0010A CF1GU0000A CF1GU0000A CF1GU0000A CF1GU0000A CFGU0010A CFGU0010A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU0010A CFGU0010A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU0000A CFGU00A CFGU00A CFGU00A CFGU00A Style CD CF Description Front Mount Back Mount of Poles 1 = 1-Pole = -Pole = -Pole 4 = 4-Pole = -Pole 6 = 6-Pole Voltage and Frequency Code Code Frequency Terminal Location A B G H 0/60 Hz dc 0/60 Hz ac/dc Back Back Front Front Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A STD X Internal Circuit Approval Code Current DU = UL Vac or 1 Vac Maximum AB = UL Vac Maximum AE = UL 08 Vac Maximum Switch Only Series Trip w/auxiliary Switch Series Trip Voltage A = 0 0 Vac B = 1 Vac C = 0 1 Vac D = Vac Time Delay Curve 01 = Long Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Medium Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Short Delay Std. Inrush = Motor Start Curve 10 = Long Delay X Inrush 0 = Medium Delay X Inrush 0 = Short Delay X Inrush Select from 1 to 6 poles, and enter the number in position of the catalog number. For example, a CD would identify a -pole C Series breaker. Style includes Toggle Handle with Black ON/OFF handle color. Enter the four digit current rating. For example, use code 001 for a 1 ampere current rating. For fractional amperages use an R to designate the decimal point. For 0.10 ampere, enter the code 0R10. Available from amperes. Discount Symbol SP-1

300 -00 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GH Series May 008 GH Series GH Series breaker Product Description Eaton s GH Series breaker offers the benefits of hydraulic-magnetic protection in a compact, economical design. Heinemann brand breakers have proven their ability by performing in harsh environment installations, indoor and outdoor, requiring a compact, environmentally stable breaker rated to amperes at 480 Vac. Application Description Because of their ability to furnish both close-rated locked rotor protection and running overcurrent protection without derating in extreme and highly variable ambient conditions, the Series GH breakers are popular in a variety of industries air conditioning, electric heating, computer main frame and central processing, transportation and many others. In addition, since the GH Series utilizes hydraulic-magnetic technology, you can specify a breaker to match your particular application. Features, Benefits and Functions Fungus and humidity resistance Provided in accordance with MIL- STD-0 by treating all ferrous parts with a special moisture-resistant finish and by using special springs and fungus-resistant cases, covers and handles. Shock Tested in accordance with MIL-STD-0, Method 1, Test Condition I (G s at 6 milliseconds). Vibration Tested in accordance with MIL-STD-0, Method 04, 10 to 00 Hz, 0.06-inch total excursion on three mutually perpendicular planes. Shock and vibration tests apply to time delay breakers only and are performed with units carrying full rated current. Life 10,000 cycles. Approximate weights GH. lbs. (14.96 kg) Dielectric strength 1960 Vac. Insulation resistance (internal resistance) Impedance or internal resistance across breaker at full rated load. Technical Data Dimensions in Inches and (mm) * 0.7 (9.).7 (8.7) *.0 (6.).1 (79.4) 1.7 (4.9) 1.7 (4.9) 0.84 (1.4) 4.1 (104.8) Front-Connected Construction.98 (101.) 0.0 (.) Optional Auxiliary Switch 6.00 (1.4) 4.70 (119.4) Center to Center 0.84 (1.4) 0.69 (17.6) 0.94 (.8) Back-Connected Construction 1/4-0 Press-In Stud 1.00 (.4) 4.11 (104.8).0 (6.) 1.7 (4.9) 0.69 (17.) * Mounting Front-Connected Breakers, Clearance Holes for #10- (Four Places) with Screw Length.0 Inches (6. mm) * Mounting Back-Connected Breakers, Provided with #8- Mounting I (Four Places) with Screw Length 0.7 Inches (9. mm) * Indicates minimum mounting screw lengths. Panel thickness must be added to this dimension. Add additional length for screw protrusion behind panel if using nuts. Figure -98. GH Basic Dimensions

301 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GH Series -01 Product Selection Standard Breaker Configurations The GH Series can be ordered in a number of standard configurations utilizing the table to the right. Once you create your catalog number, you can contact our Technical Resource Center for verification and quotations. Custom Applications The GH Series is also available in a number of custom configurations to meet your specific application needs. To order a special application breaker, you can visit our Web site at for a list of custom modifications and information on how to obtain a proprietary catalog number. You may also contact the Technical Resource Center for application information and breaker selection assistance. Table -78. Standard Product Offering Poles Current Curve (Amperes) GHAU0010B GHAU0010B GHAU0000B GHAU0000B GHAU0000B GHAU0000B GHAU0000B GHAU0000B GHAU00B GHAU00B GHAU00B GHAU00B Table -79. GH ing System GH G U B of Voltage and Frequency Code Current Poles Code Frequency Terminal Location = -Pole A 0/60 Hz Back Approval Code B dc Back U = UL Vac or 0 Vac Maximum C 400 Hz Back AB = UL Vac Maximum G 0/60 Hz Front AE = UL 08 Vac Maximum H dc Front A = UL 1077 J 400 Hz Front Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A STD X Internal Circuit Switch Only Series Trip w/auxiliary Switch Series Trip Shunt/Tap Relay Trip Voltage B = 1 Vac D = Vac Time Delay Curve 01 = Long Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Medium Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Short Delay Std. Inrush = Motor Start Curve 10 = Long Delay X Inrush 0 = Medium Delay X Inrush 0 = Short Delay X Inrush Style includes Toggle Handle with Black ON/OFF handle color. Enter the four digit current rating. For example, use code 001 for a 1 ampere current rating. GH Series breakers are available from 1 amperes. Discount Symbol SP-1

302 -0 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AM1P Series May 008 AM1P Series AM1P Series Circuit Breaker Product Description Increased performance and compact packaging make the AM1P perfect for demanding dc applications. The AM1P delivers maximum performance in the smallest package size available in the industry. Application Description With a 0 ampere current rating and 0,000 ampere interrupting capacity at 80 Vdc, the AM1P is ideal for telecommunications sites with space constraints or high current applications. Using a parallel wiring configuration, the AM1P delivers 00 amperes in a -pole design and 0 amperes in a -pole design. In addition, the AM1P employs a proprietary technology known as PCE or Precision Current Equalization. This technology ensures that current flows evenly through all poles and nuisance tripping is eliminated. Features, Benefits and Functions Maximum current rating up to 0 amperes. Plug-in, screw and stud terminals. Operating temperature -40 C to +8 C. Shock-tested for shock in accordance with MIL-STD-0, Method 1, Test Condition I. Vibration-tested in accordance with MIL-STD-0, Method 04, while carrying full-rated current. Technical Data Dimensions in Inches and (mm) 0. (14.1) 0.41 (10.) ON I 1 ± 1 ± OFF O 0.6 (16.7).00 (0.8) 0.14 (.) 0.14 (.6) Figure -99. Standard Handle Configuration.86 (7.6) Minimum life of 10,000 on/off operations, with 6,000 at rated current and voltage, and 4,000 at no load. Dielectric strength tested in accordance with MIL-STD-0, Method 100 volts at 0/60 Hz, 1 Vdc (or twice rating plus 0 volts). Insulation resistance of Megaohms minimum at 00 Vdc, per MIL-STD-0, Method 0. Flammability specifications of UL 94-VO Case, UL 94-HB Handle. Standards and Certifications The AM1P Series is UL 489A listed. 1 Dim. X Typical Multi-Pole Terminal Barrier 0.8 (7.1) 1.94 (49.).74 (69.6) 0.40 (10.1)

303 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AM1P Series (8.1) 0.7 (19.1). (7.) x 0.7 (19.1) 1.1 (8.6) 0.91 (.0) 1.1 (8.6) 0.91 (.0).0 (6.).06 (.4).0 (6.).06 (.4) 4X.18 - UNC-B Internal Thread.08 Max. Deep 1. (6.8) 1. (8.6).7 (19.1) 0.91 (.0).06 (.4) 6X.18 - UNC-B Internal Thread.08 Max. Deep 1. (6.8).8 (7.9) 0.91 (.0).06 (.4) 4X ÿ.16 (.96) 6X ÿ.16 ÿ(.96) x 0.7 (19.1) Panel Cutout Panel Cutout Figure -. -Pole Configuration ( Ampere) Figure Pole Configuration (01 0 Amperes)

304 -04 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers AM1P Series May 008 Product Selection Table -80. AM1 ing System AM1P B9 LC 97 DDU Breaker Family AM1P Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A 18X X Internal Circuit B B B B1 B16 B98 B99 B9 B8 B B B6 B9 B8 B Handle Location/Color LC = Multi-Pole Breakers Series Trip w/auxiliary Series Trip Shunt/Tap DuCon DuCon Series+Relay Mid-Trip Mid-Trip w/alarm Switch Current Auxiliary Switch Options 07 = NO-NC 4.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on = NO-NC.8 Fast-on Approval Code DGU = UL 489 A (6 Vac 0 ka) DAU = UL 489 A (80 Vac 10 ka) DNU = None Curve P = Instant 1 = Long Delay 8X Inrush = Medium Delay 8X Inrush = Short Delay 8X Inrush 4 = Long Delay 1X Inrush = Medium Delay 1X Inrush 6 = Short Delay 1X Inrush 7 = Long Delay X Inrush 8 = Medium Delay X Inrush 9 = Short Delay X Inrush Terminal/Mounting Code Imperial Metric Terminal /4-0 Threads ( A) M6 Threads ( A) Plug-in 7.77 x 16.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.6 Plug-in 6. x 1.4 M6 Screw 1/4-0 Screw Specify LC for multi-pole breakers with common trip handle as standard. Enter the three digit current rating from amperes amperes is configured as -poles in parallel, 01 0 as -poles in parallel. Specific data on trip curves can be found on the Web at

305 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GJ Series -0 GJ Series GJ Series Circuit Breakers Product Description Heinemann Series GJ Circuit Breakers are the logical choice for high-current service entrance and panelboard installations, as well as control and protection of commercial and industrial lighting, transformers, motors and power supplies. The precisely tailored time delays and ability to interrupt high currents make them ideal for critical applications with inductive or other loads of up to 80 amperes. Application Description The hydraulic-magnetic load-sensing and time delay mechanism of the Series GJ is insensitive to changes in ambient or enclosure temperature, adapting it to service conditions encountered in electric vehicles, roofmounted air conditioners and other outdoor or heat-loaded equipment. Unlike thermal breakers, the GJ breaker can be loaded to rated capacity without causing nuisance tripping when ambient temperature rises. It is also well suited for protecting line-sensitive loads, such as critical data processing equipment and computers. Features, Benefits and Functions Standard maximum voltages: GJ1, GJ and GJ: 40 Vac, 0/60/400 Hz GJ1: 1 Vdc GJ: 1/0 Vdc Breakers will be labeled with standard maximum (UL) voltage unless otherwise specified. Maximum current rating: Up to 80 amperes per pole. Interrupting capacities: GJ1: 10 ka at 40 Vac 160 Vdc, ka at 6 Vdc GJ/: 18 ka at 40 Vac 10 ka at 1/0 Vdc Terminal Types Standard: front-connected, pressurewire terminals accepting copper or aluminum wire sizes from 78 to 7 mm (6 to 00 kcmil). Back-connected and many special terminals are available. Consult Customer Service Center. Operating temperature range: 40 C to +8 C. Fungus and humidity resistance MIL-STD-0, Ferrous parts incorporate special moisture-resistant finish. Springs, cases and handles are made from fungus-resistant materials. Shock MIL-STD-0, Method 1. Test condition g's for 6 milliseconds (Time delay breakers only). Vibration MIL-STD-0, Method 4, 10 to 00 Hz, 0.06-inch total excursion on three mutually perpendicular planes (time delay breakers only). Testing completed at full rated current 0/60 Hz. Optional Features 1-, - or -pole models. Fast, medium or slow response times to accurately match load conditions. Auxiliary switch for signaling. Back connected series trip, relay or shunt configurations. A mounting kit assembly is available for the GJ breakers (Cat. No ).

306 -06 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GJ Series May 008 Technical Data Dimensions in Inches and (mm) 1.9 (49.0) 1.6 (41.9).1 (8.7).8 (97.) 1.0 (8.1) (TYP.) 0.8 (7.1) 1.44 (6.6).81 (71.4) 1.44 (6.6).09 (78.) (9.) (8.7) ON 8 R1.8 (46.) 0.9 (9.9) 1.47 (7.) 0.7 (19.1) (TYP.) #10- Inserts.44 Deep ( Per Pole). Front Mount 1.0 (8.1).18 (80.8).96 (7.).70 (68.6).06 (77.7).9 (8.6) 7.1 (180.8) 0.0 (.1).66 (67.6) 1.67 (4.4) 0.6 (1.7) 0.7 (19.1).1 (8.7) 0. (6.4).84 (7.1) Figure -10. GJ Typical Dimensions

307 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GJ Series -07 Product Selection Standard Breaker Configurations The GJ Series can be ordered in a number of standard configurations utilizing the GJ ing System. Once you create your catalog number, you can contact our Technical Resource Center for verification and quotations. Table -81. GJ ing System Custom Applications The GJ Series is also available in a number of custom configurations to meet your specific application needs. To order a special application breaker, you can visit our Web site at for a list of custom modifications and information on how to obtain a proprietary catalog number. You may also contact the Technical Resource Center for application information and breaker selection assistance. GJ A U A of Poles 1 = 1-Pole = -Pole = -Pole Internal Circuit Type and Inrush Code N/A STD X Internal Circuit 0 6 Voltage and Frequency Code Code Frequency Terminal Location A B C G H J 0/60 Hz dc 400 Hz 0/60 Hz dc 400 Hz 9 8 Back Back Back Front Front Front Switch Only Series Trip w/auxiliary Switch Series Trip Shunt/Tap Relay Trip Current Approval Code U = UL Applications Voltage A = 0 0 Vac C = 0 1 Vac Time Delay Curve 01 = Long Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Medium Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Short Delay Std. Inrush = Motor Start Curve 10 = Long Delay X Inrush 0 = Medium Delay X Inrush 0 = Short Delay X Inrush 0P = None Select from 1 to poles, and enter the number in position of the catalog number. For example, a GJ would identify a -pole GJ Series breaker. Style includes Toggle Handle with Black ON/OFF handle color. Enter the four digit current rating. For example, use code 001 for a 1 ampere current rating. Breakers are available from 80 amperes.

308 -08 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GJ1P Series May 008 GJ1P Series GJ1P Series Breaker Product Description Eaton Corporation s Heinemann GJ1P breakers offer high-quality circuit protection for dc applications from to 100 amperes. Application Description Their precisely tailored time delays and ability to interrupt high currents makes them ideally suited for critical applications. On overloads exceeding % of rating, there is no intentional time delay and the breaker interrupts currents of as much as,000 amperes at 6 Vdc up to 100 amperes. Features, Benefits and Functions An optional shunt ( or 0 millivolt full scale) permits metering of current. Since the shunt output is low voltage, light-gauge wiring can be used from shunt to meter. Indication may be displayed in percent, watts, safe/danger or other dial calibrations. In addition, the bus bar is available in two versions, Standard Size and Reduced Size. Contact your Eaton sales representative for more information. Precision Current Equalization (PCE) Circuit Breakers GJ1P breakers rated 0 to 100 amperes are built in parallel construction. Conventional parallel pole breakers can experience uneven current distribution because of variations in internal resistances. This condition can result in nuisance tripping since the higher current in one parallel branch has the same effect as an overload on the sensing element in that branch. Proprietary Precision Current Equalization (PCE) circuit breakers, on the other hand, allow for differences in internal resistances by automatically distributing the current equally through the parallel current sensing elements, minimizing the danger of nuisance tripping. The UL listed series GJ1P (UL 489) models are available in a choice of fast, medium or slow response times to accurately match load conditions. They can be ordered in series trip, mid-trip and switch only constructions and are available front- or backmounted, front- or back-connected, with optional auxiliary switches for signaling.

309 I I May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GJ1P Series -09 Technical Data Dimensions in Inches and (mm) 1.94 (49.). (64.) 1.9 (49.0) (6.4) OFF OFF O.8 (97.) 1.6 ON ON. (64.0) (60.).69 (68.) Mtg. Hole For #10- Screw. ON OFF Mounting I O ON OFF I O.8 (97.) Mtg. Hole Dist (11.) 0.8 (7.1).09 (78.).81 (71.4) 1.44 (6.6) 1.1 (9.).1 (8.7) 1.44 (6.6) 8 R1.8 (46.) #10- Inserts.44 Deep ( Per Pole) (7.) 0.8 (9.7).61 (66.).00 (76.) -Pole (8.1) 1-Pole.18 (80.8).96 (7.) 1.7 (.) (10.9) 1.68 (4.7) 0.66 (16.8) 4.18 (106.) 1.14 (9.0) 1.6 (41.1).10 (.) 4.76 (10.9) 7.1 (180.8) 0. (1.) 1.4 (9.1) 0. (6.4) TYP TYP.66 (67.6) 4. (107.4) 0.8 (7.1).9 (74.9).97 (7.4) 0.4 (6.1) 0.4 (6.1) Figure -10. GJ1P Typical Dimensions

310 -10 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers GJ1P Series May 008 Product Selection Table -8. GJ1P ing System GJ1P B P EDU of Poles 1 = 1-Pole = -Pole = -Pole Terminal Location B = Back H = Front Metering Shunt P = None M = mv N = 0 mv Current Terminal Configuration DDU = Solderless Connector EDU = Bus Bar Connection Time Delay Curve 01 = Long Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Medium Delay Std. Inrush 0 = Short Delay Std. Inrush 0P = Instant Internal Circuit Type 0 = Switch Only = Series Trip w/auxiliary Switch = Series Trip 98 = Series/Mid Trip 98 = Series/Mid/Alarm Switch Select from 1 to poles, and enter the number in position of the catalog number. For example, a GJ1P would identify a 1-pole GJ Series breaker. Style includes Toggle Handle with Black ON/OFF handle color and 6- mounting. Enter the four digit current rating. For example, use code 001 for a 1 ampere current rating. Breakers are available from 80 amperes.

311 May 008 Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Special Applications -11 Industrial Solutions Marine Industry If you are an OEM building Radio Base Station Equipment, or looking for ways to distribute dc power more efficiently, Eaton has a solution ready for your application. Our facilities in Switzerland have designed both integrated distribution modules (IDM) and bus bar solutions to distribute power to your equipment, requiring less labor during fabrication. In addition, we have developed several custom products to improve the reliability of communications equipment in both civilian and military applications. Eaton Heinemann is also one of the manufacturers of electrical equipment that can combine the benefits of hydraulic-magnetic protection and ac site power protection in conjunction with Eaton Cutler-Hammer Products. At Eaton Heinemann, we know the telecommunications business, and we can help shorten your product delivery cycle. From design services, to logistics, to contract manufacturing, Eaton can help you keep your customers communicating. -Pole AMR Series Eaton Heinemann Breakers for Marine Craft Where there is a need for small, lightweight, low-cost reliable circuit breakers, boat designers have found Eaton Heinemann an excellent choice. Long a standard in the industry, Heinemann breakers meet a wide variety of demanding needs in marine craft. From a single-pole breaker for ON/OFF switching and overcurrent protection on smaller boats to multi-pole breakers with auxiliary functions on larger vessels, you can expect to find a Heinemann breaker that will meet your requirements. The JA/S, JE/S and AMR circuit breakers are perfect for basic marine applications exposed to temperature variations and vibration. The JE/S adds a watertight seal and is suitable for locations where water spray and splash might occur. Eaton Heinemann s marine circuit breakers (MAS, MES and MMR) are UL listed under UL 100 for Marine Applications and meet all U.S. Coast Guard requirements. The marine line is ignition protected and designed for use aboard gasoline-powered craft in engine compartments and closed areas where gasoline vapors may be present. In addition, Eaton Heinemann offers services and options for OEMs focused on finding ways to reduce costs without sacrificing quality. Eaton can provide fully wired custom panel solutions eliminating the need to deal with multiple vendors and additional procurement costs. Sealed Toggle JE Series DC Distribution Panel Telecommunications Internal Distribution Module Powering Wireless Telecommunications Eaton Heinemann circuit breakers power nearly half of all wireless telecommunications equipment in the world. Chosen for their precision protection and high reliability in outdoor environments, Eaton Heinemann circuit breakers deliver reliable power eliminating costs for some of the largest wireless carriers in the U.S. and abroad. 0U Bus and Cable System